Civil engineering, surveying and building Books

Book SynopsisThis is the only book that takes a zero-waste approach to propose 100% sustainable water purification techniques. Water is synonymous with life. This has been the case since pre-historic time to the modern era. For the first time, humanity faces a crisis that eclipses the energy crisis, which has often incapacitated the global economy. The Climate-Water-Food nexus epitomizes our current civilization that depends on energy as the driver. Many recognize this crisis as a product of fossil fuel production, which allegedly triggered climate change and the climate change debate. Others predict the onslaught of water wars in the coming decades. As the world gears up to another lineup of empty promises and ensuing chaos, this book turns this crisis on its head and shows the source of the water crisis. The science behind the water cycle is described in clear language, without resorting to dogmatic assertions and spurious assumptions. The role of the sun, natural carbon dioxide (CO2) and wTable of ContentsPreface xi 1 Introduction 1.1 Opening Remarks 1 1.2 Climate-Water-Food Nexus 5 1.3 Background 8 1.4 Insufficiency in Water Purification Processes 9 1.5 Introduction to Zero Waste Engineering 11 1.6 Scope of the Book 12 1.7 Organization and Introduction of the Chapters 12 2 Water Science 2.1 Introduction 15 2.2 Unique Features of Water 16 2.3 Natural State of Matter 31 2.4 Source of Water and Its Role in Sustaining Life 37 2.4.1 Inorganic Minerals 38 2.4.2 Organic Contaminants 49 2.4.3 Radioactive Minerals 49 2.4.4 Biological 50 3 Sustainability of Current Water Purification Technologies 3.1 Introduction 59 3.2 Sustainability Criteria 68 3.3 Sustainability in the Information Age and Environmental Insult 69 3.3.1 Agriculture and Development 71 3.3.2 Desertification 72 3.3.3 Ecosystem Change 72 3.3.4 Fisheries 72 3.3.5 Deforestation 73 3.3.6 Marine Litter 74 3.3.7 Water Resources 75 3.4 Biological Processes 77 3.4.1 Sulfate Reducing Bacteria 80 3.5 Chemical Precipitation 82 3.6 Membrane Separation 85 3.6.1 Microfiltration 88 3.6.2 Ultrafiltration 90 3.6.3 Nanofiltration 92 3.6.4 Reverse Osmosis 95 3.7 Ion Exchange 97 3.8 Ozonation 99 3.9 UV Radiation 104 3.10 Adsorption 107 3.10.1 Existing Sorbents 108 3.10.2 Agricultural Waste 109 3.10.3 Industrial By-Products 114 3.10.4 Natural Materials 118 4 Sustainable Drinking Water Purification Techniques 4.1 Introduction 123 4.2 Natural Lifestyle 126 4.2.1 Environmental Awareness 131 4.2.2 Corporatization and Healthcare 134 4.2.3 Death and Lifestyle 135 4.2.4 Role of Water in Bodily Functions 140 4.2.5 A Relevant Anecdote 147 4.3 Natural Minerals 148 4.3.1 Filters 149 4.3.2 Ground Water Recharge 150 4.3.3 Aeration 150 4.3.4 Brick, Clay and Others 150 4.4 Solar UV Treatment 151 4.5 Natural Ozonation 152 5 Sustainable Purification Techniques for Agricultural Waters 5.1 Introduction 155 5.2 Organic vs. Chemical Agricultural Practices 161 5.2.1 Denaturing for a Profit 169 5.2.2 The Consequences 170 5.2.3 The Sugar Culture and Beyond 171 5.3 Removal of Heavy Metals 179 5.3.1 Application of Wood Sawdust for Removal of Heavy Metals 181 5.3.1.1 Composition, Structure and Morphology of Wood 182 5.3.1.2 Structure and Morphology of Wood 183 5.3.1.3 Removal of Heavy Metals Using Wood Saw Dust 191 5.3.1.4 Conclusion 206 5.4 Removal of Heavy Metals Using Fish Scale 208 5.4.1 Fish Scale Collection and Treatment 208 5.4.2 Experimental Setup and Procedure 209 5.4.2.1 Static Method 209 5.4.2.2 Dynamic Method 211 5.4.3 Conclusions 215 5.5 Solar UV Treatment 216 5.5.1 Effects of UV-Radiation 217 5.5.2 Effects of Temperature (Infrared Radiation) 218 5.5.3 Advantages of Solar Water Disinfection (SoDis) 218 5.5.4 Limitations of Solar Water Disinfection 219 5.6 Bioremediation for Sustainable Purification of Water 219 6 Sustainable Purification Techniques for Industrial Wastes 6.1 Removal of Radionuclides 221 6.2 Removal of Heavy Metals Precious Metals 224 6.2.1 Precious Metals and Heavy Metals Recovery 225 6.3 Industry Lifestyle Change 231 6.3.1 Mercury 237 6.3.2 Sal Ammoniac 244 6.3.3 Sulphur 246 6.3.4 Arsenic Sulphide 251 6.3.5 Refining Techniques 256 6.4 The Energy/Water Crisis 258 6.4.1 Are Natural Resources Finite and Human Needs Infinite? 258 6.4.2 The Finite/Infinite Conundrum 269 6.5 Certain Sustainable Technologies 270 6.5.1 Direct Use of Solar Energy 270 6.5.2 Effective Separation of Solid from Liquid 274 6.5.3 Effective Separation of Liquid from Liquid 275 6.5.4 Agricultural Waste for Water Purification and Value Addition 276 6.5.4.1 Orange Peel 277 6.5.4.2 Pomelo Peel 277 6.5.4.3 Grapefruit Peel 278 6.5.4.4 Lemon Peel 278 6.5.4.5 Banana Peel 279 6.5.4.6 Cassava Peel 280 6.5.4.7 Jackfruit Peel 281 6.5.4.8 Pomegranate Peel 281 6.5.4.9 Garlic Peel 282 6.5.5 A Novel Desalination Technique 283 6.5.6 A Novel Separation Technique 296 7 Summary and Conclusions 7.1 Summary 299 7.2 Conclusions 300 7.2.1 Chapter 1: Introduction 300 7.2.2 Chapter 2: Water Science 300 7.2.3 Chapter 3: Sustainability of Current Water Purification Techniques 301 7.2.4 Chapter 4: Sustainable Drinking Water Purification Techniques 301 7.2.5 Chapter 5: Sustainable Purification Techniques for Agricultural Wastes 302 7.2.6 Chapter 6: Sustainable Purification Techniques for Industrial Wastes 302 References and Bibliography 303 Index 325

Read more less

Book SynopsisAs the world's energy sources continue to develop, with less reliance on traditional fossil fuels and more reliance on cleaner, more efficient, alternative energy sources, nuclear power continues to be a dividing point for many people. Some believe it is the answer to our energy problems for the future, while others warn of the risks. Written by a retired scientist who spent most of his career at the Idaho National Laboratory (INL), this book aims to delve into the issues surrounding nuclear power and dispel its myths, while building an argument for why the United States should develop a nuclear power plan for the future. As a whistleblower, the author spent much of the last ten years of his career at the INL raising concerns about how its mission of serving as the Department of Energy's lead laboratory in radioactive waste management was not being properly managed. While the United States continues to tread water on the issue of nuclear energy, the author believes thatTable of ContentsIntroduction ix 1 Africa’s Especially Special Issues 1 2 Why Everything Boils Down to Energy Inputs 7 2.1 How Much Clean Sustainable Energy Will Our Descendants Need? 13 2.2 This Book’s Technological Fix’s Specifics 19 2.3 The Reasons Why Politically Correct Renewables Couldn’t Save the World 20 2.3.1 Which Food Crops Should Our Descendants Raise and How Much Land Would That Take? 24 2.3.2 The Whys and Costs of Desalination 26 2.3.3 Fertilizers 29 2.3.3.1 Nitrogen and the Cost of Fixing Enough of it to Feed Everyone 29 2.3.3.2 The Reasons Why Powdered Basalt Should Supply the Phosphorous and Potassium Required to Feed Everyone 30 3 A Sustainable Nuclear Renaissance’s Other “Killer Apps” 35 3.1 Atmospheric Carbon Sequestration 35 3.2 Nuclear Powered Transportation 40 3.2.1 Direct Electrical 40 3.2.2 Nuclear Powered Transportation Fuel Synthesis 42 3.2.3 “The Age of Substitutability” 47 3.2.4 Additional Apps 50 4 Why Sustainability Requires Breeder Reactors 51 5 Today’s More Promising Breeder Reactor Concepts 59 5.1 Heavy Water Thorium Breeders 59 5.2 Liquid Metal Fast Breeder Reactors (LMFBRs) 60 5.3 Molten Salt Reactors 62 5.3.1 MSFR 64 5.3.2 MCFR 66 5.3.3 MOLTEX 72 5.3.4 Tube in Shell Thorium Breeder 75 5.3.5 LFTR (Liquid Fluoride Thorium Reactor) 77 5.3.6 THORCON and IMSR 79 5.3.7 The Whys, Hows, and History of Sustainable Reactors 81 6 Economics: The Main Reason that the USA’s Nuclear Power Industry is Now on the Ropes 87 6.1 Generic Reactor Build Costs 100 6.2 Sustainable Reactor Build Costs 101 6.2.1 Materials 103 6.2.1.1 Concrete, Steel, etc. 103 6.2.1.2 Other Metals 105 6.2.1.3 Isotopically Pure Salts 106 6.2.1.4 Other Materials 107 6.2.1.5 Startup Fissile 107 6.3 Waste Management Costs 111 6.3.1 Waste Treatment 112 6.3.2 Waste Disposal 112 6.4 How Do We Pay for It? 116 7 The Nuclear Establishment’s Self-Inflicted Wounds 119 7.1 Refusal to Choose/Set Rational Goals 123 7.1.1 NGNP 124 7.1.2 DOE’s Savannah River Site’s MOX Boondoggling 126 7.1.3 DOE Hanford’s Reprocessing Waste Treatment Project’s Boondoggling 127 7.1.4 DOE’s “Lead Nuclear Engineering Lab’s” Radwaste Boondoggling 132 7.2 Fukushima’s “Nuclear Disaster” 137 7.3 The Nuclear Industry’s LNT-Based Radiation Dose Assumptions 141 7.4 ALARA (As Low As Reasonably Achievable) 143 7.5 Over Blown Proliferation Concerns 145 8 “The Damned Human Race” [196] 147 8.1 Greed 149 8.2 Tribalism 150 8.3 Gullibility 153 8.4 Laziness 155 8.5 Deviousness 156 8.6 Bullheadedness 157 8.6.1 Anti Nuclear “Environmentalists” 157 8.6.2 Hyper Secrecy 158 8.6.3 My Own Bullheadedness 160 8.7 Bullheadedness’ Consequences 160 8.7.1 INEL’s Calciner’s Off Gas “Opacity Issue” 160 8.7.2 Argonne Idaho’s IFR Waste Management Scheme 162 8.7.3 DOE’s Radwaste Classification System 164 9 Why the Western World’s Erstwhile Leader in Nuclear Energy Must “Embrace Change” 165 10 Suggestions for Improvement 179 11 Conclusions 185 References 193 Appendix I: Reprocessing 213 Appendix II: MSFR Isobreeder Fuel Salt Reprocessing 223 Appendix III: More Opinions about TERRAPOWER’s Reactor Concepts 225 Appendix IV: Example Additive Molar Volume Calculation 229 Appendix V: QBasic Startup Fissile Program 231 Appendix VI: A More Realistic Tube-In-Shell Thorium Breeder Reactor Startup Scenario 233 Appendix VII: Letter Sent to INEEL’s Director Circa 2001 (After “Separations” & Before “Steam Reforming” was the Site’s “Preferred Alternative”) 235 Appendix VIII: Letter Sent to Two of DOE’s Inspector General’s Lawyers Just after My Job Had Been Downsized for the Last Time 241 Appendix IX: Suggestions for Improving INL Reprocessing Waste Management 247 Appendix X: Greater Confinement Disposal 253 Appendix XI: How « hot » Are DOE’s High Level Wastes? 259 Appendix XII: How the Nuclear Industry’s «experts» Sometimes Mislead Us 261 Appendix XIII: Example of a Promising Concept that Needs Experimental Verification as Soon as Possible 265 Appendix XIV: INL’s Steam Reforming Process 269 Index 279

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of ContentsList of Contributors xii Preface xvii 1 Introduction to Biosurfactants 1José Vázquez Tato, Julio A. Seijas, M. Pilar Vázquez-Tato, Francisco Meijide,Santiago de Frutos, Aida Jover, Francisco Fraga, and Victor H. Soto 1.1 Introduction and Historical Perspective 1 1.2 Micelle Formation 5 1.3 Average Aggregation Numbers 14 1.4 Packing Properties of Amphiphiles 18 1.5 Biosurfactants 20 1.6 Sophorolipids 25 1.7 Surfactin 28 1.8 Final Comments 31 Acknowledgement 32 References 32 2 Metagenomics Approach for Selection of Biosurfactant Producing Bacteria from Oil Contaminated Soil: An Insight Into Its Technology 43Nazim F. Islam and Hemen Sarma 2.1 Introduction 43 2.2 Metagenomics Application: A State-of-the-Art Technique 44 2.3 Hydrocarbon-Degrading Bacteria and Genes 46 2.4 Metagenomic Approaches in the Selection of Biosurfactant-Producing Microbes 47 2.5 Metagenomics with Stable Isotope Probe (SIP) Techniques 48 2.6 Screening Methods to Identify Features of Biosurfactants 50 2.7 Functional Metagenomics: Challenge and Opportunities 52 2.8 Conclusion 53 Acknowledgements 54 References 54 3 Biosurfactant Production Using Bioreactors from Industrial Byproducts 59Arun Karnwal 3.1 Introduction 59 3.2 Significance of the Production of Biosurfactants from Industrial Products 60 3.3 Factors Affect Biosurfactant Production in Bioreactor 61 3.4 Microorganisms 61 3.5 Bacterial Growth Conditions 63 3.6 Substrate for Biosurfactant Production 65 3.7 Conclusions 71 Acknowledgement 71 References 72 4 Biosurfactants for Heavy Metal Remediation and Bioeconomics 79Shalini Srivastava, Monoj Kumar Mondal, and Shashi Bhushan Agrawal 4.1 Introduction 80 4.2 Concept of Surfactant and Biosurfactant for Heavy Metal Remediation 81 4.3 Mechanisms of Biosurfactant–Metal Interactions 82 4.4 Substrates Used for Biosurfactant Production 82 4.5 Classification of Biosurfactants 85 4.6 Types of Biosurfactants 85 4.7 Factors Influencing Biosurfactants Production 88 4.8 Strategies for Commercial Biosurfactant Production 89 4.9 Application of Biosurfactant for Heavy Metal Remediation 90 4.10 Bioeconomics of Metal Remediation Using Biosurfactants 93 4.11 Conclusion 94 References 94 5 Application of Biosurfactants for Microbial Enhanced Oil Recovery (MEOR) 99Jéssica Correia, Lígia R. Rodrigues, José A. Teixeira, and Eduardo J. Gudiña 5.1 Energy Demand and Fossil Fuels 99 5.2 Microbial Enhanced Oil Recovery (MEOR) 101 5.3 Mechanisms of Surfactant Flooding 102 5.4 Biosurfactants: An Alternative to Chemical Surfactants to Increase Oil Recovery 103 5.5 Biosurfactant MEOR: Laboratory Studies 104 5.6 Field Assays 112 5.7 Current State of Knowledge, Technological Advances, and Future Perspectives 113 Acknowledgements 114 References 114 6 Biosurfactant Enhanced Sustainable Remediation of Petroleum Contaminated Soil 119Pooja Singh, Selvan Ravindran, and Yogesh Patil 6.1 Introduction 119 6.2 Microbial-Assisted Bioremediation of Petroleum Contaminated Soil 121 6.3 Hydrocarbon Degradation and Biosurfactants 122 6.4 Soil Washing Using Biosurfactants 124 6.5 Combination Strategies for Efficient Bioremediation 126 6.6 Biosurfactant Mediated Field Trials 129 6.7 Limitations, Strategies, and Considerations of Biosurfactant-Mediated Petroleum Hydrocarbon Degradation 130 6.8 Conclusion 132 References 133 7 Microbial Surfactants are Next-Generation Biomolecules for Sustainable Remediation of Polyaromatic Hydrocarbons 139Punniyakotti Parthipan, Liang Cheng, Aruliah Rajasekar, and Subramania Angaiah 7.1 Introduction 139 7.2 Biosurfactant-Enhanced Bioremediation of PAHs 144 7.3 Microorganism’s Adaptations to Enhance Bioavailability 151 7.4 Influences of Micellization on Hydrocarbons Access 151 7.5 Accession of PAHs in Soil Texture 152 7.6 The Negative Impact of Surfactant on PAH Degradations 152 7.7 Conclusion and Future Directions 153 References 153 8 Biosurfactants for Enhanced Bioavailability of Micronutrients in Soil: A Sustainable Approach 159Siddhartha Narayan Borah, Suparna Sen, and Kannan Pakshirajan 8.1 Introduction 159 8.2 Micronutrient Deficiency in Soil 161 8.3 Factors Affecting the Bioavailability of Micronutrients 161 8.4 Effect of Micronutrient Deficiency on the Biota 163 8.5 The Role of Surfactants in the Facilitation of Micronutrient Biosorption 166 8.6 Surfactants 166 8.7 Conclusion 173 References 174 9 Biosurfactants: Production and Role in Synthesis of Nanoparticles for Environmental Applications 183Ashwini N. Rane, S.J. Geetha, and Sanket J. Joshi 9.1 Nanoparticles 183 9.2 Synthesis of Nanoparticles 184 9.3 Biosurfactants 187 9.4 Biosurfactant Mediated Nanoparticles Synthesis 191 9.5 Challenges in Environmental Applications of Nanoparticles and Future Perspectives 196 Acknowledgements 197 References 197 10 Green Surfactants: Production, Properties, and Application in Advanced Medical Technologies 207Ana María Marqués, Lourdes Pérez, Maribel Farfán, and Aurora Pinazo 10.1 Environmental Pollution and World Health 207 10.2 Amino Acid-Derived Surfactants 208 10.3 Biosurfactants 213 10.4 Antimicrobial Resistance 219 10.5 Catanionic Vesicles 223 10.6 Biosurfactant Functionalization: A Strategy to Develop Active Antimicrobial Compounds 234 10.7 Conclusions 235 References 235 11 Antiviral, Antimicrobial, and Antibiofilm Properties of Biosurfactants: Sustainable Use in Food and Pharmaceuticals 245Kenia Barrantes, Juan José Araya, Luz Chacón, Rolando Procupez-Schtirbu, Fernanda Lugo, Gabriel Ibarra, and Víctor H. Soto 11.1 Introduction 245 11.2 Antimicrobial Properties 246 11.3 Biofilms 252 11.4 Antiviral Properties 255 11.5 Therapeutic and Pharmaceutical Applications of Biosurfactants 256 11.6 Biosurfactants in the Food Industry: Quality of the Food 258 11.7 Conclusions 260 Acknowledgements 261 References 261 12 Biosurfactant-Based Antibiofilm Nano Materials 269Sonam Gupta 12.1 Introduction 269 12.2 Emerging Biofilm Infections 270 12.3 Challenges and Recent Advancement in Antibiofilm Agent Development 272 12.4 Impact of Extracellular Matrix and Their Virulence Attributes 273 12.5 Role of Indwelling Devices in Emerging Drug Resistance 274 12.6 Role of Physiological Factors (Growth Rate, Biofilm Age, Starvation) 274 12.7 Impact of Efflux Pump in Antibiotic Resistance Development 275 12.8 Nanotechnology-Based Approaches to Combat Biofilm 276 12.9 Biosurfactants: A Promising Candidate to Synthesize Nanomedicines 277 12.10 Synthesis of Nanomaterials 278 12.11 Self-Nanoemulsifying Drug Delivery Systems (SNEDDs) 282 12.12 Biosurfactant-Based Antibiofilm Nanomaterials 283 12.13 Conclusions and Future Prospects 283 Acknowledgement 285 References 285 13 Biosurfactants from Bacteria and Fungi: Perspectives on Advanced Biomedical Applications 293Rashmi Rekha Saikia, Suresh Deka, and Hemen Sarma 13.1 Introduction 293 13.2 Biomedical Applications of Biosurfactants: Recent Developments 295 13.3 Conclusion 307 Acknowledgements 307 References 307 14 Biosurfactant-Inspired Control of Methicillin-Resistant Staphylococcus aureus (MRSA) 317Amy R. Nava 14.1 Staphylococcus aureus, MRSA, and Multidrug Resistance 317 14.2 Biosurfactant Types Commonly Utilized Against S. aureus and Other Pathogens 318 14.3 Properties of Efficient Biosurfactants Against MRSA and Bacterial Pathogens 319 14.4 Uses for Biosurfactants 320 14.5 Biosurfactants Illustrating Antiadhesive Properties against MRSA Biofilms 320 14.6 Biosurfactants with Antibiofilm and Antimicrobial Properties 322 14.7 Media, Microbial Source, and Culture Conditions for Antibiofilm and Antimicrobial Properties 323 14.8 Novel Synergistic Antimicrobial and Antibiofilm Strategies Against MRSA and S. aureus 326 14.9 Novel Potential Mechanisms of Antimicrobial and Antibiofilm Properties 328 14.10 Conclusion 330 References 332 15 Exploiting the Significance of Biosurfactant for the Treatment of Multidrug-Resistant Pathogenic Infections 339Sonam Gupta and Vikas Pruthi 15.1 Introduction 339 15.2 Microbial Pathogenesis and Biosurfactants 340 15.3 Bio-Removal of Antibiotics Using Probiotics and Biosurfactants Bacteria 342 15.4 Antiproliferative, Antioxidant, and Antibiofilm Potential of Biosurfactant 343 15.5 Wound Healing Potential of Biosurfactants 344 15.6 Conclusion and Future Prospects 345 References 346 16 Biosurfactants Against Drug-Resistant Human and Plant Pathogens: Recent Advances 353Chandana Malakar and Suresh Deka 16.1 Introduction 353 16.2 Environmental Impact of Antibiotics 354 16.3 Pathogenicity of Antibiotic-Resistant Microbes on Human and Plant Health 356 16.4 Role of Biosurfactants in Combating Antibiotic Resistance: Challenges and Prospects 360 16.5 Conclusion 364 Acknowledgements 365 References 365 17 Surfactant- and Biosurfactant-Based Therapeutics: Structure, Properties, and Recent Developments in Drug Delivery and Therapeutic Applications 373Anand K. Kondapi 17.1 Introduction 374 17.2 Determinants and Forms of Surfactants 374 17.3 Structural Forms of Surfactants 377 17.4 Drug Delivery Systems 381 17.5 Different Types of Biosurfactants Used for Drug Delivery 384 17.6 Conclusions 391 References 392 18 The Potential Use of Biosurfactants in Cosmetics and Dermatological Products: Current Trends and Future Prospects 397Zarith Asyikin Abdul Aziz, Siti Hamidah Mohd Setapar, Asma Khatoon, and Akil Ahmad 18.1 Introduction 397 18.2 Properties of Biosurfactants 399 18.3 Biosurfactant Classifications and Potential Use in Cosmetic Applications 401 18.4 Dermatological Approach of Biosurfactants 406 18.5 Cosmetic Formulation with Biosurfactant 409 18.6 Safety Measurement Taken for Biosurfactant Applications in Dermatology and Cosmetics 412 18.7 Conclusion and Future Perspective 415 Acknowledgement 415 References 415 19 Cosmeceutical Applications of Biosurfactants: Challenges and Prospects 423Káren Gercyane Oliveira Bezerra and Leonie Asfora Sarubbo 19.1 Introduction 423 19.2 Cosmeceutical Properties of Biosurfactants 424 19.3 Other Activities 429 19.4 Application Prospects 432 19.5 Biosurfactants in the Market 433 19.6 Challenges and Conclusion 434 References 436 20 Biotechnologically Derived Bioactive Molecules for Skin and Hair-Care Application 443Suparna Sen, Siddhartha Narayan Borah, and Suresh Deka 20.1 Introduction 443 20.2 Surfactants in Cosmetic Formulation 445 20.3 Biosurfactants in Cosmetic Formulations 445 20.4 Conclusion 457 References 457 21 Biosurfactants as Biocontrol Agents Against Mycotoxigenic Fungi 465Ana I. Rodrigues, Eduardo J. Gudiña, José A. Teixeira, and Lígia R. Rodrigues 21.1 Mycotoxins 465 21.2 Aflatoxins 466 21.3 Deoxynivalenol 467 21.4 Fumonisins 468 21.5 Ochratoxin A 468 21.6 Patulin 470 21.7 Zearalenone 470 21.8 Prevention and Control of Mycotoxins 471 21.9 Biosurfactants 472 21.10 Glycolipids 473 21.11 Lipopeptides 474 21.12 Antifungal Activity of Glycolipid Biosurfactants 474 21.13 Antifungal and Antimycotoxigenic Activity of Lipopeptide Biosurfactants 475 21.14 Opportunities and Perspectives 482 Acknowledgements 483 References 483 22 Biosurfactant-Mediated Biocontrol of Pathogenic Microbes of Crop Plants 491Madhurankhi Goswami and Suresh Deka 22.1 Introduction 491 22.2 Biosurfactant: Properties and Types 492 22.3 Biosurfactant in Agrochemical Formulations for Sustainable Agriculture 502 22.4 Biosurfactants for a Greener and Safer Environment 503 22.5 Conclusion 503 References 504 Index 510

Read more less

Book SynopsisADVANCES IN BUSINESS STATISTICS, METHODS AND DATA COLLECTION Advances in Business Statistics, Methods and Data Collection delivers insights into the latest state of play in producing establishment statistics, obtained from businesses, farms and institutions. Presenting materials and reflecting discussions from the 6th International Conference on Establishment Statistics (ICES-VI), this edited volume provides a broad overview of methodology underlying current establishment statistics from every aspect of the production life cycle while spotlighting innovative and impactful advancements in the development, conduct, and evaluation of modern establishment statistics programs. Highlights include: Practical discussions on agile, timely, and accurate measurement of rapidly evolving economic phenomena such as globalization, new computer technologies, and the informal sector. Comprehensive explorations of administrative and new data sources and technologies, covering big (organic) data sourTable of ContentsList of Contributors xxix Section 1 Introduction to New Measures/Indicators for the Economy 1 1 Advances in Business Statistics, Methods and Data Collection: Introduction 3Ger Snijkers, Mojca Bavdaž, Stefan Bender, Jacqui Jones, Steve MacFeely, Joseph W. Sakshaug, Katherine J. Thompson, and Arnout van Delden 2 GDP and the SNA: Past and Present 23Steve MacFeely and Peter van de Ven 3 GDP and the SNA: Future Challenges 43Steve MacFeely and Peter van de Ven 4 Bridging the Gap Between Business and Macroeconomic Statistics: Methodological Considerations and Practical Solutions 63Timo Koskimäki and Kristian Taskinen 5 Measuring Investment in Intangible Assets 79Mojca Bavdaž, Ahmed Bounfour, Josh Martin, Alberto Nonnis, Giulio Perani, and Tjaša Redek 6 Measuring the US Digital Economy 105Jessica R. Nicholson, Thomas F. Howells III, and David B. Wasshausen 7 Establishment Based Informal Sector Statistics: An Endeavor of Measurement from Economic Census 2018 of Nepal 125Mahesh C. Pradhan Section 2 Topics in the Production of Official Establishment Statistics and Organizational Frameworks 145 8 Statistical Producers Challenges and Help 147Jacqui Jones and Holly O’Byrne 9 The Development and Maintenance of Statistical Business Registers as Statistical Infrastructure in Statistics Indonesia and the Australian Bureau of Statistics 175Imam Machdi, Ratih Putri Pertiwi, Rr. Nefriana, and Willem Erasmus 10 Managing Response Burden for Official Statistics Business Surveys – Experiences and Recent Developments at Statistics Netherlands, Statistics Portugal, and Statistics Sweden 193Johan Erikson, Deirdre Giesen, Leanne Houben, and Paulo Saraiva 11 Producing Official Statistics During the COVID-19 Pandemic 225Jacqui Jones, Luisa Ryan, A.J. Lanyon, Marie Apostolou, Tanya Price, Corinna König, Marieke Volkert, Joseph W. Sakshaug, Dane Mead, Helen Baird, Duncan Elliott, and Craig H. McLaren Section 3 Topics in the Use of Administrative Data 265 12 Methodology for the Use of Administrative Data in Business Statistics 267Arnout van Delden and Danni Lewis 13 Developing Statistical Frameworks for Administrative Data and Integrating It into Business Statistics. Experiences from the UK and New Zealand 291Nicholas Cox, Craig H. McLaren, Claire Shenton, Tom Tarling, and Ella W. Davies 14 The Evolution of Integrating Administrative Data in Business Statistics in Ireland 315Colin Hanley and Sorcha O’Callaghan Section 4 Topics in Business Survey Data Collection 335 15 What Computerized Business Questionnaires and Questionnaire Management Tools Can Offer 337Gustav Haraldsen 16 Tailoring the Design of a New Combined Business Survey: Process, Methods, and Lessons Learned 357Ger Snijkers, Leanne Houben, and Fred Demollin 17 Advances in Question(naire) Development, Pretesting, and Evaluation 387Diane K. Willimack, Heather Ridolfo, Amy Anderson Riemer, Melissa Cidade, and Kathy Ott 18 Using Paradata in Electronic Business Survey Questionnaires 413Ger Snijkers, Susan Demedash, and Jessica Andrews 19 Recent Findings from Experiments in Establishment Surveys 437Josh Langeland, Heather Ridolfo, Jaki McCarthy, Kathy Ott, Doug Kilburg, Karen CyBulski, Melissa Krakowiecki, Larry Vittoriano, Matt Potts, Benjamin Küfner, Joseph W. Sakshaug, and Stefan Zins 20 Web Portals for Business Data Collection 469Bente Hole and Leanne Houben 21 A Creative Approach to Promoting Survey Response 501Charles F. Brady, Jr. and Kari L. Klinedinst Section 5 Topics in the Use of New Data Sources and New Technologies 519 22 Statistical Data Production in a Digitized Age: The Need to Establish Successful Workflows for Micro Data Access 521Stefan Bender, Jannick Blaschke, and Christian Hirsch 23 Machine Learning in German Official Statistics 537Florian Dumpert 24 Six Years of Machine Learning in the Bureau of Labor Statistics 561Alexander Measure 25 Using Machine Learning to Classify Products for the Commodity Flow Survey 573Christian Moscardi and Benjamin Schultz 26 Alternative Data Sources in the Census Bureau’s Monthly State Retail Sales Data Product 593Rebecca Hutchinson, Scott Scheleur, and Deanna Weidenhamer Section 6 Topics in Sampling and Estimation 613 27 Introduction to Sampling and Estimation for Business Surveys 615Paul A. Smith and Wesley Yung 28 Sample Coordination Methods and Systems for Establishment Surveys 637Alina Matei and Paul A. Smith 29 Variance Estimation for Probability and Nonprobability Establishment Surveys: An Overview 659Jill A. Dever and Dan Liao 30 Bayesian Methods Applied to Small Area Estimation for Establishment Statistics 685Paul A. Parker, Ryan Janicki, and Scott H. Holan 31 Variance Estimation Under Nearest Neighbor Ratio Hot Deck Imputation for Multinomial Data: Two Approaches Applied to the Service Annual Survey (sas) 705Rebecca Andridge, Jae Kwang Kim, and Katherine J. Thompson 32 Minimizing Revisions for a Monthly Economic Indicator 727Nicole Czaplicki, Stephen Kaputa, and Laura Bechtel Section 7 Topics in Data Integration, Linking and Matching 755 33 Record Linkage for Establishments: Background, Challenges, and an Example 757Michael D.Larsen and Alan Herning 34 Methods for Estimating the Quality of Multisource Statistics 781Arnout van Delden, Sander Scholtus, Ton de Waal, and Irene Csorba 35 Adopting Previously Reported Data into the 2022 Census of Agriculture: Lessons Learned from the 2020 September Agricultural Survey 805Linda J. Young, Joseph B. Rodhouse, Zachary Terner, and Gavin Corral 36 Integrating Alternative and Administrative Data into the Monthly Business Statistics: Some Applications from Statistics Canada 821Marie-Claude Duval, Richard Laroche, and Sébastien Landry Acknowledgments 837 References 838 Index 839

Read more less

Book SynopsisLearnfrom this integrated approach to the management and restoration of ecosystemsedited by an international leader in the field TheHandbook of Ecological and Ecosystem Engineeringdeliversa comprehensive overview of the latest research and practical developments in the rapidly evolving fields of ecological and ecosystem engineering.Beginning with an introduction to the theory and practice of ecological engineering and ecosystem services, the book addresses a wide variety of issues central to the restorationand remediation of ecological environments. The bookcontains fulsome analyses of the restoration, rehabilitation, conservation, sustainability, reconstruction, remediation, and reclamation of ecosystems using ecological engineering techniques.Case studies are used to highlight practical applications of the theory discussed within. The material in theHandbook of Ecological and Ecosystem Engineeringis particularly relevant at a time when the human population is dramaticallyrising,and tTable of ContentsList of Contributors xvii Preface xxi 1 Ecological Engineering and Ecosystem Services – Theory and Practice 1Fábio Carvalho Nunes, Thaís de Marchi Soares, Lander de Jesus Alves, José Rodrigues de Souza Filho, Cláudia Cseko Nolasco de Carvalho, and Majeti Narasimha Vara Prasad 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Ecological Engineering: History and Definition 3 1.3 Ecosystem Services: History, Concepts, and Dimensions 7 1.3.1 Sizing Ecosystem Services 10 1.3.2 Agriculture and Ecosystem Services 15 1.4 Final Considerations: Challenges for the Future 19 Notes 20 References 20 2 Ecological and Ecosystem Engineering for Economic-Environmental Revitalization 25Bruno Barbosa and Ana Luísa Fernando 2.1 Introduction 25 2.2 Revitalization of Physical/Environmental Factors 27 2.2.1 Low Temperature 27 2.2.2 Limited Soil Drainage and Shallow Rooting Depth 28 2.2.3 Unfavorable Texture and Stoniness 29 2.2.4 Sloping Areas 30 2.2.5 Dryness 30 2.2.6 Waterlogging 31 2.3 Revitalization of Chemical Factors 32 2.3.1 Acidity 32 2.3.2 Heavy Metals and Organic Contaminants 33 2.3.3 Salinity and Sodicity 34 2.4 Economic Revitalization of Degraded Soil Ecosystems 35 2.5 Conclusions 36 References 37 3 Environmental Issues and Priority Areas for Ecological Engineering Initiatives 47Sanchayita Rajkhowa, Nazmun Ara Khanom, and Jyotirmoy Sarma 3.1 Introduction 47 3.2 Basic Concepts of Ecological Engineering 50 3.3 Practice and Implication of Ecological Engineering 53 3.4 Priority Areas for Ecological Engineering 54 3.4.1 Coastal Ecosystem Restoration 55 3.4.2 Mangrove Restoration 56 3.4.3 River and Wetland Restoration 57 3.4.4 Ecological Engineering in Soil Restoration and Agriculture 59 3.5 Conclusion 61 Notes 62 References 63 4 Soil Meso- and Macrofauna Indicators of Restoration Success in Rehabilitated Mine Sites 67Sara Pelaez Sanchez, Ronan Courtney, and Olaf Schmidt 4.1 Introduction 67 4.2 Restoration to Combat Land Degradation 67 4.3 Mine Rehabilitation 68 4.3.1 Mine Tailings 68 4.3.2 Rehabilitation of Mine Tailings 68 4.3.3 The Challenge of Metal Mine Rehabilitation 68 4.4 Restoration Success Assessment: Monitoring Diversity, Vegetation, and Ecological Processes 69 4.4.1 Monitoring Diversity 70 4.4.2 Vegetation 70 4.4.3 Ecological Processes 71 4.5 Gaps in the Assessment of Restoration Success in Mine Sites 72 4.6 Increasing Restoration Success by Enhancing Soil Biodiversity and Soil Multifunctionality 73 4.7 Using Keystone Species and Ecosystem Engineers in Restoration 74 4.7.1 Earthworms 83 4.7.2 Ants 84 4.7.3 Termites 85 4.7.4 Collembola and Mites 85 4.8 Conclusions and Further Perspective for the Restoration of Metalliferous Tailings 85 Acknowledgements 86 References 86 5 Ecological Engineering and Green Infrastructure in Mitigating Emerging Urban Environmental Threats 95Florin-Constantin Mihai, Petra Schneider, and Mihail Eva 5.1 Dimensions of Ecological Engineering in the Frame of Ecosystem Service Provision 95 5.2 Landfill Afteruse Practices Based on Ecological Engineering and Green Infrastructure 97 5.2.1 Old Landfill Closure and Rehabilitation Procedures 97 5.2.2 Landfill Restoration Examples Around the World 98 5.2.2.1 Conventional Landfill Closure (Campulung, Romania) 98 5.2.2.2 Elbauenpark Including Am Cracauer Anger Landfill (Magdeburg, Germany) 99 5.2.2.3 World Cup Park (Nanjido Landfill, Seoul, South Korea) 99 5.2.2.4 Fudekeng Environmental Restoration Park (Taiwan) 100 5.2.2.5 Hong Kong 100 5.2.2.6 Hyria Landfill Site (Tel Aviv, Israel) 101 5.2.2.7 Valdemingomez Forest Park (Madrid, Spain) 102 5.2.2.8 Freshkills Park – A Mega Restoration Project in the US 103 5.3 Role of Ecological Engineering in Transforming Brownfields into Greenfields 104 5.3.1 UGI Options for Brownfield Recycling 107 5.3.2 Pilot Case: Restoration of a Brownfield to Provide ES – Albert Railway Station (Dresden, Germany) Transformation into the Weißeritz Greenbelt 107 5.4 Green Infrastructures for Mitigating Urban Transport-Induced Threats 112 5.4.1 Transportation Heritage from the Industrial Period 112 5.4.2 The Cases of the Rose Kennedy Greenway and Cheonggyecheon River Restoration 113 5.4.2.1 The Concept: Expressway-to-Greenway Conversion 113 5.4.2.2 Environmental Efficiency and Effectiveness 114 5.4.2.3 Social Impact 116 5.4.2.4 Economic Efficiency 116 5.5 Conclusions 117 References 118 6 Urban Environmental Issues and Mitigation by Applying Ecological and Ecosystem Engineering 123Shailendra Yadav, Suvha Lama, and Atya Kapley 6.1 Urbanization 123 6.2 Global Trends of Urbanization and Its Consequences 124 6.3 Urban Environmental Issues 125 6.3.1 Physical Urban Environmental Issues 126 6.3.1.1 Urban Heat Islands 126 6.3.1.2 Urban Flooding 127 6.3.1.3 Urban Pollution (Air, Water, Noise) and Waste Management 128 6.3.2 Biological Urban Environmental Issues 130 6.3.2.1 Declining Urban Ecosystem Services Due to Loss of Biodiversity 130 6.3.2.2 Increasing Disease Epidemiology 131 6.4 Ecosystem Engineering 133 6.5 Approaches for Mitigation of Urban Environmental Issues 134 6.5.1 Nature-Based Solutions 134 6.5.1.1 Green Infrastructure (GI) 134 6.5.1.2 Urban Wetlands and Riparian Forests 136 6.5.1.3 Solar Energy 136 6.5.2 Artificial Engineering Approaches 137 6.5.3 Landfill Gas as an Alternative Source of Energy: Waste to Wealth 137 6.5.3.1 Wastewater/Sewage Treatment Plants as Sources of Energy 137 6.5.3.2 Rainwater Harvesting 137 6.5.3.3 Constructed Floating Islands for Water Treatment 138 6.5.3.4 Microgrids 138 6.6 Future Perspective 138 Acknowledgments 139 References 139 7 Soil Fertility Restoration, Theory and Practice 147V. Matichenkov and E. Bocharnikova 7.1 Introduction 147 7.2 Materials and Methods 148 7.3 Results 149 7.4 Discussion and Conclusions 151 Acknowledgment 155 References 155 8 Extracellular Soil Enzymes Act as Moderators to Restore Carbon in Soil Habitats 159Rupinder Kaur and Anand Narain Singh 8.1 Introduction 159 8.2 Soil Organic Matter (SOM) 161 8.3 Soil Organic Carbon (SOC) 162 8.4 Soil Carbon Sequestration 162 8.5 Extracellular Soil Enzymes 164 8.6 Interactive Role of Extracellular Soil Enzymes in Soil Carbon Transformation 166 8.6.1 Cellulase 167 8.6.2 β-Glucosidase 169 8.6.3 Invertase 170 8.6.4 Amylase 170 8.6.5 Xylanase 171 8.7 Conclusion 172 References 172 9 Ecological Engineering for Solid Waste Segregation, Reduction, and Resource Recovery – A Contextual Analysis in Brazil 183Luís P. Azevedo, Fernando G. da Silva Araújo, Carlos A.F. Lagarinhos, Jorge A.S. Tenório, Denise C.R. Espinosa, and Majeti Narasimha Vara Prasad 9.1 Introduction 183 9.2 Municipal Solid Waste in Brazil 188 9.3 Compostable Waste 189 9.4 Anaerobic Digestion 190 9.5 Recycling 190 9.6 Burning Waste Tires 190 9.7 Energy Recovery 191 9.8 Coprocessing Industrial Waste in Cement Kilns 192 9.9 Conclusions 193 References 195 10 Urban Floods and Mitigation by Applying Ecological and Ecosystem Engineering 201Jyotirmoy Sarma and Sanchayita Rajkhowa 10.1 Sustainable Ecosystems through Engineering Approaches 201 10.2 Flooding and, Specifically, Urban Flooding as a Problem of Interest 202 10.3 Causes and Impacts of Urban Flooding 204 10.4 Protection Against and Mitigation of Urban Flooding in the Context of Sustainability 207 10.4.1 Living with Floods as a Sustainable Approach 208 10.4.2 Urban Flood Risk Management 208 10.4.3 Integrated and Interactive Flood Management 209 10.4.4 Structural and Nonstructural Measures for Flood Control 210 10.4.5 River and Wetland Restoration 211 10.4.6 Low Impact Development (LID) and Best Management Practices (BMPs) 214 10.5 Conclusions and Future Scope 215 References 216 11 Ecological Engineering and Restoration of Mine Ecosystems 219Marcin Pietrzykowski 11.1 Background and Definitions 219 11.2 Ecological Criteria for Successful Mine Site Restoration 222 11.3 Examples of Reclamation Technology and Afforestation in Mining Areas 223 11.4 Selected Reclamation Practices Versus Mining Extraction and Environmental Conditions 226 11.5 Final Comments and Remarks 227 References 228 12 Ecological Restoration of Abandoned Mine Land: Theory to Practice 231Jitendra Ahirwal and Subodh Kumar Maiti 12.1 Introduction 231 12.2 Integration of Ecology Theory, Restoration Ecology, and Ecological Restoration 233 12.2.1 Disturbance 233 12.2.2 Succession 233 12.2.3 Fragmentation 233 12.2.4 Ecosystem Functions 233 12.2.5 Restoration 233 12.2.6 Reclamation 234 12.2.7 Rehabilitation 234 12.2.8 Regeneration 234 12.2.9 Recovery 234 12.3 Restoration Planning 235 12.4 Components of Restoration 236 12.4.1 Natural Processes 236 12.4.2 Physical and Nutritional Constraints 236 12.4.3 Species Diversity 237 12.5 Afforestation of Mine-Degraded Land 237 12.5.1 Miyawaki Planting Methods 237 12.6 Methods of Evaluating Ecological Restoration Success 239 12.6.1 Criteria for Restoration Success 239 12.6.2 Indicator Parameters of a Restored Ecosystem 240 12.6.3 Soil Quality Index 241 12.7 Development of a Post-Mining Ecosystem: A Case Study in India 242 12.8 Conclusions and Future Research 244 References 245 13 Wetland, Watershed, and Lake Restoration 247Bhupinder Dhir 13.1 Introduction 247 13.2 Renovation of Wastewater 247 13.2.1 Physical Methods 248 13.2.2 Chemical Methods 248 13.2.3 Biological Methods 248 13.2.4 Other Methods 249 13.3 Restoration of Bodies of Water 250 13.3.1 Watersheds 251 13.3.2 Wetlands 252 13.3.2.1 Methods of Restoring Wetlands 253 13.3.3 Rivers 253 13.3.4 Lakes 254 13.3.5 Streams 254 13.3.6 Case Studies 255 13.4 Problems Encountered in Restoration Projects 255 13.5 Conclusion 256 References 256 14 Restoration of Riverine Health: An Ecohydrological Approach –Flow Regimes and Aquatic Biodiversity 261S.P. Biswas 14.1 Introduction 261 14.2 Habitat Ecology 261 14.2.1 Riverine Habitats 262 14.2.2 Linked Ecosystems 262 14.3 Riverine Issues 262 14.3.1 Bank Erosion, Siltation, and Aggradations of Rivers 263 14.3.2 Deforestation in Catchment Areas 264 14.3.3 River Pollution and Invasive Species 266 14.3.4 Fishing Pressure 266 14.3.5 Status of Wetlands (FPLs) 267 14.3.6 Regulated Rivers and Their Impacts 267 14.4 Ecorestoration of River Basins 268 14.4.1 Environmental Flow 268 14.4.2 Success Story of a Conservation Effort for Aquatic Fauna 268 14.4.2.1 River Dolphins 268 14.4.2.2 Hilsa Fishery 270 14.4.3 Biomonitoring of Riverine Health and Ecosystem Engineering 270 14.4.4 Integrated River Basin Management 271 14.5 Summary and Conclusion 273 Acknowledgments 274 References 274 15 Ecosystem Services of the Phoomdi Islands of Loktak, a Dying Ramsar Site in Northeast India 279Sijagurumayum Geetanjali Devi, Niteshwori Thongam, Maibam Dhanaraj Meitei, and Majeti Narasimha Vara Prasad 15.1 What Are Ecosystem Services? 279 15.2 Phoomdi Islands of Loktak 279 15.3 Ecosystem Degradation of Loktak 280 15.4 Ecosystem Services Provided by the Phoomdi Islands of Loktak 284 15.5 Phoomdi and Provisioning Services 284 15.6 Phoomdi as Reservoirs of Biodiversity 287 15.7 Phoomdi and Fisheries 288 15.8 Phoomdi and Cultural Services 288 15.9 Phoomdi and Regulating Services 289 15.10 Phoomdi and Supporting Services 289 15.11 Conclusion 290 Acknowledgments 291 References 291 16 The Application of Reefs in Shoreline Protection 295Anu Joy and Anu Gopinath 16.1 General Introduction 295 16.2 Types of Coral Reefs 296 16.3 Global Distribution of Coral Reefs 296 16.4 Benefits of Coral Reefs 296 16.5 Threats to Coral Reefs 298 16.5.1 Global Threats 298 16.5.1.1 Ocean Acidification 299 16.5.1.2 Coral Bleaching 299 16.5.1.3 Cyclones 300 16.5.2 Local Threats 300 16.5.2.1 Over-Fishing and Destructive Fishing Methods 300 16.5.2.2 Coastal Development 300 16.5.2.3 Recreational Activities 300 16.5.2.4 Sedimentation 300 16.5.2.5 Coral Mining and Harvesting 300 16.5.2.6 Pollution 301 16.5.2.7 Invasive Species 301 16.6 Important Coral Reefs of the World 301 16.7 The Application of Reefs in Shoreline Protection 303 16.7.1 Coral Reefs 304 16.7.2 Oyster Reefs 307 16.7.3 Artificial Reefs 307 16.7.4 Coral Reef Restoration 308 16.7.5 Oyster Reef Restoration 309 16.8 Conclusion 310 References 310 17 Mangroves, as Shore Engineers, Are Nature-Based Solutions for Ensuring Coastal Protection 317Ajanta Dey, J.R.B. Alfred, Biswajit Roy Chowdhury, and Udo Censkowsky 17.1 Introduction 317 17.2 Sundarban: A Case Study 318 17.3 Restoration Models 319 17.4 Methodology 320 17.5 Results and Analysis 326 17.6 Conclusion 329 Acknowledgments 330 References 331 18 Forest Degradation Prevention Through Nature-Based Solutions: An Indian Perspective 333Purabi Saikia, Akash Nag, Rima Kumari, Amit Kumar, and M.L. Khan 18.1 Introduction 333 18.2 Causes of Forests Degradation and Present Status Forests in India 335 18.3 Effects of Forest Degradation 338 18.4 Forest Degradation Management Strategies 339 18.5 Policies for Preventing Forest Degradation 339 18.6 Ecological Engineering: A Tool for Restoration of Degraded Forests 341 18.7 Forest Landscape Restoration: A Nature-Based Solution 342 18.8 Success Stories of ER from India 342 18.9 Yamuna Biodiversity Park 343 18.10 Ecological Restoration in Corbett National Park 343 18.11 Conclusion and Recommendations 345 References 345 19 Restoring Ecosystem Services of Degraded Forests in a Changing Climate 353Smita Chaudhry, Gagan Preet Singh Sidhu, and Rashmi Paliwal 19.1 Introduction 353 19.2 Role of Forests in Maintaining Ecological Balance and Providing Services 354 19.2.1 Forests and Rainfall 355 19.2.2 Forests and Carbon Sequestration 355 19.2.3 Forests and Climate 356 19.2.4 Forests and Soil Erosion 356 19.2.5 Forest and Water Quality 357 19.3 Types of Forests in India 357 19.4 Forest Degradation 357 19.4.1 Invasive Alien Species 360 19.4.2 Forest Fires 361 19.4.3 Overpopulation and Exploitation of Forest Resources 361 19.4.4 Overgrazing 361 19.5 Impacts of Forest Degradation 362 19.5.1 Carbon Sequestration 362 19.6 Nutritional Status of Soil 362 19.7 Hydrological Regimes 362 19.8 Ecological Services 363 19.9 Social Implications 363 19.10 Methods for Restoring and Rehabilitating Forests 364 19.11 Conclusion 367 References 368 20 Forest Degradation Prevention 377Marta Jaskulak and Anna Grobelak 20.1 Introduction 377 20.2 The Problem of Forest Degradation 379 20.3 Assessing Levels of Forest Degradation 380 20.4 Drivers of Forest Degradation 382 20.4.1 Strategies to Address Causes of Forest Degradation 382 20.4.2 The Hierarchy of Land Degradation Responses 383 20.5 The Role of Forest Management in Degradation Prevention 384 20.5.1 Sustainable Forest Management (SFM) for Prevention of Degradation and the Restoration of Degraded Areas 385 20.6 Conclusions – Prioritization and Implementation 387 References 387 21 Use of Plants for Air Quality Improvement 391Richa Rai, Madhoolika Agrawal, and S.B. Agrawal 21.1 Introduction 391 21.2 Current Status of Air Pollutants 392 21.3 Green Roofs, Urban Forests, and Air Pollution 393 21.4 Traits for Phytoremediation of Air Pollution 397 21.4.1 Physiological and Biochemical Traits 398 21.5 Conclusions 400 References 400 22 Phylloremediation for Mitigating Air Pollution 405Majeti Narasimha Vara Prasad 22.1 Introduction 405 22.2 Significance of Tree Canopy Architecture and Types of Canopies for Mitigating Air Pollution 407 22.3 Air-Improving Qualities of Plants 414 22.3.1 Dust-Capturing Mechanisms Using Plants 414 22.3.2 Environmental Factors for Efficient Dust Capture by Plants 414 22.3.2.1 Light Intensity 414 22.3.2.2 Moisture 414 22.3.2.3 Wind Velocity 414 22.4 Effects of Vegetation on Urban Air Quality 414 22.4.1 Interception and Absorption of Pollution 414 22.4.2 Temperature Effects 416 22.4.3 Impact on Energy Use 416 22.5 Urban Air Quality Improvement through Dust-Capturing Plant Species 416 Acknowledgments 417 References 417 23 Green Belts for Sustainable Improvement of Air Quality 423S.B. Chaphekar, R.P. Madav, and Seemaa S. Ghate 23.1 Introduction 423 23.2 Tolerance of Plants to Air Pollutants 424 23.2.1 Agro-Climates in India 425 23.2.2 Green Belts 426 23.2.3 Choosing Plant Species 427 23.2.4 Designing Green Belts 427 23.2.4.1 Ground-Level Concentration (GLC) of Emitted Pollutants 427 23.2.4.2 Mathematical Model 429 23.2.4.3 Two Approaches 430 23.2.4.4 Planting Along Roadsides 430 23.2.4.5 Choice of Plants for Roadsides 431 23.2.4.6 Nurturing Green Belts 431 23.3 Conclusion 433 References 433 24 Air Quality Improvement Using Phytodiversity and Plant Architecture 437D.N. Magana-Arachchi and R.P. Wanigatunge 24.1 Introduction 437 24.2 Phytodiversity 438 24.3 Plant Architecture 438 24.3.1 Leaf Architecture – Regulation of Leaf Position 439 24.3.2 Development of Internal Leaf Architecture 439 24.4 Phytoremediation 440 24.4.1 Role of Plants During Particulate Matter and Gaseous Phytoremediation 440 24.4.2 Ways of Improving Air Quality 442 24.4.2.1 Outdoor Air Pollutants 442 24.4.2.2 Indoor Air Pollutants 444 24.4.2.3 Phyllosphere Microorganisms 444 24.5 Conclusion 446 Acknowledgment 446 References 446 25 Information Explosion in Digital Ecosystems and Their Management 451Chanchal Kumar Mitra and Majeti Narasimha Vara Prasad 25.1 Introduction 451 25.1.1 Digital Computers 452 25.1.2 Modern Architectures for Computer Systems 452 25.1.3 Microprocessors 454 25.1.4 Networks of Computers 454 25.1.5 Development of Databases 455 25.1.6 Data as Knowledge 456 25.2 Growth 456 25.2.1 Traditional Models for Growth 456 25.2.2 Growth Curves 457 25.2.3 Limits of Growth 458 25.2.4 Growth vs. Life 459 25.3 Sustainability 459 25.3.1 Production vs. Consumption 459 25.4 Knowledge vs. Information 460 25.5 Circulation of Information 460 25.6 Quality vs. Quantity 461 25.6.1 Case Study 1: Facebook and Cambridge Analytica Scandal 461 25.6.2 Case Study 2: Aarogya Setu Mobile App by National Informatics Centre (NIC) of the GoI 462 25.7 How Does the Digital Ecosystem Work? 462 25.7.1 Digital Ecosystem and Sustainable Development 463 25.7.2 SDG 4: Quality Education 465 25.7.3 SDG 8: Decent Work and Economic Growth 465 25.7.4 SDG 9: Industry, Innovation, and Infrastructure 465 25.7.5 SDG 11: Sustainable Cities and Communities 466 25.7.6 SDG 12: Responsible Consumption and Production 466 25.8 Conclusions 466 References 466 26 Nanotechnology in Ecological and Ecosystem Engineering 469L.R. Sendanayake, H.A.D.B. Amarasiri, and Nadeesh M. Adassooriya 26.1 Ecology, Ecosystem, and Ecosystem Engineering 469 26.2 Nanomaterials, Nanotechnology, and Nanoscience 469 26.3 Nanotechnology in Ecological and Ecosystem-Engineering 470 26.4 Nanotechnology to Remediate Environmental Pollution 470 26.5 Environmental Remediation 471 26.6 Surface Water Remediation 471 26.6.1 Adsorption 472 26.6.2 Photocatalysis 473 26.6.3 Disinfection 474 26.6.4 Nanomembranes 475 26.7 Groundwater Remediation and Soil Remediation 475 26.8 Air Remediation 478 26.9 Future Scope of Nanotechnology and Nanoscience in Ecological and Ecosystem Engineering 479 References 480 Index 487

Read more less

Book SynopsisDesigning Intelligent Construction Projects Explore the potential impact of management cybernetics, lean methodologies, and digitalization on the construction sector As a heavily asset-driven industry, construction is at the crossroads of a transformation. Digitalization has already begun and is acting as a beacon. Intelligently designed project organizations and systems must follow to make construction projects fit for the future. In Designing Intelligent Construction Projects, a distinguished project manager and engineer and a lean and integrated management system manager deliver a comprehensive exploration of the fundamentals of management cybernetics, lean management in general and lean construction in particular, and construction-oriented digital tools. In the book, the authors describe how these disciplines can be combined to successfully transform construction projects. Preliminary discussions of management cybernetics and lean management are followed by specific discussions of how these topics can be adapted to the construction industry. The book connects the principles of management cybernetics and digitalization, accessibly describing the potential impact of digitalization on construction projects. Readers will also find: Illuminating case study material that highlights how change management methodologies, game theory, and collaborative contractual design can deliver resultsStrategies for achieving lean, viable, and digitally oriented construction leadership fit for the modern marketRigorous discussions of the current and potential future impact of digitization on construction firms Perfect for built environment professionals and practitioners, Designing Intelligent Construction Projects will also earn a place in the libraries of postgraduate and advanced undergraduate students of civil engineering, architecture, and project management with an interest in construction management.Table of ContentsPreface xi Acknowledgements xv About the Authors xvii 1 Complexity, Cybernetics, and Dynamics 1 1.1 Complexity 2 1.1.1 Complexity in the Mathematical Sciences 2 1.1.2 Complexity in Sociology 3 1.1.3 Complexity in Management 3 1.1.4 Complexity in Construction Management 6 1.1.5 How to Cope with Complexity 7 1.1.6 Interaction and Autopoiesis 9 1.2 Viable System Model 10 1.2.1 The Static Perspective on the VSM 11 1.2.1.1 System 1: Operation 14 1.2.1.2 System 2: Coordination 14 1.2.1.3 System 3: Operational Management 14 1.2.1.4 System 3*: Monitoring/Audit 15 1.2.1.5 System 4: Strategic Management 15 1.2.1.6 System 5: Policy 15 1.2.2 Ashby’s Variety 16 1.2.2.1 The Variety Number 18 1.2.2.2 The Degree of Variety 18 1.2.3 The Dynamic Perspective on the VSM 23 1.2.3.1 Variety Balance 1: Workload 26 1.2.3.2 Variety Balance 2: Line Balancing 26 1.2.3.3 Variety Balance 3: Autonomy vs. Cohesion 26 1.2.3.4 Variety Balance 4: Change Rate 27 1.2.3.5 Variety Balance 5: Change vs. Status Quo 27 1.3 Modelling with the Viable System Model 28 1.3.1 Modelling Steps 28 1.3.2 Create a VSM Model Using an Example 29 1.4 System Dynamics 34 1.4.1 Systemic Archetypes 34 1.4.2 Modelling with System Dynamics 43 1.4.3 Example: Managing Risks with System Dynamics 43 1.5 Findings, Criticism, and Reflective Questions 44 1.5.1 Findings 44 1.5.2 Criticism 45 1.5.3 Reflective Questions 46 2 Lean Management and Lean Construction 47 2.1 Pioneers of Lean Management 48 2.2 Toyota Production System and Tools 49 2.2.1 Waste, Kanban, and Just-in-time Principle 51 2.2.2 Jidoka and Related Elements 54 2.2.3 Heijunka 58 2.2.4 Single Minute Exchange of Die (SMED) 60 2.2.5 Kaizen and Standards 60 2.3 Lean Management and Its Principles 61 2.3.1 Resource and Flow Efficiency 63 2.3.2 Examples for Resource and Flow Efficiency 64 2.3.2.1 The Machine and Plant Manufacturer 64 2.3.2.2 The Vacation Flight 65 2.3.2.3 The Healthcare System 65 2.3.2.4 The Automotive Industry 65 2.3.3 Four Important Principles 65 2.3.3.1 Flow Principle 66 2.3.3.2 Takt Principle 66 2.3.3.3 Pull Principle 66 2.3.3.4 Zero-defect Principle 66 2.3.4 Lean Leadership 66 2.3.4.1 Excursion: Kata 67 2.4 Lean Construction and Tools 70 2.4.1 Last Planner System 72 2.4.1.1 Milestone Planning 74 2.4.1.2 Collaborative Programming 74 2.4.1.3 Making Ready 74 2.4.1.4 Production Planning 74 2.4.1.5 Production Management and Learning 74 2.4.2 Takt Planning and Control 76 2.4.2.1 Takt Planning 77 2.4.2.2 Takt Control 78 2.4.3 Last Planner System and Takt Planning and Control 78 2.4.4 Lean Construction Case Study 80 2.4.4.1 Takt Planning 81 2.4.4.2 Takt Control 85 2.5 Tools, Tools, Tools 87 2.5.1 First-run Study 88 2.5.1.1 Phase Plan 88 2.5.1.2 Phase Do 88 2.5.1.3 Phase Study 89 2.5.1.4 Phase Adjust 89 2.5.2 Waste Walks 89 2.5.2.1 5 Why and 6W Questioning Technique 90 2.5.3 Ishikawa Diagram 91 2.5.4 A3 Method and Report 92 2.5.5 Visual Management 94 2.5.6 5s/5a 96 2.5.6.1 Seiri – Sort 96 2.5.6.2 Seiton – Set in Order 96 2.5.6.3 Seiso – Shine 97 2.5.6.4 Seiketsu – Standardise 97 2.5.6.5 Shitsuke – Sustain 97 2.5.7 Plus/Delta Review 97 2.5.8 Big Room 99 2.6 Practice Insights from Martin Jäntschke 101 2.6.1 Infrastructure Railway – Introduction of Lean Construction in Large Projects 101 2.6.2 Implementing Change in an Infrastructure Organisation 104 2.6.3 Conclusion 108 2.6.3.1 To Section 2.6.1 108 2.6.3.2 To Section 2.6.2 109 2.7 Findings, Criticism, and Reflective Questions 109 2.7.1 Findings 109 2.7.2 Criticism 110 2.7.3 Reflective Questions 112 3 Cybernetics and Lean 113 3.1 VSM and Lean (Construction) Thinking 115 3.2 Mapping the Viable System Model with Lean Construction Methods 116 3.2.1 Mapping VSM and the Last Planner System 117 3.2.2 Mapping VSM and Takt Planning and Control 118 3.2.3 Mapping Information Channels and Lean Construction 118 3.3 Mapping the Viable System Model with Lean Management Methods 119 3.4 Performance Measurement 124 3.4.1 General Measurement 124 3.4.2 Lean Measurement Construction 126 3.4.3 Beers’ Triple 126 3.5 Case Studies and Practice Insights 128 3.5.1 Case Study: Planning Project 128 3.5.2 Case Study: Major Project (Planning and Execution) 130 3.5.2.1 Design Phase and Approval Phase 131 3.5.2.2 Tendering and Awarding Phase 132 3.5.2.3 Construction Phase 133 3.5.3 Case Study: Megaproject (Execution) 134 3.5.3.1 Boundary Conditions 134 3.5.3.2 Analysis of the Megaproject 140 3.5.3.3 Section Analysis 140 3.5.4 Practice Insights from a Medium-sized Mechanical Engineering Company 143 3.5.4.1 Challenges for the Industry 143 3.5.4.2 The Solution: The Creation of a Hybrid Corporate Form Based on the Vsm 144 3.5.4.3 From Theory to Practice: The Organisational Structure 146 3.5.4.4 Levels of Complexity 147 3.5.4.5 Process Organisation 149 3.5.4.6 Role Profiles 154 3.5.4.7 Organiplastic as a Base for the Management Cockpit 154 3.5.4.8 Conclusion 157 3.5.4.9 Adaptability 159 3.6 Findings, Criticism, and Reflective Questions 159 3.6.1 Findings 159 3.6.2 Criticism 161 3.6.3 Critical Reflection to Practice Insights from a Medium-sized Mechanical Engineering Company 161 3.6.4 Reflective Questions 162 4 Beyond Cybernetics and Lean 163 4.1 Control, Regulate, Steer 164 4.2 Self-organisation 165 4.3 Viable, Lean, … and What About Agile? 166 4.4 Digital Transformation 167 4.5 Phases of Digital Change 169 4.6 Digitalisation in the Construction Industry 170 4.6.1 Status Quo 171 4.6.2 Phase 1: BIM, VR, AR, MR 172 4.6.3 Phase 2: Intelligent Project Management 174 4.6.4 Phase 3: Artificial Intelligence in Construction 176 4.6.5 Phase 4: Autonomous Project Management 179 4.7 Changing the Game 180 4.7.1 Nudge Management 180 4.7.2 Tit for Tat 181 4.8 Partnering 183 4.9 Success Patterns in Projects 186 4.10 Findings, Criticism, and Reflective Questions 190 4.10.1 Findings 190 4.10.2 Criticism 191 4.10.3 Reflective Questions 193 5 Summary and Closing Remarks 195 5.1 Complexity, Cybernetics, and Dynamics 196 5.2 Lean Management and Lean Construction 196 5.3 Cybernetic and Lean 197 5.4 Beyond Cybernetic and Lean 197 References 199 Glossary 209 List of Figures 215 List of Tables 219 List of Equations 221 List of Abbreviations 223 Index 227

Read more less

Book SynopsisCONSTRUCTION RISK MANAGEMENT DECISION MAKING Explores the relevance of systems thinking and behavioral science in construction risk management Effective risk management is a vital component of all successful construction projects. Although quantitative tools for evaluating data and minimizing risk are readily available, construction managers commonly adopt a more innate, experience-based approach. In Construction Risk Management Decision Making, project manager and senior consultant Alex C. Arthur provides step-by-step advice on assessing and prioritizing risk using qualitative decision-making systems in the construction industry. Incorporating key theories and concepts from systems thinking and behavioral science, this highly practical guide focuses on the behavior patterns of real people in the industry, rather than complex quantitative techniques and data. Concise, easy-to-understand chapters highlight the current practices of construction risk managemTable of ContentsPreface xi Acknowledgement xiii About the Author xv 1 Introduction – A Risk Management Approach to Construction Project Delivery 1 1.1 Risk Perception Categorisation 3 1.1.1 Differences in Personality Traits 3 1.1.2 Prospect Theory 3 1.1.3 Differences Between External Stakeholders and Project Team Members 4 1.1.4 Culture Theory 4 1.2 Construction Risk Data Presentation Formats 4 Part 1 Concepts 5 Overview of the Concept Chapters 7 2 Systems Analysis of the Construction Industry and Project Delivery 9 2.1 Introduction 9 2.2 The Construction Industry 10 2.3 The Construction Industry System 10 2.3.1 Open and Closed Systems 11 2.3.2 Construction System Objective 12 2.3.3 Construction System’s Components and Decomposition 13 2.4 Construction Delivery System 14 2.5 The Construction Project Management System; Differentiation and Risk 17 2.5.1 Systems Differentiation 17 2.5.1.1 Evolution of Specialist Construction Disciplines 21 2.5.1.2 Isolated Training Programmes for the Different Specialist Disciplines 22 2.5.1.3 Project Team Members from Different Organisations and Internal Subgroups 22 2.5.1.4 Differences in Personal Objectives of Project Team Members 23 2.5.1.5 Environmental Changes 23 2.5.2 The Link Between Differentiation and Risk 24 2.5.2.1 Consolidated Differentiated Specialist Groupings 24 2.5.2.2 Failure to Integrate Objectives of Additional Differentiated Specialist Roles 24 2.5.2.3 Sudden and Prolonged Environmental Changes 24 2.6 Construction System’s Environment and Risk 25 2.6.1 Political Functional Subsystem 26 2.6.2 Economic Functional Subsystem 26 2.6.3 Socio-cultural Functional Subsystem 27 2.6.4 Technological Functional Subsystem 27 2.6.5 Ecological Functional Subsystem 27 2.6.6 Legal Functional Subsystem 28 2.7 Summary 28 3 The Concept of Risk 31 3.1 Introduction 31 3.2 Risk Conceptualisation 31 3.3 Risk Etymology 32 3.4 Risk Conceptual Interpretations 33 3.4.1 Realist Interpretation 33 3.4.2 Psychometric Viewpoint 34 3.4.3 Sociological Interpretation 35 3.4.4 Real and Socially Constructed Viewpoint 36 3.4.5 Edgework Viewpoint 36 3.5 Psychometric and Sociological Risk Perspective Application in This Book 36 3.6 Summary 38 4 Construction Risk Management 41 4.1 Introduction 41 4.2 Changing Perspectives on Organisational Risk Management Strategies 42 4.3 The Construction Risk Management Process 43 4.3.1 Risk Identification Subsystem 44 4.3.2 Risk Analysis Sub-system 44 4.3.3 Risk Response Sub-system 45 4.3.4 Risk Review Sub-system 45 4.4 Construction Risk Management Approaches 46 4.5 Summary 49 5 Construction Risk Management Decision-Making 51 5.1 Introduction 51 5.2 The Two Systems of Thinking and Decision-Making 52 5.2.1 Quick Decision-Making 53 5.2.2 Gradual Decision-Making 54 5.3 The Psychology of Perception 55 5.3.1 Risk Perception 56 5.3.2 Formation of Risk Perceptions 57 5.3.3 Impact of Affective Heuristics on Cognitive Reasoning 59 5.3.4 Construction Risk Data Presentation Formats and Affective Heuristics 60 5.4 Risk Management Decision Making Under Intuition 61 5.5 Differentiated Risk Perceptions and Intuitive Construction Risk Management Practices 64 5.6 Summary 68 Summary of the Part 1 71 Part 2 Case Studies 75 Overview of the Part 2 77 6 Research Proposal, Methodology, and Design 81 6.1 Introduction 81 6.2 Research Proposal 81 6.2.1 Research Propositions 84 6.2.1.1 Proposition 1 84 6.2.1.2 Proposition 2 84 6.2.1.3 Proposition 3 85 6.3 Research Philosophical Traditions, Axioms, and Methodology 85 6.3.1 Phase 1: The Researcher’s Philosophical Stance 86 6.3.2 Phase 2: Research Theoretical Perspectives 86 6.3.3 Phase 3: Research Investigative Strategies 86 6.3.4 Phase 4: Methods of Data Collection and Analysis 87 6.3.5 Phase 5: Demonstrating Quality of the Empirical Evidence 88 6.4 Summary 88 7 Data Presentation 89 7.1 Introduction 89 7.2 Case Study Project 1 89 7.2.1 Case Study 1 Participants 90 7.2.2 Case Study 1 Findings 91 7.2.2.1 Case 1– Research Proposition 1: Findings 91 7.2.2.2 Case 1– Research Proposition 2: Findings 102 7.2.2.3 Case 1– Research Proposition 3: Findings 124 7.2.2.4 Summary of Case 1 Findings 146 7.3 Case Study Project 2 147 7.3.1 Case Study 2 Participants 147 7.3.2 Case Study 2 Findings 147 7.4 Case Study Project 3 150 7.4.1 Case Study 3 Participants 151 7.4.2 Case Study 3 Findings 153 7.5 Case Study Project 4 154 7.5.1 Case Study 4 Participants 154 7.5.2 Case Study 4 Findings 155 7.6 Summary 158 8 Application 161 8.1 Introduction 161 8.2 Research Proposition 1: Discussions 161 8.2.1 Risk Perception Categorisation on the Typical Construction Project Risk Events at the Different Project Delivery Phases 162 8.2.1.1 Pre-construction Phase 162 8.2.1.2 Construction Phase 163 8.2.2 Risk Perception Categorisation on the Typical Construction Project Risk Events Under Different Project Settings 164 8.3 Research Proposition 2: Discussions 169 8.3.1 Intuitive Risk Management Decision Processing from ‘Grounded’ Heuristics 169 8.3.2 Susceptibility of Intuitive Decision Processing to Manipulation 173 8.3.3 Psychological Difficulties in Intuitive Risk Identification of Events Outside the Scope of a Specialist Role 173 8.4 Research Proposition 3: Findings 179 8.4.1 Two Strands of Intuitive Construction Risk Management Systems 180 8.4.2 Theoretically Incompatible Risk Management Practices 184 8.4.3 Intuitive Processing of Statistics and Probability Data 186 8.4.4 Comparative Analysis of Intuitive Processing of Quantitative Risk Assessment Versus Qualitative Risk Assessment 189 8.4.5 Intuitive Processing of Probability Predictions of Emotive Events 192 8.5 Summary 196 8.5.1 Research Proposition 1 196 8.5.2 Research Proposition 2 197 8.5.3 Research Proposition 3 198 9 Conclusions 201 9.1 Summary 201 9.1.1 Research Proposition 1 202 9.1.2 Research Proposition 2 203 9.1.3 Research Proposition 3 204 9.2 Rethinking Construction Risk Management Practices 205 Appendix A Research Design – Theory, Methodology, and Field Questions 207 Appendix B Case 2 Data Presentation 225 Appendix c Case 3 Data Presentation 279 Appendix d Case 4 Data Presentation 335 References 391 Index 401

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe contamination of environment and water resources by Selenium (Se) and its oxyanions from various sources are emerging contaminants of significant health and environmental concern. The primary sources include agricultural drainage water, mine drainage, residues from fossil fuels, thermoelectric power plants, oil refineries, and metal ores. Various methods and technologies have been developed which focus on the treatment of selenium-containing waters and wastewater. High concentrations of selenium in water cause various adverse impact to human health, such as carcinogenic, genotoxic, and cytotoxic effects. But in the lower concentrations, it is a useful constituent of the biological system. The range between toxicity and deficiency of selenium is minimal (40 to 400gper day), due to its dual nature. Selenium Contamination in Watercontains the latest status and information on selenium's origin, itschemistryand its toxicity to humans.The book representsa comprehensive and advancedrefereTable of ContentsChapter 1 Mapping of Selenium toxicity and technological advances for its removal: A Scentiometric approach Chapter 2 Selenium Distribution and Chemistry in Water and Soil Chapter 3 Occurrence and Sources of Selenium Contamination in Soil and Water and Its Impacts on Environment Chapter 4 Selenium Toxicity in Domestic Animals: Sources, Toxicopathology and Control Measure Chapter 5 Positive and negative impacts of selenium on human health and phytotoxicity Chapter 6 Various analytical techniques for Se determination in different matrix Chapter 7 Voltammetric Sensors and Materials for Selenium detection in Water Chapter 8 Optical Sensors and Materials for Selenium Determination in Water Chapter 9 Biosensors for the detection of selenium in environment Chapter 10 Physical and Chemical Methods for Selenium Removal Chapter 11 Chemical method for removal and treatment Chapter 12 Biological treatment advancements for the remediation of selenium from wastewater Chapter 13 Nanomaterials for the Remediation of Selenium in water Chapter 14 Harnessing Biogeochemical Principals for Remediation of Selenium Contaminated Soils Chapter 15 Membrane separation technologies for selenium Chapter 16 Intensifying approaches for removal of selenium Chapter 17 Emerging threat of selenium pollution: a spatial analysis of its sources and vulnerable areas in India

Read more less

Book SynopsisDiscover the theory of structural stability and its applications in crucial areas in engineering Structural Stability Theory and Practice: Buckling of Columns, Beams, Plates, and Shells combines necessary information on structural stability into a single, comprehensive resource suitable for practicing engineers and students alike. Written in both US and SI units, this invaluable guide is perfect for readers within and outside of the US. Structural Stability Theory and Practice: Buckling of Columns, Beams, Plates, and Shell offers: Detailed and patiently developed mathematical derivations and thorough explanationsEnergy methods that are incorporated throughout the chaptersConnections between theory, design specifications and solutionsThe latest codes and standards from the American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC), Canadian Standards Association (CSA), Australian Standards (SAA), Structural Stability Research Council (SSRC), and Eurocode 3Solved and unsolved practice-oriented problems in every chapter, with a solutions manual for unsolved problems included for instructors Ideal for practicing professionals in civil, mechanical, and aerospace engineering, as well as upper-level undergraduates and graduate students in structural engineering courses, Structural Stability Theory and Practice: Buckling of Columns, Beams, Plates, and Shell provides readers with detailed mathematical derivations along with thorough explanations and practical examples.Table of ContentsForeword xvii Preface xix About the Companion Website xxiii 1 Structural Stability 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 General Concepts 2 1.2.1 Bifurcation of Equilibrium 3 1.2.2 Limit Load Instability 4 1.2.3 Finite Disturbance Instability 4 1.3 Rigid Bar Columns 5 1.3.1 Rigid Bar Supported by a Translational Spring 5 1.3.1.1 The Displaced Shape Equilibrium Method 5 1.3.1.2 The Energy Method 6 1.3.2 Two Rigid Bars Connected by Rotational Springs 8 1.3.2.1 The Displaced Shape Equilibrium Method 8 1.3.2.2 The Energy Method 9 1.3.3 Three-Member Truss 11 1.3.3.1 The Energy Method 11 1.3.4 Three Rigid Bars with Two Linear Springs 13 1.3.4.1 The Displaced Shape Equilibrium Method 13 1.3.4.2 The Energy Method 15 1.4 Large Displacement Analysis 17 1.4.1 Rigid Bar Supported by a Translational Spring 17 1.4.1.1 The Displaced Shape Equilibrium Method 17 1.4.1.2 The Energy Method 17 1.4.2 Rigid Bar Supported by Translational and Rotational Springs 19 1.4.2.1 The Displaced Shape Equilibrium Method 19 1.4.2.2 The Energy Method 20 1.4.3 Two Rigid Bars Connected by Rotational Springs 22 1.4.3.1 The Energy Method 22 1.5 Imperfections 23 1.5.1 Rigid Bar Supported by a Rotational Spring at the Base 23 1.5.1.1 The Displaced Shape Equilibrium Method 23 1.5.1.2 The Energy Method 24 1.5.2 Two Rigid Bars Connected by Rotational Springs 26 1.5.2.1 The Displaced Shape Equilibrium Method 26 1.5.2.2 The Energy Method 26 Problems 28 References 29 2 Columns 31 2.1 General 31 2.2 The Critical Load According to Classical Column Theory 31 2.2.1 Pinned-Pinned Column 32 2.2.2 Fixed-Fixed Column 35 2.2.2.1 Symmetric Mode 35 2.2.2.2 Anti-Symmetric Mode 37 2.2.3 Cantilever Column 39 2.2.4 Fixed-Pinned Column 40 2.3 Effective Length of a Column 42 2.4 Special Cases 43 2.4.1 Pinned-Pinned Column with Intermediate Compressive Force 43 2.4.2 Cantilever Column with Intermediate Compressive Force 46 2.4.2.1 Case 1 49 2.4.2.2 Case 2 49 2.5 Higher-Order Governing Differential Equation 50 2.5.1 Boundary Conditions for Different Supports 52 2.5.1.1 Pinned Support 52 2.5.1.2 Fixed Support 52 2.5.1.3 Free End 52 2.5.1.4 Guided Support 52 2.5.2 Pinned-Pinned Column 52 2.5.3 Cantilever Column 54 2.5.4 Pinned-Guided Column 55 2.6 Continuous Columns 56 2.7 Columns on Elastic Supports 59 2.7.1 Column Pinned at One End and Elastic Support at the Other End 59 2.7.2 Column Fixed at One End and Elastic Support at the Other End 62 2.8 Eccentrically Loaded Columns 64 2.8.1 The Secant Formula 67 2.9 Geometrically Imperfect Columns 68 2.9.1 The Southwell Plot 71 2.10 Large Deflection Theory of Columns 73 2.10.1 Pinned-Pinned Column 73 2.10.2 Cantilever Column 79 2.10.3 Effective Length Approach 82 2.10.3.1 Pinned-Pinned Column 82 2.10.3.2 Cantilever Column 83 2.10.3.3 Fixed-Fixed Column 83 2.10.3.4 Fixed-Pinned Column 83 2.11 Energy Methods 84 2.11.1 Calculus of Variations 84 2.11.2 The Rayleigh-Ritz Method 87 2.11.3 The Galerkin Method 88 Problems 90 References 93 3 Inelastic and Metal Columns 95 3.1 Introduction 95 3.2 Double Modulus Theory 96 3.2.1 Rectangular Section 100 3.3 Tangent Modulus Theory 101 3.4 Shanley’s Theory for Inelastic Columns 103 3.5 Columns with Other End Conditions 108 3.6 Eccentrically Loaded Inelastic Columns 108 3.7 Aluminum Columns 116 3.7.1 North American and Australian Design Practice 117 3.8 Steel Columns 122 3.8.1 Buckling of Idealized Steel I-Section 123 3.8.1.1 Strong Axis Bending 125 3.8.1.2 Weak Axis Bending 126 3.8.2 Column Strength Curves for Steel Columns 126 3.8.3 Column Research Council Curve 128 3.8.4 Structural Stability Research Council Curves 129 3.8.5 European Multiple Column Curves 131 3.8.6 AISC Design Criteria for Steel Columns 132 Problems 135 References 136 4 Beamcolumns139 4.1 Introduction 139 4.2 Basic Differential Equations of Beam Columns 139 4.3 Beam Column with a Lateral Concentrated Load 141 4.3.1 Concentrated Lateral Load at the Mid-span 144 4.3.2 Beam Columns with Several Concentrated Loads 146 4.3.3 Beam Column with Lateral Uniformly Distributed Load 148 4.3.4 Beam Columns with Uniformly Distributed Load Over a Portion of Their Span 152 4.3.5 Beam Columns with Uniformly Increasing Load Over a Portion of Their Span 153 4.4 Beam Columns Subjected to Moments 153 4.4.1 Span Moment on Beam Column 154 4.4.2 End Moment on a Beam Column 156 4.4.3 Moments at Both Ends of Beam Column 159 4.4.3.1 Two Equal Moments 161 4.4.3.2 Moments at Both Ends of the Beam Column: Alternate Method 162 4.4.3.3 End Moments of the Same Sign Giving Double Curvature 163 4.5 Columns with Elastic Restraints 165 4.6 Beam Columns with Different End Conditions and Loads 167 4.6.1 Pinned-fixed Beam Columns with a Concentrated Load 167 4.6.2 Pinned-fixed Beam Columns Subjected to Uniformly Distributed Load 169 4.6.3 Fixed-fixed Beam Column with Concentrated Force 171 4.6.4 Fixed-fixed Beam Column with Uniformly Distributed Load 172 4.7 Alternate Method Using Basic Differential Equations 174 4.7.1 Fixed-fixed Beam Column with Uniformly Distributed Load 174 4.7.2 Pinned-fixed Beam Column with Uniformly Distributed Load 176 4.8 Continuous Beam Columns 177 4.9 Slope Deflection Equations for Beam Columns 182 4.9.1 Matrix Inversion 183 4.9.2 Beam Columns Subjected to Rotations and Relative Displacement at the Ends 184 4.9.3 Beam Columns Having One End Hinged 185 4.9.4 Beam Columns with Transverse Loading 186 4.9.5 Beam Columns in Single Curvature 188 4.10 Inelastic Beam Columns 188 4.10.1 Case 1: Yielding on the Compression Side Only 190 4.10.2 Case 2: Yielding on Both the Compression and Tension Sides 194 4.11 Design of Beam Columns 202 4.11.1 Concept of Equivalent Moment and Factor Cm 204 4.11.2 AISC Design Criteria for Steel Beam Columns 206 4.11.2.1 Doubly and Singly Symmetric Members Subjected to Flexure and Compression 206 4.11.2.2 Unsymmetric and Other Members Subject to Flexure and Axial Force 207 4.11.3 Eurocode 3 (ECS, 1993) Design Criteria 210 4.11.4 Canadian Standards Association (CSA 1994 – CSA-S16.1) 210 4.11.5 Australian Standard AS4100-1990 211 Problems 215 References 218 5 Frames 221 5.1 Introduction 221 5.2 Critical Loads by the Equilibrium Method 221 5.2.1 Portal Frame Without Sidesway 221 5.2.1.1 Portal Frame Without Sidesway with Rigid or Extremely Flexible Beam 225 5.2.2 Portal Frame with Sidesway 225 5.2.2.1 Portal Frame Having Sidesway with a Rigid or Extremely Flexible Beam 229 5.2.3 Frame with Prime Bending and Without Sidesway 230 5.3 Critical Loads by Slope Deflection Equations 232 5.3.1 Portal Frame Without Sidesway 232 5.3.2 Portal Frame with Sidesway 234 5.3.3 Two-Story Frame Without Sidesway 237 5.3.4 Two-Bay Frame Without Sidesway 239 5.3.5 Frames with Prime Bending and Without Sidesway 242 5.3.5.1 Frame with Hinged Supports 242 5.3.5.2 Frame with Fixed Supports 245 5.3.6 Frames with Prime Bending and Sidesway 247 5.3.7 Box Frame Without Sidesway 251 5.3.8 Multistory-Multibay Frames Without Sidesway 253 5.4 Critical Loads by Matrix and Finite Element Methods 257 5.4.1 Formation of the Element Stiffness Matrix 258 5.4.2 Formation of the Structure Stiffness Matrix 262 5.4.3 In Span Loading 264 5.4.4 Buckling of a Frame Pinned at the Base and with Sidesway Permitted 266 5.4.5 Nonlinear Geometric or Large Deflection Analysis (Second-Order Elastic Analysis) 273 5.5 Design of Frame Members 278 5.5.1 Braced Frames (Sidesway Inhibited) 279 5.5.2 Unbraced Frames (Sidesway Not Inhibited) 284 5.5.3 Inelastic Buckling of Frames 290 Problems 310 References 311 6 Torsional Buckling and Lateral Buckling of Beams 313 6.1 Introduction 313 6.2 Pure Torsion of Thin-Walled Cross-Sections 313 6.3 Non-uniform Torsion of Thin-Walled Open Cross-Sections 315 6.3.1 I-section 315 6.3.2 General Thin-Walled Open Cross-Sections 316 6.3.3 Warping Constant Cw of a Channel Section 320 6.4 Torsional Buckling of Columns 322 6.5 Torsional Buckling Load 326 6.5.1 Thin-Walled Open Sections with Rectangular Elements Intersecting at a Point 326 6.5.2 Thin-Walled Open Doubly Symmetric Sections 327 6.5.2.1 Pinned-pinned Columns 327 6.5.2.2 Fixed-fixed Columns 329 6.6 Torsional Flexural Buckling 332 6.6.1 Pinned-pinned Columns 335 6.6.2 Fixed-fixed Columns 337 6.6.3 Singly Symmetric Sections 338 6.6.3.1 Pinned-pinned Columns 339 6.6.3.2 Fixed-fixed Columns 342 6.7 Torsional Flexural Buckling: The Energy Approach 345 6.7.1 Strain Energy of Torsional Flexural Buckling 345 6.7.2 Potential Energy of External Loads in Torsional Flexural Buckling 348 6.8 Lateral Buckling of Beams 352 6.8.1 Lateral Buckling of Simply Supported, Narrow Rectangular Beams in Pure Bending 352 6.8.2 Lateral Buckling of Simply Supported I Beams in Pure Bending 356 6.8.3 Lateral Buckling of Simply Supported I Beams: Concentrated Load at the Mid-Span 359 6.8.4 Lateral Buckling of Cantilever I Beams: Concentrated Load at the Free End 364 6.8.4.1 Lateral Buckling of Cantilever Narrow Rectangular Beams: Concentrated Load at the Free End 367 6.8.5 Lateral Buckling of Narrow Rectangular Cantilever Beams Acted on by Uniform Moment 367 6.9 The Energy Method 369 6.9.1 Lateral Buckling of Simply Supported I Beams: Concentrated Load at the Mid-Span 369 6.9.1.1 Lateral Buckling of Simply Supported, Narrow Rectangular Beams: Concentrated Load at the Mid-Span 372 6.9.2 Lateral Buckling of Simply Supported I Beams: Uniformly Distributed Load 373 6.9.2.1 Lateral Buckling of Simply Supported, Narrow Rectangular Beams: Uniformly Distributed Load along the Centroidal Axis 378 6.9.3 Lateral Buckling of Cantilever Rectangular Beams: Concentrated Load at the Free End 378 6.10 Beams with Different Support and Loading Conditions 380 6.10.1 Different Support Conditions 381 6.10.2 Different Loading Conditions 382 6.10.2.1 Beams with Unequal Moments 383 6.11 Design for Torsional and Lateral Buckling 383 6.11.1 AISC Design Criteria for Steel Beams 383 6.11.1.1 Local Buckling 384 6.11.1.2 Lateral Torsional Buckling 385 Problems 395 References 397 7 Buckling of Plates 399 7.1 Introduction 399 7.2 Theory of Plate Bending 399 7.3 Buckling of Thin Plates 405 7.3.1 In-plane Forces 405 7.4 Boundary Conditions 408 7.4.1 Simply Supported Edge 408 7.4.2 Built-in Edge 408 7.4.3 Free Edge 408 7.4.4 Elastically Supported and Elastically Built-in Edge 409 7.5 Buckling of Rectangular Plates Uniformly Compressed in One Direction 410 7.5.1 Buckling of Rectangular Plates with Simply Supported Edges 410 7.5.2 Buckling of Rectangular Plates with Other Boundary Conditions 415 7.5.3 Loading Edges Simply Supported, the Side y = 0 Is Clamped, and the Side y = b Is Free 416 7.5.4 Loading Edges Simply Supported and the Sides y = 0 and y = b Are Clamped 421 7.5.5 Loading Edges Simply Supported, the Side y = 0 Is Simply Supported, and the Side y = b Is Free 423 7.5.6 Loading Edges Simply Supported, the Side y = 0 Is Elastically Built-in and the Side y = b Is Free 427 7.5.7 Loading Edges Simply Supported, the Sides y= ±b/2 Are Elastically Built-in 431 7.5.7.1 Loading Edges Simply Supported, the Sides y= ±b/2 Are Elastically Restrained by Rotational Springs 434 7.5.7.2 Loading Edges Simply Supported, the Sides y = 0 and y = b Are Elastically Built with Different Flange Sizes 435 7.5.8 Loading Edges Simply Supported, the Sides y=0 and y = b Are Supported by Elastic Beams 438 7.6 The Energy Method 442 7.6.1 Strain Energy Due to Bending in Plates 442 7.6.2 Potential Energy of the External Forces in Plates 443 7.6.2.1 Potential Energy Due to Nx and Ny 443 7.6.2.2 Potential Energy Due to Nxy 444 7.6.3 Rectangular Plate Subjected to Uniaxial Compressive Force and Fixed on All Edges 445 7.6.4 A Rectangular Plate with Clamped Edges under Compressive Pressure in Two Perpendicular Directions 447 7.6.5 Buckling of Simply Supported Rectangular Plates Under the Action of Shear Forces 449 7.6.6 Buckling of Simply Supported Rectangular Plates Under Combined Bending and Compression 453 7.6.7 Buckling of Plates with Stiffeners 458 7.6.8 Simply Supported Rectangular Plates with Longitudinal Stiffeners 459 7.6.8.1 Plates with Two Longitudinal Stiffeners Dividing the Width of the Plate 463 7.6.9 Simply Supported Rectangular Compressed Plate with Transverse Stiffeners 464 7.6.10 Simply Supported Rectangular Plate with Stiffeners in Both the Longitudinal and Transverse Directions 468 7.7 Buckling of Circular Plates 470 7.7.1 Clamped Plate 472 7.7.2 Simply Supported Plate 473 7.8 The Finite Difference Method 474 7.8.1 Critical Load for a Simply Supported Plate Subjected to Biaxial Loading 477 7.9 The Finite Element Method 481 7.10 Large Deflection Theory of Plates 487 7.10.1 Post-buckling Behavior of Plates 491 7.11 Inelastic Buckling of Plates 495 7.11.1 Rectangular Plates with Simply Supported Edges 497 7.11.2 Plate with Loading Edges Simply Supported and the Sides y = 0 and y = b Are Clamped 499 7.12 Ultimate Strength of Plates in Compression 500 7.13 Local Buckling of Compression Elements: Design 504 Problems 506 References 508 8 Buckling of Shells 511 8.1 Introduction 511 8.2 The Large Deflection Theory of Cylindrical Shells 512 8.3 The Linear Theory of Cylindrical Shells 517 8.3.1 Linear Membrane Equations for Cylindrical Shells 518 8.4 Donnell’s Linear Equations of Stability of Cylindrical Shells 519 8.5 The Energy Method 524 8.6 Application of the Linear Stability Equations 526 8.6.1 Circular Cylinders Under Axial Compression 526 8.6.2 Circular Cylinders Under Uniform Lateral Pressure 531 8.6.2.1 Critical Pressures for Cylinders Subjected to External Pressure 533 8.6.3 Cylinders Subjected to Torsion 534 8.6.4 Cylinders Subjected to Combined Axial Compression and Uniform External Lateral Pressure 537 8.6.5 Cylindrical Shells with Different End Conditions 539 8.7 Failure and Post-buckling Behavior of Cylindrical Shells 540 8.7.1 Post-Buckling Behavior of Cylindrical Shells 541 8.7.2 Post-buckling Behavior of Cylindrical Panels 543 8.8 General Shells 548 8.8.1 Nonlinear Equations of Equilibrium 548 8.8.2 Linear Equations of Stability (the Donnell Type) 553 8.9 Shells of Revolution 558 8.9.1 Stability Equations Where Pre-buckling Rotations Are Retained 559 8.9.2 Stability Equations with Pre-buckling Rotations Neglected 561 8.9.3 Circular Flat Plates 563 8.9.3.1 Clamped Plate 566 8.9.3.2 Simply Supported Plate 566 8.9.4 Shallow Spherical Caps 567 8.9.5 Conical Shells 573 8.9.6 Toroidal Shells 578 Problems 583 References 584 Answers to the Problems 587 Appendix A Slope Deflection Coefficients for Beam Column Buckling 593 Appendix B Torsion Properties of Thin-Walled Open Cross-Sections 597 Appendix C Calculus of Variations 599 Appendix D Euler Equations 603 Appendix E Differential Geometry in Curvilinear Coordinates 607 Index 619

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book contains both practical and theoretical aspects of groundwater resourcesrelating to geochemistry.Focusing onrecent researchingroundwater resources, this bookhelps readersto understand thehydrogeochemistryof groundwater resources.Dealing primarilywith the sources of ions in groundwater, the book describes geogenic and anthropogenic input of ionsintowater.Different organic, inorganic and emerging contamination and salinity problemsare described, along withpollution-related issuesaffectinggroundwater. New trends in groundwater contamination remediation measuresareincluded, which will be particularly useful toresearchers working in the field of water conservation.The book also contains diverse groundwater modellingexamples, enablingabetter understanding of water-related issues and their management. Groundwater Geochemistry: Pollution and Remediationoffers the reader: An understandingofthe quantitative and qualitative challenges of groundwater resourcTable of ContentsPreface About the Editors List of Contributors 1. Geogenic contaminants in groundwater Jyoti Kushawaha School of Environmental Sciences, Jawaharlal Nehru University, New Delhi jyoti.vaishnavi@gmail.com 2.Fluoride Contamination in Groundwater, Impacts and their Potential Remediation Techniques R. N. Jadeja Department of Environmental Studies, Faculty of Science, The Maharaja Sayajirao University of Baroda, Vadodara, India-390002 rjadeja-chem@msubaroda.ac.in 3. Salinity problem in groundwater and management strategies in arid and semi-arid regions BalajiEtikala Department of Geology, Sri Venkateswara University, Chandragiri Road, Tirupati-517502, Andhra Pradesh, India balajiyvu@gmail.com 4. Heavy metal contamination in groundwater sources Pinki Rani Agrawal Academy of Scientific and Innovative Research (AcSIR), CSIR-NPL campus, New Delhi, India pinkigarg66@gmail.com 5. Source, assessment and remediation of trace metals in groundwater Anita Punia Department of Civil Engineering, Indian Institute of Technology, Guwahati, India-781039 6. Nitrate pollution in groundwater and their possible remediation through adsorption Arun Lal Srivastav Chitkara University, Himachal Pradesh, India arunitbhu2009@gmail.com 7. Organic micropollutants in Groundwater: A rising concern for India drinking water supplies Manvendra Patel School of Environmental Sciences, Jawaharlal Nehru University, New Delhi manvendra.edu11@gmail.com 8. Organic contaminants in groundwater and remediation measures. Gurudatta Institute of Environmental Sciences and Sustainable Development Banaras Hindu University, Varanasi India gurudatta.singh2@bhu.ac.in 9. Organic Pollutants in Groundwater Resources and remediation measures Majid Peyravi Department of Chemical Engineering, Babol Noshirvani University of Technology, Shariati Ave.,Babol, Iran, Post Code:47148-71167 majidpeyravi@gmail.com 10. Impact of Urbanisation on Groundwater resources Pooja D Central Scientific Instruments Organisation, Sector 30-C, Chandigarh-160030, India poojaiitr@csio.res.in 11. Impact on groundwater quality resources due to Industrial effluent Zeenat Arif Department of Chemical engineering and Technology Indian Institute of Technology (BHU) Varanasi, India 12. Effects of Acid Mine Drainage on hydro-chemical properties of groundwater and possible remediation Sushil Kumar Shukla Department of Transport Science and Technology, Central University of Jharkhand, Ranchi, India shuklask2000@gmail.com 13. Impact of E-waste pollutants on the underground water Deen Dayal Giri Department of Botany, Maharaj Singh College Saharanpur, 24700 ddgiri1@gmail.com 14. Zero Valent Iron (ZVI) for Groundwater Remediation Naresh K Sethy Department of chemical engineering & technology, IIT (BHU) Varanasi, 221005, India nareshsethy2009@gmail.com 15. Various Purification Techniques of Groundwater Dan Bahadur Pal Department of Chemical Engineering, Birla Institute of Technology, Mesra, Ranchi-835215, Jharkhand, India danbahadur.chem@gmail.com 16. Various remediation techniques for groundwater pollution Ankita Ojha Department of Chemistry, IIT BHU, Varanasi-221005 ankitaojha1208@gmail.com 17. Various remediation measures for groundwater contamination Baljinder Singh Department of Biotechnology , Panjab University, Chandigarh 160014, India gilljwms2@gmail.com 18. Application of Remote Sensing and Geographic Information System in groundwater resource conservation Chandrashekhar Azad Vishwakarma TERI School of Advanced Studies, New Delhi ajadshekhar@gmail.com 19. Recent Trends in Groundwater Conservation and Management Amit Kumar Tiwari Department of Chemical Engineering, Birla Institute of Technology, Mesra Ranchi-835215, Jharkhand, India. amit_tiwari20@yahoo.com 20. Groundwater Vulnerability Assessment using Random Forest Approach in a Water Stress Paddy Cultivated Region of West Bengal, India Subodh Chandra Pal Department of Geography, The University of Burdwan, West Bengal, India

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book aims to explore basic principles, concepts and applications of geochemistry. Topics include chemical weathering, impacts on living beings and water, geochemical cycles, oxidation and redox reactions in geochemistry, isotopes, analytical techniques, medicinal, inorganic, marine, atmospheric, and environmental applications, as well as case studies. This book helps in understanding the chemical composition of the earth and its applications. It also includes beneficial effects, bottlenecks, solutions, and future directions in geochemistry.Table of ContentsPreface xiii 1 Toxic Geogenic Contaminants in Serpentinitic Geological Systems: Occurrence, Behavior, Exposure Pathways, and Human Health Risks 1Willis Gwenzi 1.1 Introduction 2 1.2 Serpentinitic Geological Systems 4 1.2.1 Nature, Occurrence, and Geochemistry 4 1.2.2 Occurrence and Behavior of Toxic Contaminants 5 1.2.2.1 Chrysotile Asbestos 5 1.2.2.2 Toxic Metals 5 1.2.2.3 Rare Earth Elements 6 1.3 Human Exposure Pathways 7 1.3.1 Occupational Exposure 7 1.3.2 Non-Occupational Exposure Routes 7 1.3.2.1 Inhalation of Contaminated Particulates 7 1.3.2.2 Ingestion of Contaminated Geophagic Earths 8 1.3.2.3 Ingestion of Contaminated Drinking Water 8 1.3.2.4 Ingestion of Contaminated Medicinal Plants 8 1.3.2.5 Ingestion of Contaminated Wild Foods 9 1.4 Human Health Risks and Their Mitigation 10 1.4.1 Health Risks 10 1.4.1.1 Chrysotile Asbestos 10 1.4.1.2 Toxic Metals 11 1.4.1.3 Rare Earth Elements 11 1.4.2 Mitigating Human Exposure and Health Risks 12 1.4.2.1 Risk Analysis 12 1.4.2.2 Risk Evaluation 12 1.4.2.3 Risk Mitigation 13 1.4.2.4 Overview of Mitigation Interventions 13 1.5 Future Perspectives 13 1.6 Conclusions 14 Acknowledgements 15 References 15 2 Benefits of Geochemistry and Its Impact on Human Health 23Abel Inobeme, Charles Oluwaseun Adetunji, Muhammad Akram, Maliki Munirat, Inamuddin, Umme Laila, S.O. Okonkwo, Saher Islam and Jonathan Inobeme 2.1 Introduction 24 2.2 General Overview of Geochemistry and Human Health 25 2.2.1 Types of Geochemistry 26 2.2.2 Some Beneficial Effect of Some Mineral With Health Benefits 26 2.2.2.1 Magnesium 27 2.2.2.2 Manganese 27 2.2.2.3 Calcium 27 2.2.2.4 Cobalt 28 2.2.2.5 Copper 28 2.2.2.6 Zinc 29 2.2.2.7 Iron 29 2.2.2.8 Sodium 29 2.2.2.9 Arsenic 30 2.2.2.10 Chlorine 30 2.2.2.11 Iodine 30 2.2.2.12 Potassium 31 2.2.2.13 Fluoride 31 2.2.3 Application of Geochemistry on Human Health 32 2.3 Conclusion and Recommendations 33 References 34 3 Applications of Geochemistry in Livestock: Health and Nutritional Perspective 37Charles Oluwaseun Adetunji, J. Inobeme, Inamuddin, Muhammad Akram, A. Inobeme, Khuram Shahzad, Maliki Munirat, Saher Islam, Noshiza Majeed and S.O. Okonkwo 3.1 Introduction 38 3.2 General and Global Perspective About Geochemistry in Livestock 39 3.3 Types of Geochemistry and Their Numerous Benefits 41 3.3.1 Analytical Geochemistry 42 3.3.2 Isotope Geochemistry 43 3.3.3 Low Temperature Geochemistry 43 3.3.4 Organic and Petroleum Geochemistry 44 3.4 Application of Geochemistry in Livestock 44 3.5 Geochemistry and Animal Health 44 3.6 General Overview of Geochemistry in Livestock’s Merits of Geochemistry/Essential Minerals in Livestocks 45 3.6.1 Specific Examples of Authors That Have Used Essential Minerals in Livestock 47 3.6.2 Livestock in Relation to Geominerals 48 3.6.3 Trace Minerals Parallel Importance in Livestock 48 3.6.4 Heavy Metals Impact Livestock 49 3.7 Conclusion and Recommendations 50 References 51 4 Application in Geochemistry Toward the Achievement of a Sustainable Agricultural Science 57Muhammad Akram, Charles Oluwaseun Adetunji, S.O. Okonkwo, Inamuddin, Umme Laila, J. Inobeme, A. Inobeme, Saher Islam and Maliki Munirat 4.1 Introduction 58 4.2 General Overview on the Utilization of Geochemistry and Their Wide Application on Agriculture 59 4.2.1 Classification 60 4.2.2 Chemical Composition of Rocks 60 4.2.3 Effect of Some Beneficial Minerals in Agriculture 60 4.2.4 Beneficial Mineral Nutrients That are Crucial to the Development of Plants 62 4.2.4.1 Micronutrients 63 4.3 Role of Geochemistry in Agriculture 65 4.4 Geochemical Effects of Heavy Metals on Crops Health 65 4.5 Conclusion and Recommendations 69 References 69 5 Geochemistry, Extent of Pollution, and Ecological Impact of Heavy Metal Pollutants in Soil 73Abhiroop Chowdhury, Aliya Naz and Diksha Sharma 5.1 Introduction 74 5.2 Material and Methods 75 5.2.1 Review Process 75 5.2.2 Ecological Risk Index 75 5.3 Toxic Heavy Metal and Their Impact to the Ecosystems 76 5.3.1 Arsenic 76 5.3.2 Cadmium 77 5.3.3 Chromium 78 5.3.4 Copper 78 5.3.5 Lead 79 5.3.6 Nickel 79 5.3.7 Zinc 80 5.4 Metal Pollution in Soil Across the Globe 80 5.5 Ecological and Human Health Risk Impacts of Heavy Metals 85 5.6 Conclusion 87 References 87 6 Isotope Geochemistry 93Praveen Kumar Yadav, Amit Kumar Mauraya, Chinky Kochar, Lakhan Taneja and S. Swarupa Tripathy 6.1 Introduction 93 6.2 Basic Definitions 94 6.2.1 The Notation 94 6.2.2 The Fractionation Factor 95 6.2.3 Isotope Fractionation 95 6.2.3.1 Kinetic Isotope Fractionation 95 6.2.3.2 Equilibrium Isotope Fractionation 96 6.2.4 Mass Dependent and Independent Fractionations 97 6.3 Application of Traditional Isotopes in Geochemistry 98 6.3.1 Geothermometer 98 6.3.2 Isotopes in Biological System 98 6.3.2.1 Carbon (C) 99 6.3.2.2 Nitrogen (N) 100 6.3.3 Isotopes in Archaeology 100 6.3.4 Isotopes in Fossils and the Earliest Life 101 6.3.5 Isotopes in Hydrothermal and Ore Deposits 101 6.4 Non-Traditional Isotopes in Geochemistry 102 6.4.1 Application in Tracing of Source 102 6.4.2 Application in Process Tracing 103 6.4.3 Biological Cycling 104 6.5 Conclusion 105 References 105 7 Environmental Geochemistry 111Sapna Nehra, Rekha Sharma and Dinesh Kumar 7.1 Introduction 111 7.2 Overview of the Environmental Geochemistry 112 7.3 Conclusions 120 7.4 Abbreviations 121 Acknowledgment 121 References 121 8 Medical Geochemistry 127Hosam M. Saleh and Amal I. Hassan 8.1 Introduction 128 8.2 The Evolution of Geochemistry 129 8.3 This Science has Expanded Considerably to Become Distinct Branches 129 8.3.1 Cosmochemistry 131 8.3.2 The Economic Importance of Geochemistry 131 8.3.3 Analytical Geochemistry 132 8.3.4 Geochemistry of Radioisotopes 132 8.3.5 Medical Geochemistry and Human Health 134 8.3.6 Environmental Health and Safety 137 8.4 Conclusion 142 References 143 9 Inorganic Geochemistry 149Sathasivam Pratheep Kumar, Triveni Rajashekhar Mandlimath and M. Ramesh 9.1 Introduction 149 9.2 Elements and the Earth 150 9.2.1 Iron 150 9.2.2 Oxygen 151 9.2.3 Silicon 152 9.2.4 Magnesium 152 9.3 Geological Minerals 152 9.3.1 Quartz 152 9.3.2 Feldspar 153 9.3.3 Amphibole 153 9.3.4 Pyroxene 153 9.3.5 Olivine 153 9.3.6 Clay Minerals 153 9.3.7 Kaolinite 154 9.3.8 Bentonite, Montmorillonite, Vermiculite, and Biotite 154 9.4 Characterization Techniques 155 9.4.1 Powder X-Ray Diffraction 155 9.4.2 X-Ray Fluorescence Spectra 156 9.4.3 X-Ray Photoelectron Spectra 156 9.4.4 Electron Probe Micro-Analysis 156 9.4.5 Inductively Coupled Plasma Spectrometry 157 9.4.6 Fourier Transform Infrared Spectroscopy 157 9.4.7 Scanning Electron Microscopy Analysis 158 9.4.8 Energy Dispersive X-Ray Analysis 158 9.5 Conclusion 159 References 159 10 Introduction and Scope of Geochemistry 161Triveni Rajashekhar Mandlimath, Sathasivam Pratheep Kumar and M. Ramesh 10.1 Introduction 161 10.1.1 Periodic Table and Electronic Configuration 162 10.1.1.1 Periodic Table 162 10.1.1.2 Electronic Configuration 164 10.2 Periodic Properties 164 10.2.1 Ionization Enthalpy 164 10.2.2 Electron Affinity 165 10.2.3 Electro-Negativity 166 10.3 Chemical Bonding 166 10.3.1 Ionic Bond 166 10.3.2 Covalent Bond 166 10.3.3 Metallic Bond 167 10.3.4 Hydrogen Bond 167 10.3.5 Van der Waals Forces 167 10.4 Geochemical Classification and Distribution of Elements 167 10.4.1 Lithophiles 167 10.4.2 Siderophiles 168 10.4.3 Chalcophiles 169 10.4.4 Atmophiles 169 10.4.5 Biophiles 169 10.5 Chemical Composition of the Earth 169 10.6 Classification of Earth’s Layers 170 10.6.1 Based on Chemical Composition 170 10.6.2 Based on Physical Properties 170 10.7 Spheres of the Earth 171 10.7.1 Geosphere/Lithosphere 171 10.7.2 Hydrosphere 172 10.7.3 Biosphere 172 10.7.4 Atmosphere 172 10.7.5 Troposphere 173 10.7.6 Stratosphere 173 10.7.7 Mesosphere 174 10.7.8 Thermosphere and Ionosphere 174 10.7.9 Exosphere 174 10.8 Sub-Disciplines of Geochemistry 175 10.9 Scope of Geochemistry 175 10.10 Conclusion 176 References 176

Read more less

Book SynopsisTired of new software that doesn't seem to work in the field? Ready to get your teams up to speed and productive with the latest tools? The Construction Technology Handbook takes a ground up, no jargon look at technology in the construction industry. From clear, quickly grasped explanations of how popular software actually works to how companies both large and small can efficiently try out and onboard new tools, this book unlocks new ways for construction field teams, firm owners, managers, leaders, and employees to do business. You'll learn about: Simple frameworks for making sense of all the new options cropping upHow software and data work and how they work together to make your job easier and saferWhat artificial intelligence really isand how it can help real companies todayTools that are just over the horizon that will, one day, make your job just a little bit easierNew and practical resources to help you incorporate an attitude of innovation and technology adoption into your workplace Perfect for general contractors and subcontractors, The Construction Technology Handbook also belongs on the bookshelves of construction technology vendors and construction workers who want to better understand the needs of the construction industry and the inner workings of construction technology, respectively.Table of ContentsForeword ix Preface xi Acknowledgments xiii Chapter 1 Introduction 1 Chapter 2 Software 25 Chapter 3 Software Networks 49 Chapter 4 Construction Software 69 Chapter 5 Industrialized Construction 93 Chapter 6 Machine Learning and Artificial Intelligence 101 Chapter 7 Applying Artificial Intelligence 123 Chapter 8 Future Tools 141 Chapter 9 Innovation and Technology Adoption 161 Chapter 10 The Digital Construction Mindset 187 Bibliography 191 About the Author 193 Index 195

Read more less

Book SynopsisENGINEERING FOR SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT AN AUTHORITATIVE AND COMPLETE GUIDE TO SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT ENGINEERING In Engineering for Sustainable Development: Theory and Practice, a team of distinguished academics deliver a comprehensive, education-focused discussion on sustainable engineering, bridging the gap between theory and practice by drawing upon illuminating case studies and the latest cutting-edge research. In the book, readers will find an introduction to the sustainable development agenda and sustainable technology development, as well as practical methods and tools for the development and implementation of sustainable engineering solutions. The book highlights the critical role of engineers and the engineering profession in providing sustainability leadership as well as important future-focused solutions to support engineering global sustainable development. The book offers a wide range of civil, mechanical, electrical, and chemTable of ContentsPreface xv Part I Challenges in Sustainable Engineering 1 1 Sustainability Challenges 3 1.1 Introduction 3 1.2 Weak Sustainability vs Strong Sustainability 6 1.3 Utility vs Throughput 8 1.4 Relative Scarcity vs Absolute Scarcity 10 1.5 Global/International Sustainability Agenda 10 1.6 Engineering Sustainability 12 1.7 IPAT 19 1.8 Environmental Kuznets Curves 20 1.9 Impact of Engineering Innovation on Earth’s Carrying Capacity 21 1.10 Engineering Challenges in Reducing Ecological Footprint 22 1.11 Sustainability Implications of Engineering Design 24 1.12 Engineering Catastrophes 27 1.13 Existential Risks from Engineering Activities in the Twenty-First Century 30 1.13.1 Artificial Intelligence (AI) 30 1.13.2 Green Technologies 32 1.14 TheWay Forward 34 References 35 Part II Sustainability Assessment Tools 41 2 Quantifying Sustainability – Triple Bottom Line Assessment 43 2.1 Introduction 43 2.2 Triple Bottom Line 44 2.2.1 The Economic Bottom Line 44 2.2.2 Environmental Bottom Line 44 2.2.3 The Social Bottom Line 45 2.3 Characteristics of Indicators 46 2.4 How Do You Develop an Indicator? 47 2.5 Selection of Indicators 48 2.6 Participatory Approaches in Indicator Development 48 2.7 Description of Steps for Indicator Development 49 2.7.1 Step 1: Preliminary Selection of Indicators 49 2.7.2 Step 2: Questionnaire Design and Development 49 2.7.3 Step 3: Online Survey Development 49 2.7.4 Step 4: Participant Selection 49 2.7.5 Step 5: Final Selection of Indicators and Calculation of Their Weights 50 2.8 Sustainability Assessment Framework 53 2.8.1 Expert Survey 54 2.8.2 Stakeholders Survey 58 2.9 TBL Assessment for Bench Marking Purposes 60 2.10 Conclusions 61 References 62 3 Life Cycle Assessment for TBL Assessment – I 63 3.1 Life Cycle Thinking 63 3.2 Life Cycle Assessment 64 3.3 Environmental Life Cycle Assessment 65 3.3.1 Application of ELCA 66 3.3.2 ISO 14040-44 for Life Cycle Assessment 68 3.3.2.1 Step 1: Goal and Scope Definition 68 3.3.2.2 Step 2: Inventory Analysis 71 3.3.2.3 Step 3: Life Cycle Impact Assessment (LCIA) 72 3.3.2.4 Step 4: Interpretation 87 3.4 Allocation Method 87 3.5 Type of LCA 91 3.6 Uncertainty Analysis in LCA 92 3.7 Environmental Product Declaration 95 References 103 4 Economic and Social Life Cycle Assessment 107 4.1 Economic and Social Life Cycle Assessment 107 4.2 Life Cycle Costing 108 4.2.1 Discounted Cash Flow Analysis 110 4.2.2 Internalisation of External Costs 117 4.3 Social Life Cycle Assessment 120 4.3.1 Step 1: Goal and Scope Definition 121 4.3.2 Step 2: Life Cycle Inventory 123 4.3.3 Step 3: Life Cycle Social Impact 123 4.3.4 Step 4: Interpretation 124 4.4 Life Cycle Sustainability Assessment 128 References 130 Part III Sustainable Engineering Solutions 131 5 Sustainable Engineering Strategies 133 5.1 Engineering Strategies for Sustainable Development 133 5.2 Cleaner Production Strategies 134 5.2.1 Good Housekeeping 135 5.2.2 Input Substitution 136 5.2.3 Technology Modification 137 5.2.4 Product Modification 138 5.2.5 On Site Recovery/Recycling 138 5.3 Fuji Xerox Case Study – Integration of Five CPS 139 5.4 Business Case Benefits of Cleaner Production 140 5.5 Cleaner Production Assessment 140 5.5.1 Planning and Organisation 140 5.5.2 Assessment 141 5.5.3 Feasibility Studies 144 5.5.4 Implementation and Continuation 148 5.6 Eco-efficiency 150 5.6.1 Key Outcomes of Eco-efficiency 152 5.6.2 Eco-efficiency Portfolio Analysis in Choosing Eco-efficient Options 152 5.7 Environmental Management Systems 157 5.7.1 Aims of an EMS 160 5.7.2 A Basic EMS Framework: Plan, Do Check, Review 161 5.7.3 Interested Parties 161 5.7.4 Benefits of an EMS 162 5.8 Conclusions 164 References 165 6 Industrial Ecology 167 6.1 What Is Industrial Ecology? 167 6.2 Application of Industrial Ecology 168 6.3 Regional Synergies/Industrial Symbiosis 169 6.4 How Does It Happen? 172 6.5 Types of Industrial Symbiosis 173 6.6 Challenges in By-Product Reuse 179 6.7 What Is an Eco Industrial Park? 180 6.8 Practice Examples 185 6.8.1 Development of an EIP 185 6.8.2 Industrial Symbiosis in an Industrial Area 186 6.9 Industrial Symbiosis in Kwinana Industrial Area 187 6.9.1 Conclusions 187 References 189 7 Green Engineering 191 7.1 What Is Green Engineering? 191 7.1.1 Minimise 192 7.1.2 Substitute 192 7.1.3 Moderate 193 7.1.4 Simplify 193 7.2 Principles of Green Engineering 194 7.2.1 Inherent Rather than Circumstantial 194 7.2.2 Prevention Rather than Treatment 194 7.2.3 Design for Separation 194 7.2.4 Maximise Mass, Energy, Space, and Time Efficiency 195 7.2.5 Output-Pulled vs Input-Pushed 195 7.2.6 Conserve Complexity 196 7.2.7 Durability Rather than Immortality 196 7.2.8 Meet Need, Minimise Excess 197 7.2.9 Minimise Material Diversity 197 7.2.10 Integration and Interconnectivity 197 7.2.11 Material and Energy Inputs Should Be Renewable Rather than Depleting 198 7.2.12 Products, Processes, and Systems Should Be Designed for Performance in a Commercial ‘After Life’ 198 7.3 Application of Green Engineering 198 7.3.1 Chemical 199 7.3.1.1 PreventWaste 199 7.3.1.2 Maximise Atom Economy 200 7.3.1.3 Design Safer Chemicals and Products 201 7.3.1.4 Use Safer Solvents and Reaction Conditions 201 7.3.1.5 Use Renewable Feedstocks 202 7.3.1.6 Avoid Chemical Derivatives 203 7.3.1.7 Use Catalysts 203 7.3.1.8 Increase Energy Efficiency 203 7.3.1.9 Design Less Hazardous Chemical Syntheses 203 7.3.1.10 Design Chemicals and Products to Degrade After Use 204 7.3.1.11 Analyse in Real Time to Prevent Pollution 204 7.3.1.12 Minimise the Potential for Accidents 204 7.3.2 Sustainable Materials 206 7.3.2.1 Applications of Composite Materials 208 7.3.2.2 The Positives and Negatives of Composite Materials 209 7.3.2.3 Bio-Bricks 209 7.3.3 Heat Recovery 210 7.3.3.1 Temperature Classification 211 7.3.3.2 Heat Recovery Technologies 213 7.3.3.3 The Positives and Negatives ofWaste Heat Recovery 217 References 217 8 Design for the Environment 221 8.1 Introduction 221 8.2 Design for the Environment 221 8.3 Benefits of Design for the Environment 223 8.3.1 Economic Benefits 223 8.3.2 Operational Benefits 224 8.3.3 Marketing Benefits 225 8.4 Challenges Associated with Design for the Environment 225 8.5 Life Cycle Design Guidelines 228 8.6 Practice Examples 233 8.6.1 Design for Disassembly 233 8.6.2 The Life Cycle Benefits of Remanufacturing Strategies 236 8.7 ZeroWaste 240 8.7.1 Waste Diversion Rate 240 8.7.2 ZeroWaste Index 241 8.8 Circular Economy 243 8.8.1 Material Flow Analysis 245 8.8.2 Practice Example 247 8.9 Extended Producer Responsibilities 252 References 254 9 Sustainable Energy 257 9.1 Introduction 257 9.2 Energy, Environment, Economy, and Society 258 9.2.1 Energy and the Economy 258 9.2.2 Energy and the Environment 260 9.3 Sustainable Energy 261 9.4 Pathways Forward 265 9.4.1 Deployment of Renewable Energy 265 9.4.2 Improvements to Fossil Fuel Based Power Generation 266 9.4.3 Plug in Electric Vehicles 269 9.4.4 Green Hydrogen Economy 271 9.4.5 Smart Grid 273 9.4.6 Development of Efficient Energy Storage Technologies 274 9.4.7 Energy Storage and the Californian “Duck Curve” 279 9.4.8 Sustainability in Small-Scale Power Generation 280 9.4.8.1 Types of Decentralised Electricity Generation System 281 9.4.9 Blockchain for Sustainable Energy Solutions 284 9.4.10 Waste Heat Recovery 285 9.4.11 Carbon Capture Technologies 286 9.4.11.1 Post Combustion Capture 286 9.4.11.2 Pre-combustion Carbon Capture 287 9.4.12 Demand-side Management 288 9.4.12.1 National Perspective 289 9.4.12.2 User Perspective 290 9.4.12.3 CO2 Mitigation per Unit of Incremental Cost 290 9.5 Practice Example 291 9.5.1 Step 1 291 9.5.2 Step 2 294 9.5.3 Step 3 294 9.5.4 Step 4 295 9.5.5 Step 5 296 9.5.6 Step 6 296 9.5.7 Step 7 297 9.6 Life Cycle Energy Assessment 297 9.7 Reference Energy System 298 9.8 Conclusions 301 References 301 Part IV Outcomes 307 10 Engineering for Sustainable Development 309 10.1 Introduction 309 10.2 Sustainable Production and Consumption 309 10.3 Factor X 311 10.4 Climate Change Challenges 314 10.5 Water Challenges 320 10.6 Energy Challenges 321 10.7 Circular Economy and Dematerialisation 322 10.8 Engineering Ethics 324 10.8.1 Engineers Australia’s Sustainability Policy – Practices 326 References 327 Index 331

Read more less

Book SynopsisBuilding Services Engineering: Smart and Sustainable Design for Health and Wellbeing covers the design practices of existing engineering building services and how these traditional methods integrate with newer, smarter developments. These new developments include areas such as smart ventilation, smart glazing systems, smart batteries, smart lighting, smart soundproofing, smart sensors and meters. Combined, these all amount to a healthier lifestyle for the people living within these indoor climates. With over one hundred fully worked examples and tutorial questions, Building Services Engineering: Smart and Sustainable Design for Health and Wellbeing encourages the reader to consider sustainable alternatives within their buildings in order to create a healthier environment for users.Table of ContentsPreface xiii Structure of the Book xv Notation xxi 1 Ambient Air1 1.1 Overview 1 1.2 Why Ambient Air Is Important? 1 1.3 Air Composition 2 1.4 Gas Mixtures 3 1.5 Air Thermodynamic and Transport Properties 7 1.6 Important Energy Concepts 12 1.7 Worked Examples 16 1.8 Tutorial Problems 21 2 The Thermodynamics of the Human Machine and Thermal Comfort 25 2.1 Overview 25 2.2 Thermal Comfort of Human Beings 26 2.3 Energy Balance of the Human Body 26 2.4 Metabolism (M) and Physical Work (W) 27 2.5 Optimum Comfort Temperature 31 2.6 Estimation of Thermal Comfort 31 2.7 Worked Examples 33 2.8 Tutorial Problems 41 3 Ventilation 45 3.1 Overview 45 3.2 Concentrations, Contaminants, and the Decay Equation 46 3.3 Natural Ventilation 48 3.4 Mechanical Ventilation 52 3.5 Fan Types and Selection 53 3.6 Duct Sizing and Fan Matching 56 3.7 Worked Examples 63 3.8 Tutorial Problems 73 4 Psychrometry and Air Conditioning 75 4.1 Overview 75 4.2 Psychrometric Properties 75 4.3 The Psychrometric Chart 78 4.4 Air-Conditioning Processes 80 4.5 Air-Conditioning Cycles 86 4.6 Worked Examples 91 4.7 Tutorial Problems 103 5 The Building Envelope 107 5.1 Overview 107 5.2 Variation in Meteorological Conditions 107 5.3 Heat Transfer 109 5.4 Solar Irradiation 113 5.5 Heat Losses/Gains Across the Envelope 118 5.6 Moisture and Air Transfer 125 5.7 Internal Heat Gains 128 5.8 Worked Examples 128 5.9 Tutorial Problems 139 6 Refrigeration and Heat Pumps 143 6.1 Overview 143 6.2 Choice of Refrigerants 144 6.3 Heat Pump, Refrigeration, and Vapour Compression Cycles 147 6.4 Absorption Refrigeration 155 6.5 Adsorption Refrigeration 159 6.6 Stirling Cycle Refrigeration 159 6.7 Reverse Brayton–Air Refrigeration Cycle 162 6.8 Steam Jet Refrigeration Cycle 163 6.9 Thermoelectric Refrigeration 165 6.10 Thermoacoustic Refrigeration 166 6.11 Worked Examples 167 6.12 Tutorial Problems 179 7 Acoustic Factors 185 7.1 Overview 185 7.2 The Human Ear 185 7.3 SoundWaves 187 7.4 Power, Intensity, and Pressure 190 7.5 Laws of Sound Combination 193 7.6 Sound Propagation 193 7.7 Sound Fields 199 7.8 Acoustic Pollution or Noise 201 7.9 Worked Examples 203 7.10 Tutorial Problems 208 8 Visual Factors 211 8.1 Overview 211 8.2 The Human Eye 211 8.3 Light Sources and Receivers 212 8.4 Laws of Illumination 215 8.5 Lamp Types 217 8.6 Luminaires and Directional Control 222 8.7 Worked Examples 226 8.8 Tutorial Problems 232 9 Cleaning the Air 235 9.1 Overview 235 9.2 Concentration and Exposure 236 9.3 Particulate Pollution 236 9.4 Principles of Particulate Collection 240 9.5 Control Technologies 242 9.6 Non-particulate Pollutants 257 9.7 Principles of Non-particulate Collection 259 9.8 Pressure Drop Considerations 260 9.9 Worked Examples 261 9.10 Tutorial Problems 268 10 Solar Energy Applications 271 10.1 Overview 271 10.2 Solar Thermal Collector Technologies 271 10.3 Solar Electricity 276 10.4 Ground-Based Energy Sources 279 10.5 Energy Storage 281 10.6 Daylighting 288 10.7 Worked Examples 289 10.8 Tutorial Problems 297 11 Measurements and Monitoring 301 11.1 Overview 301 11.2 Compositional Parameters 302 11.3 Physical Parameters 303 11.4 Visual and Aural Parameters 314 11.5 Utility Measurement and Metering 315 11.6 Worked Examples 321 11.7 Tutorial Problems 327 12 Drivers, Standards, and Methodologies 331 12.1 Overview 331 Learning Outcomes 331 12.2 Compliance Considerations 332 12.3 External Certification and Recognition 336 12.4 Operational Considerations 338 13 Emerging Technologies 343 13.1 Overview 343 13.2 Smart Ventilation 343 13.3 Smart Active Glazing 344 13.4 Cooling Technologies 345 13.5 Smart Tuneable Acoustic Insulation 350 13.6 Smart (Human Centric) Lighting Design 351 13.7 Active Botanical Air Filtration 351 13.8 Peak Lopping Thermal Mass 352 13.9 Smart Batteries 353 13.10 Smart Sensors and Meters 353 13.11 Smart Microgrids 355 13.12 Hydrogen 356 14 Closing Remarks 359 Appendix A The Psychrometric Chart 361 Appendix B Refrigerant Thermodynamic Properties 363 Bibliography 367 Index 369

Read more less

Book SynopsisEnergy Global energy demand has more than doubled since 1970. The use of energy is strongly related to almost every conceivable aspect of development: wealth, health, nutrition, water, infrastructure, education and even life expectancy itself are strongly and significantly related to the consumption of energy per capita. Many development indicators are strongly related to per-capita energy consumption. Fossil fuel is the most conventional source of energy but also increases greenhouse gas emissions. The economic development of many countries has come at the cost of the environment. However, it should not be presumed that a reconciliation of the two is not possible. The nexus concept is the interconnection between the resource energy, water, food, land, and climate. Such interconnections enable us to address trade-offs and seek synergies among them. Energy, water, food, land, and climate are essential resources of our natural environment and support our quality oTable of ContentsPreface or Foreword? 1. Energy crisis and climate change: global concerns and their solutionsSandeepa Singh 2. Advances in Alternative Sources of Energy - Opening new doors for Energy SustainabilityJyoti Tyagi 3. Recent advances in alternative sources of energyMaya Verma,a Ambikab and Pradeep Pratap Singhc* 4. Energy and Development in the 21st Century - A road towards a Sustainable Future: An Indian PerspectiveShikha Menani* and Kiran Yadav 5. Energy Development as a Driver of Economic Growth: Evidence from Developing Nations1Dr Md Rashid Farooqi2Dr Md Akhlaqur Rahman3Dr Md Faiz Ahmad4Supriya 6. Pathways of Energy Transition and its Impact on Economic Growth: A Case Study of BrazilPooja Sharma* 7. Renewable energy: sources, importance and prospects for sustainable futureSHACHI AGRAWAL1 AND RENU SONI*2 8. Clean Energy Sources for A Better and Sustainable Environment of Future GenerationsAPARNA NAUTIYAL1* AND AYYAGARI RAMLAL2 9. Sustainable energy policies of India to address air pollution and climate changePrem Lata Meena1*, Vinay2, Anirudh Sehrawat2 10. A Regime Complex and Technological Innovation in Energy System: A Brazilian ExperiencePooja Sharma* 11. Opportunities in the Living Lights: Special reference to Bioluminescent FungiPramod Kumar Mahish1*, Nagendra Kumar Chandrawanshi2*, Shriram Kunjam3 and S. K. Jadhav2 12. Production of Liquid Biofuels from Lignocellulosic BiomassManoj Kumar Singh1, Sumit Sahni2, Anita Narang3 13. Sustainable Solution for Future Energy Challenges through MicrobesSumit Sahni1*, Manoj Kumar Singh2, Anita Narang3 14. Fungal Microbial Fuel Cells, an opportunity for energy sources: Current Perspective and future challengesSudakshina Tiwari1, Deepali1, Anjali Kosre1, Pramod Kumar Mahish2, S.K. Jadhav1 and Nagendra Kumar Chandrawanshi1* 15. Current Perspective of Sustainable Utilization of Agro-Waste and Biotransformation of Energy in MushroomAnjali Kosre1*, Deepali1 , Pramod Kumar Mahish2 and Nagendra Kumar Chandrawanshi1 Index

Read more less

Book SynopsisMechanics of Hydraulic Fracturing Comprehensive single-volume reference work providing an overview of experimental results and predictive methods for hydraulic fracture growth in rocks Mechanics of Hydraulic Fracturing: Experiment, Model, and Monitoring provides a summary of the research in mechanics of hydraulic fractures during the past two decades, plus new research trends to look for in the future. The book covers the contributions from theory, modeling, and experimentation, including the application of models to reservoir stimulation, mining preconditioning, and the formation of geological structures. The four expert editors emphasize the variety of diverse methods and tools in hydraulic fracturing and help the reader understand hydraulic fracture mechanics in complex geological situations. To aid in reader comprehension, practical examples of new approaches and methods are presented throughout the book. Key topics covered in the book include: Prediction of fracture shapes, sizes, and distributions in sedimentary basins, plus their importance in petroleum industry Real-time monitoring methods, such as micro-seismicity and trace tracking How to uncover geometries of fractures like dikes and veins Fracture growth of individual foundations and its applications Researchers and professionals working in the field of fluid-driven fracture growth will find immense value in this comprehensive reference on hydraulic fracturing mechanics.Table of ContentsPart I. Experimental and Monitoring Observations 1. Hydraulic Fracture Geometry from Mineback Mapping 2. Measurements of the Evolution of the Fluid Lag in Laboratory Hydraulic Fracture Experiments in Rocks 3. Mapping Hydraulic Fracture Growth Using Tiltmeter Monitoring Technique 4. Experimental Observations of Hydraulic Fracturing 5. A Field Trial and Experimental Studies on scCO2 Fracturing Part II. Theoretical and Numerical Methods 6. An Unstructured Moving Element Mesh for Hydraulic Fracture Modelling 7. Study of Hydraulic Fracture Interference with a Lattice Model 8. The Tipping Point: How Tip Asymptotics Can Enhance Numerical Modeling of Hydraulic Fracture Evolution 9. Plasticity: A Mechanism for Hydraulic Fracture Height Containment 10. Turbulent Flow Effects in Hydraulic Fracture Propagation in Permeable Rock 11. Analysis of a Constant Height Hydraulic Fracture 12. Discrete Element Modelling of Hydraulic Fracturing Part III. Applications and Engineering Approaches 13. Interaction of a Hydraulic Fracture with Natural Fractures of Lesser Height and Weak Bedding Interfaces as a Possible Mechanism for Fracture Swarms 14. Hydraulic Fracturing Mechanisms Leading to Self-Organization within Dyke Swarms 15. Numerical Simulation of Thermal Fracturing During Heat Extraction from a Closed-Loop Circulation Enhanced Geothermal System 16. Multiple Hydraulic Fractures from a Highly Deviated Well: A XFEM Study 17. Hydraulic Fracturing-Induced Slip on a Permeable Fault

Read more less

Book SynopsisCOMPUTATIONAL FLUID DYNAMICS AND ENERGY MODELLING IN BUILDINGS A Comprehensive Overview of the Fundamentals of Heat and Mass Transport Simulation and Energy Performance in Buildings In the first part of Computational Fluid Dynamics and Energy Modelling in Buildings: Fundamentals and Applications, the author explains the fundamentals of fluid mechanics, thermodynamics, and heat transfer, with a specific focus on their application in buildings. This background knowledge sets the scene to further model heat and mass transport in buildings, with explanations of commonly applied simplifications and assumptions. In the second part, the author elaborates how the fundamentals explained in part 1 can be used to model energy flow in buildings, which is the basis of all commercial and educational building energy simulation tools. An innovative illustrative nodal network concept is introduced to help readers comprehend the basics of conseTable of ContentsChapter 1 An Overview of Heat and Mass Transport in Buildings Chapter 2 An Overview on Fundamentals of Fluid Mechanics in Buildings Chapter 3 Applications of Fluid Mechanics in Buildings Chapter 4 An Overview on Fundamentals of Thermodynamics in Buildings Chapter 5 Applications of Thermodynamics in Buildings Chapter 6 An Overview on Fundamentals of Heat Transfer in Buildings Chapter 7 Applications of Heat Transfer in Buildings Chapter 8 Fundamental of Energy Modeling in Buildings Chapter 9 Dynamic Energy Modeling in Buildings Chapter 10 Fundamental of Computational Fluid Dynamics – A Finite Volume Approach Chapter 11 Solvers and Solution Analysis Chapter 12 Application of CFD in Buildings and Built Environment

Read more less

Book SynopsisTHE CLIMATE CITY Provides professionals in finance, technology, and consulting with solutions for improving the quality of urban life under the changing climate The Climate City provides cutting-edge approaches for developing resilient solutions to combat the effects of climate change in cities throughout the world. Linking finance and technology to policy and innovation, this highly practical resource outlines a global framework for mitigating and adapting to climate change and for effectively planning and delivering a low-carbon future. This book addresses how cities can work effectively with each other to drive change, the importance of strong leadership and international cooperation, the role of innovative finance and technology to identify new economic opportunities, and more. Throughout the book, the authors address future trends such as the changing streetscape, connected infrastructure and eMobility, and autonomous vehicles, drones, and other emerging technologies. Designed toTable of ContentsAcknowledgements ix Authors Biographies x Introduction 1 Martin Powell 1 The Ambitious City – Introduction 21 1 The Ambitious City 22 Peter Boyd 2 The Civilized City – Introduction 38 2 The Civilized City 40 Martin Powell 3 The Emerging City – Introduction 57 3 The Emerging City 59 Austin Williams 4 The Sustainable City – Introduction 72 4 The Sustainable City 75 Patricia Holly Purcell 5 The Vocal City – Introduction 92 5 The Vocal City 94 Amanda Eichel and Kerem Yilmaz 6 The Governed City – Introduction 106 6 The Governed City 108 Bruce Katz and Luise Noring Copyrighted Material 7 The Decoupled City – Introduction 120 7 The Decoupled City 123 Leah Lazer and Nick Godfrey 8 The Responsible City – Introduction 139 8 The Responsible City 140 Justin Keeble and Molly Blatchly-Lewis 9 The Energized City – Introduction 155 9 The Energized City 157 Pete Daw 10 The Agile City (Part I) – Introduction 170 10 The Agile City (Part I) 172 Julia Thayne DeMordaunt 11 The Agile City (Part II) – Introduction 186 11 The Agile City (Part II) 188 Jonathan Laski 12 The Habitable City (Part I) – Introduction 197 12 The Habitable City (Part I) 201 Olivia Nielsen 13 The Habitable City (Part II) – Introduction 217 13 The Habitable City (Part II) 219 Nicky Gavron and Alex Denvir 14 The Resourceful City – Introduction 235 14 The Resourceful City 238 Conor Riffle 15 The Zero Waste City – Introduction 251 15 The Zero Waste City 253 Terry Tamminen and Peter Lobin 16 The Resilient City – Introduction 267 16 The Resilient City 270 Sarah Wray and Richard Forster 17 The Fragile City – Introduction 279 17 The Fragile City 282 John de Boer 18 The Data City – Introduction 289 18 The Data City 292 Seth Schultz and Eric Ast 19 The Measured City – Introduction 303 19 The Measured City 305 Patricia McCarney 20 The Smart City – Introduction 320 20 The Smart City 322 Noorie Rajvanshi 21 The Just City – Introduction 335 21 The Just City (Part I) 339 Hayley Moller 21 The Just City (Part II) 350 Jane Burston and Matt Whitney 21 The Just City (Part III) 357 Jenny Bates 22 The Invested City – Introduction 363 22 The Invested City 365 Colin le Duc 23 The Financed City – Introduction 376 23 The Financed City 378 James Close 24 The Adapted City – Introduction 391 24 The Adapted City 393 Adam Freed 25 The Open City – Introduction 406 25 The Open City 409 Peter Bishop 26 The Natural City – Introduction 421 26 The Natural City 423 Carlo Laurenzi 27 The Climate-Resilient City – Introduction 444 27 The Climate-Resilient City 446 Mauricio Rodas 28 The Green City – Introduction 458 28 The Green City 460 Sophie Hæstorp Andersen 29 The Powerful City – Introduction 470 29 The Powerful City 472 Mark Watts and Sarah Lewis 30 Epilogue 487 Martin Powell Index 495

Read more less

Book SynopsisPump Wisdom Explore key facets of centrifugal pump ownership, installation, operation, and troubleshooting The Second Edition of Pump Wisdom: Essential Centrifugal Pump Knowledge for Operators and Specialists delivers a concise explanation of how pumps function, the design specifications that must be considered before purchasing a pump, and current best practices in lubrication and mechanical seals. Readers will encounter new startup and surveillance tips for pump operators, as well as repair versus replacement or upgrade considerations for maintenance decision makers, new condition monitoring guidance for centrifugal pumps, and expanded coverage of operator best practices. This latest edition of Pump Wisdom: Essential Centrifugal Pump Knowledge for Operators and Specialists includes expanded coverage of areas critical to achieving best-in-class pump reliability, including commonly encountered issues and easy-to-follow instructions for getting centrifugal pumps to operate safely and reliably. This book also provides: Comprehensible and accessible explanations of pump hydraulicsSimple explorations of the mechanical aspects of pumps with coverage of bearings, seals, impeller trimming, lubricant application, and moreSafety tips and instructions for centrifugal pumps Perfect for chemical, petroleum, and mechanical engineers, Pump Wisdom: Essential Centrifugal Pump Knowledge for Operators and Specialists is also an ideal resource for operators, managers, purchasing agents, machinists, reliability technicians, and maintenance workers in water and wastewater plants.Table of ContentsPreface ix 1. Principles of Centrifugal Process Pumps 1 2. Pump Selection and Industry Standards 15 3. Foundations and Baseplates 23 4. Piping, Stationary Seals, and Gasketing 33 5. Rolling Element Bearings 51 6. Lubricant Application and Cooling Considerations 71 7. Lubricant Types and Key Properties 85 8. Bearing Housing Protection and Cost Justification 93 9. Mechanical Sealing Options for Long Life 101 10. Pump Operation 117 11. Impeller Modifications and Pump Maintenance 133 12. Lubrication Management 145 13. Pump Condition Monitoring: Pump Vibration, Rotor Balance, and Effect on Bearing Life 153 14. Drivers, Couplings, and Alignment 165 15. Fits, Dimensions, and Related Misunderstandings 175 16. Using Failure Statistics and Root Cause Analysis Findings to Guide Reliability Improvement Efforts 191 17. Repair, Replace, or Modify? 213 18. Centrifugal Pump Monitoring Strategies 231 19. Final Thoughts 249 Index 251

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book focuses on the chemistry and applications of flame retardants for polymers and other materials. It starts with a description and types of flame retardants, as well as their properties and chemical structures, to include chlorine- and bromine-containing flame retardants, phosphorus-based flame retardants, nitrogen-based flame retardants, and silicones. Inorganic materials that serve as flame retardants, such as boron-based additives, graphenes, and others are discussed in detail. In addition, the following subjects are discussed in detail: Flame retardant polymers The mechanisms of flame retardants, such as flame cooling, synergetic effects, degradation of flame retardants, and others Other flame retardant compositions, such as dripping inhibitors and smoke suppressants Testing methods for flame retardants, international standards, human health hazards, such as smoke toxicity and problems with wastes Synthesis and fabrTable of ContentsPreface xiii 1 Types of Flame Retardants 1 1.1 History of Organic Flame Retardants 1 1.2 Commercially Available Flame Retardants 3 1.3 Chlorine-Containing Materials 7 1.3.1 HET Acid 7 1.3.2 Dechlorane Plus 7 1.3.3 Chlordene 10 1.3.4 Tris(1,3-dichloroisopropyl) phosphate 10 1.3.5 Tris(2-chloroethyl) phosphate 11 1.4 Bromine-Containing Materials 11 1.4.1 Brominated Diphenyl Ethers 11 1.4.2 1,2-Bis(2,4,6-tribromophenoxy)ethane 13 1.4.3 Trioxohexahydrotriazine Compound 15 1.4.4 2,4,6-Tris(2,4,6-tribromophenoxy)-1,3,5-triazine 15 1.4.5 Pentabromodiphenyl ether 17 1.5 Phosphorus Flame Retardants 17 1.5.1 DOPO 18 1.5.2 Resorcinol bis(diphenyl phosphate) 19 1.5.3 Resorcinol bis(di-2,6-xylyl phosphate) 19 1.5.4 Phosphor Amides 20 1.5.5 Polyphosphate Ester Morpholides 20 1.5.6 Cyclic Phosphazenes 22 1.6 Boron Additives 23 1.6.1 Zinc Borate 23 1.6.2 Boron Compounds and Magnesium Hydroxide 28 1.6.3 Boron Compounds and Aluminum Trihydroxide 28 1.6.4 Boron/Phosphorus Polymer 29 1.6.5 Boron Phosphate 31 1.6.6 Boron-Containing Novolac Resins 32 1.6.7 Spirocyclic Boron Compounds 33 1.6.8 Boron Triazine 34 1.6.9 Boron Nitride 37 1.6.10 Azo-Boron Compounds 43 1.6.11 Isosorbide-Derived Boron and Phosphorus Materials 46 1.6.12 Boron Cyclophosphazene Derivatives 46 1.6.13 Cardanol DOPO and Boron-Doped Graphene 49 1.6.14 Boron Crosslinked Cellulose Nanofibrils 49 1.7 Silicones 51 1.7.1 Hydroxy Silicone Oil 51 1.7.2 Hydrogen-Containing Silicone Oil 54 1.7.3 Red Phosphorus and Alumina Trihydrate 55 1.7.4 Aluminum Hypophosphite and Expandable Graphite 55 1.7.5 Phosphaphenanthrene Compound 56 1.7.6 Phosphorus-Silicone-Nitrogen Ternary Flame Retardant 58 1.7.7 Calcium and Aluminium-Based Fillers 59 1.7.8 Macromolecular Charring Agent 60 1.7.9 Intumescent Flame Retardants 61 1.7.10 Chitosan-Based Nanocoatings 67 1.7.11 Lignin-Based Silicone 67 1.7.12 Silicone-Based Adhesive 68 1.7.13 Nanofillers 69 1.8 Molybdenum Compounds 69 1.9 Graphenes 70 1.9.1 Synergist for Intumescent Flame Retardants 70 1.9.2 Electrochemical Preparation 73 1.9.3 Phosphaphenanthrene Graphene Hybrid Flame Retardant 75 1.9.4 Phosphaphenanthrene Graphene Copolymer 75 1.9.5 Bio-Based Polyphosphonate and Modified Graphene Oxide 77 1.9.6 Black Phosphorene Graphene Composite 78 1.9.7 Waste Deoxyribonucleic Acid 78 1.9.8 Poly(ionic liquid) and Graphene 79 1.9.9 Copper Decorated Graphene 80 1.9.10 Lignin-Modified Carbon Nanotube Graphene 81 1.9.11 κ-Carrageenan Flame Retardant Microspheres 82 1.9.12 Phenethyl-Bridged DOPO and Graphene Nanosheets 83 1.9.13 Graphene Nanoplatelets 83 1.9.14 Aerogels 87 1.9.15 Poly(etherimide) Membranes 89 1.9.16 Chitosan-Graphene Coatings 89 1.9.17 Polymeric Flame Retardant Functionalized Graphene 90 1.9.18 Graphene Oxide Compositions 90 1.10 Flame Retardant Fillers 104 1.10.1 Mineral Fillers 104 1.10.2 Melamine Phosphate Compounds 104 1.11 Admixed Additives 105 1.11.1 Phosphorus-Based Flame Retardant Fillers 108 1.11.2 Thermal Conductive Fillers 109 1.11.3 Organo-Modified Bentonites 110 1.11.4 Nanofillers 110 1.12 Bound Additives 111 1.12.1 Vinyl Ester Resin Monomer 112 1.12.2 Flame Retardant and Ester Curing Agents 112 1.12.3 DOPO Dicyandiamide 114 1.12.4 Mixed Flame Retardants 114 References 118 2 Mechanisms of Flame Retardants 131 2.1 Flame Cooling of Halogens 131 2.1.1 Antimony Trioxide Synergism 131 2.2 Halogen-Free Flame Retardants 132 2.2.1 Poly(propylene)Wood Plastic Composites 132 2.2.2 Diphenolic Acid-Based Biphosphate 133 2.2.3 Degradation of Triphenyl Phosphate 135 2.2.4 Phosphite-Silica Synergism 136 2.3 Benzoxazine Resin with Triazine Structure 137 2.3.1 Flame Retardant Carrageenan Fiber 138 2.3.2 Modified Silica Sol 140 2.3.3 DOPO-Based Triazole 140 2.3.4 DOPO-Based Tetrazole 143 2.3.5 Phosphor Nitrogen-Containing Compound 144 2.3.6 Polyheptazine/PA6 Nanocomposites 144 References 145 3 Dripping Inhibitors 147 3.1 Measurement Methods 147 3.2 Materials 149 3.2.1 PTFE Powder 149 3.2.2 Support for Polyester 150 3.2.3 Support for Poly(lactic acid) 159 3.2.4 Support for Poly(urethane) Foams 160 References 161 4 Smoke Suppressants 165 4.1 Materials 166 4.1.1 Zinc Borate and Aluminum Trihydrate 166 4.1.2 Zinc Hydroxystannate 168 4.1.3 Low-Melting Sulfate Glasses 170 4.1.4 Iron Oxide 170 4.1.5 Zinc Oxide 172 4.1.6 Ferrites 173 4.1.7 Bromide-Intercalated Hydrotalcite 176 4.1.8 Borate-Intercalated Layered Double Hydroxide 176 4.1.9 Hot Melt Adhesive Composition 177 4.1.10 Functionalized Graphene Oxide 178 4.1.11 Expandable Graphene 179 4.1.12 Modified Ammonium Poly(phosphate) for Thermoplastic PU 180 4.1.13 Glass Microspheres with Ammonium Molybdophosphate for Thermoplastic PU 180 4.1.14 Phosphorus-Containing Polyol for PU Foam 181 4.1.15 Porous Silicon Dioxide PU Foams 183 4.1.16 Sepiolite-Based Nanocoating for PU Foam 184 4.1.17 Abandoned Molecular Sieve for PU 184 4.1.18 Melamine Octamolybdate 185 4.1.19 Cardanol-Derived Zirconium Phosphate 185 4.1.20 Montmorillonite Nanocomposites 187 4.1.21 Waste Printed Circuit Boards 188 4.2 Special Applications 189 4.2.1 Diesel Fuel Filters 189 4.2.2 Electrical Cables 190 References 192 5 Standards and Testing 195 5.1 Abbreviation Standard for Chemicals 195 5.2 Test Procedures 197 5.2.1 Bromine-Based Flame Retardant Determination 197 5.3 Hazard Assessment 200 5.3.1 Human Health Hazards 200 5.3.2 Tetrabromobisphenol A 206 5.3.3 Phosphorus Flame Retardants 207 5.4 Standards 209 5.4.1 Test for Flammability 209 5.4.2 Ignition Characteristics of Plastics 209 5.4.3 Heat Release Rate 212 5.4.4 Smoke Toxicity 213 5.4.5 Smoke Density 213 5.4.6 Electrical or Optical Fiber Cables 214 5.4.7 Textiles 214 5.5 Life Cycle Sustainability of Flame Retardants 215 5.5.1 Life Cycle Method 215 5.5.2 Electronic Applications 221 5.5.3 Textile Products 222 5.5.4 Phenolic Resin with Brominated Flame Retardant 222 References 223 6 Synthesis and Fabrication Methods 229 6.1 3D Printing 229 6.2 Mechanochemical Phosphorylation 230 6.3 Coating Methods 231 6.3.1 Reactive Coating 231 6.3.2 Bulk Addition 231 6.4 Recycling 232 6.4.1 Brominated Flame Retardants 232 6.4.2 Enzymatic Recycling 235 6.4.3 Waste Melamine Formaldehyde Foam 236 References 236 7 Examples of Polymers 239 7.1 Poly(amides) 239 7.2 Nylons 240 7.2.1 Halogen-Containing Products 241 7.3 Poly(phenylene ether) Resins 245 7.4 Brominated Poly(phenylene ether) 246 7.5 Unsaturated Poly(ester)s 247 7.6 Epoxide Resins 248 7.7 Poly(carbonate) 249 7.8 Halogen-Free Flame Retardant Polymers 250 7.8.1 Organophosphorus Monomers 251 7.8.2 Epoxy Compounds 251 7.8.3 Poly(vinyl alcohol) 253 7.8.4 Poly(4-hydroxystyrene) 254 7.8.5 Poly(phosphate ester)s 256 7.9 Silicones 257 7.9.1 Degradation Mechanism 257 7.9.2 Halogen-Free Flame Retardant Silicone Rubber 258 7.9.3 Silicone Thermoplastic Elastomer 259 7.10 Foams 260 7.10.1 Poly(styrene) Foams 260 7.10.2 Poly(urethane) Foams 264 7.11 Nanocomposites 287 7.11.1 Dispersion of Nanofillers 287 7.11.2 Clay Nanocomposites 288 7.11.3 Epoxy Nanocomposites 288 7.11.4 Poly(styrene) Nanocomposites 289 7.11.5 Poly(lactic acid)-Containing Nanomaterials 290 7.12 Cellulosic Materials 292 7.12.1 Silica Nanoparticles 292 7.12.2 Phytic Acid 293 7.12.3 Bio-Based Foams 294 References 295 8 Special Uses 303 8.1 Textiles 303 8.1.1 Environmental Issues of the End-of-Life Phase 303 8.1.2 Flame Retardant Poly(amide) 6 305 8.1.3 Flame Retardant Textile Finishes 306 8.1.4 Condensed Tannin 307 8.1.5 Reactive Phosphorus-Containing Flame Retardants 308 8.1.6 Textile Coatings 310 8.1.7 Flame Retardant Back Coating Layer for Historic Textile Fabrics 310 8.2 Flame RetardantWool 311 8.2.1 Flame Retardant Monomer 311 8.2.2 Phytic Acid Compositions 313 8.2.3 Sulfamic Acid 315 8.3 Compositions for Asphalt and Bitumen 316 8.3.1 Comprehensive Testing Program 316 8.3.2 Thermal Decomposition Rates 318 8.3.3 Mixed Flame Retardants 320 8.3.4 Nanoclays 321 8.3.5 Effects of Aging 322 8.3.6 Non-Flammable Grades of Asphalts 322 8.3.7 Composite Flame Retardant Asphalt 324 8.3.8 Layered Double Hydroxides 324 8.3.9 Warm-Mixed Flame Retardant Modified Asphalt Binder 325 8.3.10 Environmentally Friendly Flame Retardant 325 8.4 Batteries 327 8.4.1 Lithium-Ion Batteries 327 8.4.2 Lithium-Sulfur Batteries 336 8.4.3 Sodium-Ion Batteries 338 References 339 Index 345 Acronyms 345 Chemicals 350 General Index 358

Read more less

Book SynopsisNew perspectives on how to successfully drive changes in companies' process safety management systems Simply learning from process safety incidents has proven to be insufficient to drive performance improvements. To truly change, organizations must seek out & embed learnings in their programs & systems. This book picks up from previous CCPS books, Incidents That Define Process Safety and Investigating Process Safety Incidents. This important book: Offers guidelines for improving process safety performance by embedding the lessons learned from publicly available investigationsRecommends a continuous improvement learning model focused on organizational learningProvides examples for using the model's techniques to drive continuous improvements Contains an index of more than 400 investigated incidents and introduces the concept of Drilldown to help find lessons that might not have been mentioned before. Written for safety professionals and process safety consultants, Driving Continuous Process Safety Improvement from Investigated Incidents is a hands-on guide for adopting a model for successfully driving the learnings from process safety incident investigations.Table of ContentsAcronyms and Abbreviations xv Acknowledgements xvii Glossary xix Foreword xxi Executive Summary xxiii Applicability of this Book xxvii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 The Focus of this Book 2 1.2 Why Should We Learn from Incidents? 4 1.2.1 The Theory of Root Cause Correction 6 1.2.2 Acting on Learning from High Potential Near-misses 7 1.2.3 Learning from Other Companies’ (External) Incidents 8 1.2.4 Societal Expectations and the Business Case 8 1.3 References 10 2 Learning Opportunities 13 2.1 Think Broadly 13 2.1.1 Look Beyond the Specific Circumstances 13 2.1.2 Learn from Other Industries 15 2.1.3 Learn from Regulatory Standards and Beyond 17 2.2 Resources for Learning 18 2.2.1 Process Safety Boards 18 2.2.2 Databases 18 2.2.3 Publications 19 2.2.4 Events and Proceedings 21 2.2.5 Other Resources 22 2.3 References 22 3 Obstacles to Learning 27 3.1 The Impact of Individuals 28 3.2 The Impact of Company Culture 31 3.3 Obstacles Common to Individuals and Companies 34 3.4 Consequences of Not Learning from Incidents 35 3.5 References 36 4 Examples of Failure to Learn 39 4.1 Process Safety Culture 40 4.2 Facility Siting 42 4.3 Maintenance of Barriers/Barrier Integrity 44 4.4 Chemical Reactivity Hazards 48 4.5 Asphyxiation Hazards in Confined Spaces 49 4.6 Hot Work Hazards 50 4.7 References 51 5 Learning Models 55 5.1 Learning Model Requirements 55 5.2 Learning Models for Individuals 57 5.2.1 Multiple Intelligences and Learning Styles Model 57 5.2.2 Career Architect Model 58 5.2.3 Dynamic Learning 59 5.2.4 Ancient Sanskrit 59 5.2.5 Guiding Principles for Learning 60 5.3 Corporate Change Models 61 5.3.1 Lewin 61 5.3.2 McKinzie 7-S® 62 5.3.3 Kotter 63 5.3.4 ADKAR® 63 5.3.5 IOGP 64 5.4 The Recalling Experiences and Applied Learning (REAL) Model 65 5.5 References 67 6 Implementing the REAL Model 69 6.1 Focus 71 6.1.1 Identify High Potential Impact Learning Opportunities 71 6.1.2 76 6.2 Seek Learnings 79 6.3 Understand 80 6.4 Drilldown 80 6.5 Internalize 82 6.6 Prepare 83 6.7 Implement 85 6.8 Embed and Refresh 86 6.9 References 86 7 Keep Learnings Fresh 89 7.1 Musical Intelligence 91 7.2 Visual-Spatial Intelligence 93 7.3 Verbal-Linguistic Intelligence 95 7.4 Logical-Mathematical Intelligence 97 7.5 Kinesthetic Intelligence 98 7.6 Interpersonal Intelligence 99 7.7 Intrapersonal Intelligence 100 7.8 Naturalistic Intelligence 101 7.9 Summary 102 7.10 References 102 8 Landmark Incidents that Everyone Should Learn From 105 8.1 Flixborough, North Lincolnshire, UK, 1974 106 8.2 Bhopal, Madhya Pradesh, India, 1984 108 8.3 Piper Alpha, North Sea off Aberdeen, Scotland, 1988 110 8.4 Texas City, TX, USA, 2005 111 8.5 Buncefield, Hertfordshire, UK, 2005 113 8.6 West, TX, USA, 2013 113 8.7 NASA Space Shuttles Challenger, 1986, and Columbia, 2003 115 8.8 Fukushima Daiichi, Japan, 2011 117 8.9 Summary 118 8.10 References 118 9 REAL Model Scenario: Chemical Reactivity Hazards 121 9.1 Focus 121 9.2 Seek Learnings 122 9.3 Understand 124 9.4 Drilldown 125 9.5 Internalize 126 9.6 Prepare 127 9.7 Implement 128 9.8 Embed and Refresh 129 9.9 References 130 10 REAL Model Scenario: Leaking Hoses and Unexpected Impacts of Change 131 10.1 Focus 132 10.2 Seek Learnings 132 10.3 Understand 135 10.4 Drilldown 135 10.5 Internalize 137 10.6 Prepare 138 10.7 Implement 139 10.8 Embed and Refresh 140 10.9 References 141 11 REAL Model Scenario: Culture Regression 143 11.1 Focus 144 11.2 Seek Learnings 145 11.3 Understand 148 11.4 Drilldown 149 11.5 Internalize 149 11.6 Prepare 150 11.7 Implement 152 11.8 Embed and Refresh 153 11.9 References 154 12 REAL Model Scenario: Overfilling 155 12.1 Focus 156 12.2 Seek Learnings 157 12.3 Understand 159 12.4 Drilldown 160 12.5 Internalize 161 12.6 Prepare 164 12.7 Implement 166 12.8 Embed and Refresh 167 12.9 References 167 13 REAL Model Scenario: Internalizing a High-Profile Incident 169 13.1 Focus 169 13.2 Seek Learnings 170 13.3 Understand 173 13.4 Drilldown 174 13.5 Internalize 175 13.6 Prepare 175 13.7 Implement 176 13.8 Embed and Refresh 176 13.9 References 178 14 REAL Model Scenario: Population Encroachment 179 14.1 Focus 180 14.2 Seek Learnings 181 14.3 Understand 184 14.4 Drilldown 184 14.5 Internalize 185 14.6 Prepare 186 14.7 Implement 187 14.8 Embed and Refresh 188 14.9 References 189 15 Conclusion 191 15.1 References 194 Appendix: Index of Publicly Evaluated Incidents 195 A.1 Introduction 195 A.2 How to Use this Index 196 A.3 Index of Publicly Evaluated Incidents 197 A.4 Report References 211 A.5 References 236 Index 239

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of ContentsPreface xvii 1 Unmanned Aerial Vehicle (UAV): A Comprehensive Survey 1Rohit Chaurasia and Vandana Mohindru 1.1 Introduction 2 1.2 Related Work 2 1.3 UAV Technology 3 1.3.1 UAV Platforms 3 1.3.1.1 Fixed-Wing Drones 3 1.3.1.2 Multi-Rotor Drones 4 1.3.1.3 Single-Rotor Drones 5 1.3.1.4 Fixed-Wing Hybrid VTOL 6 1.3.2 Categories of the Military Drones 6 1.3.3 How Drones Work 8 1.3.3.1 Firmware—Platform Construction and Design 9 1.3.4 Comparison of Various Technologies 10 1.3.4.1 Drone Types & Sizes 10 1.3.4.2 Radar Positioning and Return to Home 10 1.3.4.3 GNSS on Ground Control Station 11 1.3.4.4 Collision Avoidance Technology and Obstacle Detection 11 1.3.4.5 Gyroscopic Stabilization, Flight Controllers and IMU 12 1.3.4.6 UAV Drone Propulsion System 12 1.3.4.7 Flight Parameters Through Telemetry 13 1.3.4.8 Drone Security & Hacking 13 1.3.4.9 3D Maps and Models With Drone Sensors 13 1.3.5 UAV Communication Network 15 1.3.5.1 Classification on the Basis of Spectrum Perspective 15 1.3.5.2 Various Types of Radio communication Links 16 1.3.5.3 VLOS (Visual Line-of-Sight) and BLOS (Beyond Line-of-Sight) Communication in Unmanned Aircraft System 18 1.3.5.4 Frequency Bands for the Operation of UAS 19 1.3.5.5 Cellular Technology for UAS Operation 19 1.4 Application of UAV 21 1.4.1 In Military 21 1.4.2 In Geomorphological Mapping and Other Similar Sectors 22 1.4.3 In Agriculture 22 1.5 UAV Challenges 23 1.6 Conclusion and Future Scope 24 References 24 2 Unmanned Aerial Vehicles: State-of-the-Art, Challenges and Future Scope 29Jolly Parikh and Anuradha Basu 2.1 Introduction 30 2.2 Technical Challenges 30 2.2.1 Variations in Channel Characteristics 32 2.2.2 UAV-Assisted Cellular Network Planning and Provisioning 33 2.2.3 Millimeter Wave Cellular Connected UAVs 34 2.2.4 Deployment of UAV 35 2.2.5 Trajectory Optimization 36 2.2.6 On-Board Energy 37 2.3 Conclusion 37 References 37 3 Battery and Energy Management in UAV-Based Networks 43Santosh Kumar, Amol Vasudeva and Manu Sood 3.1 Introduction 43 3.2 The Need for Energy Management in UAV-Based Communication Networks 45 3.2.1 Unpredictable Trajectories of UAVs in Cellular UAV Networks 46 3.2.2 Non-Homogeneous Power Consumption 47 3.2.3 High Bandwidth Requirement/Low Spectrum Availability/Spectrum Scarcity 47 3.2.4 Short-Range Line-of-Sight Communication 48 3.2.5 Time Constraint (Time-Limited Spectrum Access) 48 3.2.6 Energy Constraint 49 3.2.7 The Joint Design for the Sensor Nodes’ Wake-Up Schedule and the UAV’s Trajectory (Data Collection) 49 3.3 Efficient Battery and Energy Management Proposed Techniques in Literature 50 3.3.1 Cognitive Radio (CR)-Based UAV Communication to Solve Spectrum Congestion 51 3.3.2 Compressed Sensing 52 3.3.3 Power Allocation and Position Optimization 53 3.3.4 Non-Orthogonal Multiple Access (NOMA) 53 3.3.5 Wireless Charging/Power Transfer (WPT) 54 3.3.6 UAV Trajectory Design Using a Reinforcement Learning Framework in a Decentralized Manner 55 3.3.7 Efficient Deployment and Movement of UAVs 55 3.3.8 3D Position Optimization Mixed With Resource Allocation to Overcome Spectrum Scarcity and Limited Energy Constraint 56 3.3.9 UAV-Enabled WSN: Energy-Efficient Data Collection 57 3.3.10 Trust Management 57 3.3.11 Self-Organization-Based Clustering 58 3.3.12 Bandwidth/Spectrum-Sharing Between UAVs 59 3.3.13 Using Millimeter Wave With SWIPT 59 3.3.14 Energy Harvesting 60 3.4 Conclusion 61 References 67 4 Energy Efficient Communication Methods for Unmanned Ariel Vehicles (UAVs): Last Five Years’ Study 73Nagesh Kumar 4.1 Introduction 73 4.1.1 Introduction to UAV 74 4.1.2 Communication in UAV 75 4.2 Literature Survey Process 77 4.2.1 Research Questions 77 4.2.2 Information Source 77 4.3 Routing in UAV 78 4.3.1 Communication Methods in UAV 78 4.3.1.1 Single-Hop Communication 79 4.3.1.2 Multi-Hop Communication 80 4.4 Challenges and Issues 82 4.4.1 Energy Consumption 82 4.4.2 Mobility of Devices 82 4.4.3 Density of UAVs 82 4.4.4 Changes in Topology 85 4.4.5 Propagation Models 85 4.4.6 Security in Routing 85 4.5 Conclusion 85 References 86 5 A Review on Challenges and Threats to Unmanned Aerial Vehicles (UAVs) 89Shaik Johny Basha and Jagan Mohan Reddy Danda 5.1 Introduction 89 5.2 Applications of UAVs and Their Market Opportunity 90 5.2.1 Applications 90 5.2.2 Market Opportunity 92 5.3 Attacks and Solutions to Unmanned Aerial Vehicles (UAVs) 92 5.3.1 Confidentiality Attacks 93 5.3.2 Integrity Attacks 95 5.3.3 Availability Attacks 96 5.3.4 Authenticity Attacks 97 5.4 Research Challenges 99 5.4.1 Security Concerns 99 5.4.2 Safety Concerns 99 5.4.3 Privacy Concerns 100 5.4.4 Scalability Issues 100 5.4.5 Limited Resources 100 5.5 Conclusion 101 References 101 6 Internet of Things and UAV: An Interoperability Perspective 105Bharti Rana and Yashwant Singh 6.1 Introduction 106 6.2 Background 108 6.2.1 Issues, Controversies, and Problems 109 6.3 Internet of Things (IoT) and UAV 110 6.4 Applications of UAV-Enabled IoT 113 6.5 Research Issues in UAV-Enabled IoT 114 6.6 High-Level UAV-Based IoT Architecture 117 6.6.1 UAV Overview 117 6.6.2 Enabling IoT Scalability 119 6.6.3 Enabling IoT Intelligence 120 6.6.4 Enabling Diverse IoT Applications 121 6.7 Interoperability Issues in UAV-Based IoT 121 6.8 Conclusion 123 References 124 7 Practices of Unmanned Aerial Vehicle (UAV) for Security Intelligence 129Swarnjeet Kaur, Kulwant Singh and Amanpreet Singh 7.1 Introduction 130 7.2 Military 132 7.3 Attack 133 7.4 Journalism 134 7.5 Search and Rescue 136 7.6 Disaster Relief 138 7.7 Conclusion 139 References 139 8 Blockchain-Based Solutions for Various Security Issues in UAV-Enabled IoT 143Madhuri S. Wakode and Rajesh B. Ingle 8.1 Introduction 144 8.1.1 Organization of the Work 145 8.2 Introduction to UAV and IoT 145 8.2.1 UAV 145 8.2.2 IoT 146 8.2.3 UAV-Enabled IoT 147 8.2.4 Blockchain 150 8.3 Security and Privacy Issues in UAV-Enabled IoT 151 8.4 Blockchain-Based Solutions to Various Security Issues 153 8.5 Research Directions 154 8.6 Conclusion 154 8.7 Future Work 155 References 155 9 Efficient Energy Management Systems in UAV-Based IoT Networks 159V. Mounika Reddy, Neelima K. and G. Naresh 9.1 Introduction 160 9.2 Energy Harvesting Methods 161 9.2.1 Basic Energy Harvesting Mechanisms 162 9.2.2 Markov Decision Process-Based Energy Harvesting Mechanisms 163 9.2.3 mm Wave Energy Harvesting Mechanism 164 9.2.4 Full Duplex Wireless Energy Harvesting Mechanism 165 9.3 Energy Recharge Methods 165 9.4 Efficient Energy Utilization Methods 166 9.4.1 GLRM Method 166 9.4.2 DRL Mechanism 167 9.4.3 Onboard Double Q-Learning Mechanism 168 9.4.4 Collision-Free Scheduling Mechanism 168 9.5 Conclusion 170 References 170 10 A Survey on IoE-Enabled Unmanned Aerial Vehicles 173K. Siddharthraju, R. Dhivyadevi, M. Supriya, B. Jaishankar and Shanmugaraja T. 10.1 Introduction 174 10.2 Overview of Internet of Everything 176 10.2.1 Emergence of IoE 176 10.2.2 Expectation of IoE 177 10.2.2.1 Scalability 177 10.2.2.2 Intelligence 178 10.2.2.3 Diversity 178 10.2.3 Possible Technologies 179 10.2.3.1 Enabling Scalability 179 10.2.3.2 Enabling Intelligence 180 10.2.3.3 Enabling Diversity 180 10.2.4 Challenges of IoE 181 10.2.4.1 Coverage Constraint 181 10.2.4.2 Battery Constraint 181 10.2.4.3 Computing Constraint 181 10.2.4.4 Security Constraint 182 10.3 Overview of Unmanned Aerial Vehicle (UAV) 182 10.3.1 Unmanned Aircraft System (UAS) 183 10.3.2 UAV Communication Networks 183 10.3.2.1 Ad Hoc Multi-UAV Networks 183 10.3.2.2 UAV-Aided Communication Networks 184 10.4 UAV and IoE Integration 184 10.4.1 Possibilities to Carry UAVs 184 10.4.1.1 Widespread Connectivity 185 10.4.1.2 Environmentally Aware 185 10.4.1.3 Peer-Maintenance of Communications 185 10.4.1.4 Detector Control and Reusing 185 10.4.2 UAV-Enabled IoE 186 10.4.3 Vehicle Detection Enabled IoE Optimization 186 10.4.3.1 Weak-Connected Locations 186 10.4.3.2 Regions with Low Network Support 186 10.5 Open Research Issues 187 10.6 Discussion 187 10.6.1 Resource Allocation 187 10.6.2 Universal Standard Design 188 10.6.3 Security Mechanism 188 10.7 Conclusion 189 References 189 11 Role of AI and Big Data Analytics in UAV-Enabled IoT Applications for Smart Cities 193Madhuri S. Wakode 11.1 Introduction 194 11.1.1 Related Work 195 11.1.2 Contributions 195 11.1.3 Organization of the Work 195 11.2 Overview of UAV-Enabled IoT Systems 196 11.2.1 UAV-Enabled IoT Systems for Smart Cities 197 11.3 Overview of Big Data Analytics 197 11.4 Big Data Analytics Requirements in UAV-Enabled IoT Systems 198 11.4.1 Big Data Analytics in UAV-Enabled IoT Applications 199 11.4.2 Big Data Analytics for Governance of UAV-Enabled IoT Systems 201 11.5 Challenges 202 11.6 Conclusion 202 11.7 Future Work 203 References 203 12 Design and Development of Modular and Multifunctional UAV with Amphibious Landing, Processing and Surround Sense Module 207Lakshit Kohli, Manglesh Saurabh, Ishaan Bhatia, Nidhi Sindhwani and Manjula Vijh 12.1 Introduction 208 12.2 Existing System 208 12.3 Proposed System 210 12.4 IoT Sensors and Architecture 212 12.4.1 Sensors and Theory 212 12.4.2 Architectures Available 213 12.4.2.1 3-Layer IoT Architecture 213 12.4.2.2 5-Layer IoT Architecture 214 12.4.2.3 Architecture & Supporting Modules 215 12.4.2.4 Integration Approach 215 12.4.2.5 System of Modules 216 12.5 Advantages of the Proposed System 217 12.6 Design 218 12.6.1 System Design 219 12.6.2 Auto-Leveling 219 12.6.3 Amphibious Landing Module 221 12.6.4 Processing Module 223 12.6.5 Surround Sense Module 223 12.7 Results 224 12.8 Conclusion 227 12.9 Future Scope 228 References 228 13 Mind Controlled Unmanned Aerial Vehicle (UAV) Using Brain–Computer Interface (BCI) 231Prasath M.S., Naveen R. and Sivaraj G. 13.1 Introduction 232 13.1.1 Classification of UAVs 232 13.1.2 Drone Controlling 232 13.2 Mind-Controlled UAV With BCI Technology 233 13.3 Layout and Architecture of BCI Technology 234 13.4 Hardware Components 235 13.4.1 Neurosky Mindwave Headset 235 13.4.2 Microcontroller Board—Arduino 236 13.4.3 A Computer 237 13.4.4 Drone for Quadcopter 238 13.5 Software Components 239 13.5.1 Processing P3 Software 239 13.5.2 Arduino IDE Software 240 13.5.3 ThinkGear Connector 240 13.6 Hardware and Software Integration 241 13.7 Conclusion 243 References 244 14 Precision Agriculture With Technologies for Smart Farming Towards Agriculture 5.0 247Dhirendra Siddharth, Dilip Kumar Saini and Ajay Kumar 14.1 Introduction 247 14.2 Drone Technology as an Instrument for Increasing Farm Productivity 248 14.3 Mapping and Tracking of Rice Farm Areas With Information and Communication Technology (ICT) and Remote Sensing Technology 249 14.3.1 Methodology and Development of ICT 250 14.4 Strong Intelligence From UAV to the Agricultural Sector 252 14.4.1 Latest Agricultural Drone History 252 14.4.2 The Challenges 254 14.4.3 SAP’s Next Wave of Drone Technologies 254 14.4.4 SAP Connected Agriculture 256 14.4.5 Cases of Real-World Use 257 14.4.5.1 Crop Surveying 257 14.4.5.2 Capture the Plantation 258 14.4.5.3 Image Processing 258 14.4.5.4 Working to Create GeoTiles and an Image Pyramid 259 14.5 Drones-Based Sensor Platforms 260 14.5.1 Context and Challenges 260 14.5.2 Stakeholder and End Consumer Benefits 261 14.5.3 The Technology 262 14.5.3.1 Provisions of the Unmanned Aerial Vehicles 262 14.6 Jobs of Space Technology in Crop Insurance 263 14.7 The Institutionalization of Drone Imaging Technologies in Agriculture for Disaster Managing Risk 267 14.7.1 A Modern Working 267 14.7.2 Discovering Drone Mapping Technology 268 14.7.3 From Lowland to Uplands, Drone Mapping Technology 269 14.7.4 Institutionalization of Drone Monitoring Systems and Farming Capability 269 14.8 Usage of Internet of Things in Agriculture and Use of Unmanned Aerial Vehicles 270 14.8.1 System and Application Based on UAV-WSN 270 14.8.2 Using a Complex Comprehensive System 271 14.8.3 Benefits Assessment of Conventional System and the UAV-Based System 271 14.8.3.1 Merit 272 14.8.3.2 Saving Expenses 272 14.8.3.3 Traditional Agriculture 273 14.8.3.4 UAV-WSN System-Based Agriculture 273 14.9 Conclusion 273 References 273 15 IoT-Based UAV Platform Revolutionized in Smart Healthcare 277Umesh Kumar Gera, Dilip Kumar Saini, Preeti Singh and Dhirendra Siddharth 15.1 Introduction 278 15.2 IoT-Based UAV Platform for Emergency Services 279 15.3 Healthcare Internet of Things: Technologies, Advantages 281 15.3.1 Advantage 281 15.3.1.1 Concurrent Surveillance and Tracking 281 15.3.1.2 From End-To-End Networking and Availability 282 15.3.1.3 Information and Review Assortment 282 15.3.1.4 Warnings and Recording 282 15.3.1.5 Wellbeing Remote Assistance 283 15.3.1.6 Research 283 15.3.2 Complications 283 15.3.2.1 Privacy and Data Security 283 15.3.2.2 Integration: Various Protocols and Services 284 15.3.2.3 Overload and Accuracy of Data 284 15.3.2.4 Expenditure 284 15.4 Healthcare’s IoT Applications: Surgical and Medical Applications of Drones 285 15.4.1 Hearables 285 15.4.2 Ingestible Sensors 285 15.4.3 Moodables 285 15.4.4 Technology of Computer Vision 286 15.4.5 Charting for Healthcare 286 15.5 Drones That Will Revolutionize Healthcare 286 15.5.1 Integrated Enhancement in Efficiency 286 15.5.2 Offering Personalized Healthcare 287 15.5.3 The Big Data Manipulation 287 15.5.4 Safety and Privacy Optimization 287 15.5.5 Enabling M2M Communication 288 15.6 Healthcare Revolutionizing Drones 288 15.6.1 Google Drones 288 15.6.2 Healthcare Integrated Rescue Operations (HiRO) 289 15.6.3 EHang 289 15.6.4 TU Delft 289 15.6.5 Project Wing 289 15.6.6 Flirtey 289 15.6.7 Seattle’s VillageReach 290 15.6.8 ZipLine 290 15.7 Conclusion 290 References 290 Index 295

Read more less

Book SynopsisTHE ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT OF COVID-19 Discover the wider environmental effects of the COVID-19 pandemic with this up to date resource from leading voices in the field The Environmental Impact of COVID-19 delivers an insightful analysis of various environmental aspects of the COVID-19 pandemic that have caused global concern. The book discusses the transmission of COVID-19 in the environment, the pandemic's environmental impact, risk mitigation and management, management of COVID-related waste, and the environmental implications of the virus. It also considers the socio-economic implications of COVID-19's spread, including the effects of international lockdowns on different strata of society and various industries, including the biomedical industry, the environmental industry, and the pharmaceutical industry. An entire section of the text is devoted to a discussion about the waste generated due to COVID-19 and the effect of that waste on different environTable of ContentsForeword xiii 1 COVID- 19: A Pandemic - Introduction 1 Pratik Kulkarni, Tejas Barot, Piyush Rao, Aayush Dey, and Deepak Rawtani 1.1 Introduction: Sources and Chemical Activities of COVID- 19 1 1.1.1 Sources and Transmission 2 1.1.2 Structure of SARS- CoV- 2 3 1.1.3 Common Symptoms, Immune Reaction to the Virus, and Mechanism of Entry 3 1.1.3.1 Immuno- evasion of Coronaviruses 4 1.1.3.2 World at Loss due to COVID- 19 5 1.1.3.3 Incubation Period 6 1.1.3.4 SARS- CoV- 2 and Basic Reproduction Number (R0) 6 1.1.3.5 Pathological Characteristics 6 1.1.3.6 Case Definitions 7 1.1.3.7 Prevention of Transmission 7 1.1.3.8 Quarantine 8 1.1.3.9 Global Response by WHO 9 1.1.4 Treatments 10 1.1.4.1 General Treatment Strategies for COVID- 19 10 1.1.4.2 Antiviral Therapy 10 1.1.4.3 COVID- 19 Convalescent Plasma for Prophylaxis 10 1.1.4.4 FDA- Approved Drug/Agents for Emergency Use Authorization (EUA) 11 1.1.4.5 Vaccines 11 1.1.5 Conclusion 12 References 12 2 Viability of COVID- 19 in Different Environmental Surfaces 19 Saeida Saadat, Piyush K. Rao, Nitasha Khatri, and Deepak Rawtani 2.1 Introduction 19 2.2 Transmission of COVID- 19 20 2.2.1 Influence of Environmental Factors on Transmission of COVID- 19 21 2.3 Survival of COVID- 19 on Different Environmental Surfaces 23 2.3.1 Survival of COVID- 19 on Households and Hospitals Surfaces 24 2.3.2 Stability of COVID- 19 in Liquid Media 25 2.4 Disinfection of the Surfaces as an Efficient Weapon Against Coronaviruses 26 2.5 Conclusion 27 References 28 3 Influence of Environmental Factors in Transmission of COVID- 19 35 Aayush Dey, Piyush K. Rao, and Deepak Rawtani 3.1 Introduction 35 3.2 Temperature, Humidity, and Transmission of COVID- 19 37 3.3 Precipitation and Its Effects on COVID- 19 Transmission 37 3.4 Food Industry and COVID- 19 Transmission 38 3.5 Water and Sewage as a Medium for COVID- 19 Transmission 39 3.6 COVID- 19 Transmission via Air 39 3.7 Transmission of COVID- 19 Through Insects 40 3.8 Personal Hygiene Amidst COVID- 19 Transmission 41 3.9 Prevalence of SARS- CoV- 2 42 3.10 Disinfection of Surfaces – SARS- CoV- 2 46 3.10.1 Suspension Tests for Surface Disinfection 46 3.10.2 Carrier Tests for Surface Disinfection 47 3.10.3 Ultraviolet (UV- C) Radiation- Mediated Disinfection of SARS- CoV- 2 47 3.11 Conclusion 50 References 51 4 Models and Strategies for Controlling the Transmission of COVID- 19 59 Yigĭtcan Sümbelli, Semra Köse, Rüstem Keçili, and Chaudhery Mustansar Hussain 4.1 Introduction 59 4.2 Routes for the Transmission of COVID- 19 60 4.3 Models for the Transmission of COVID- 19 61 4.4 Strategies for the Transmission Control of COVID- 19 62 4.5 Conclusions 64 References 64 5 Traditional Analytical Techniques and Sampling of COVID- 19 67 Aayush Dey, Piyush K. Rao, Pratik Kulkarni, and Deepak Rawtani 5.1 Introduction 67 5.2 Sample Collection from Patients 68 5.2.1 Sample Acquisition from Nose 69 5.2.2 Sample Acquisition from Saliva 69 5.2.3 Stool Sample Acquisition 70 5.2.3.1 Sample Collection from Environmental Surfaces 70 5.2.3.2 Timing of the Environmental Sample Collection 71 5.2.3.3 Environmental Sampling Methods and Procedure 71 5.2.3.4 Transport and Storage of the Samples 71 5.2.3.5 Novel Sample Collection Technique 72 5.2.3.6 Current Diagnosis for COVID- 19 72 5.2.4 Nucleic Acid Testing 73 5.2.4.1 Reverse Transcription- Based Polymerase Chain Reaction (RT- PCR) 73 5.2.4.2 Real- Time RT- PCR (rRT- PCR) 73 5.2.5 Computed Tomography 74 5.3 Conclusion 75 References 75 6 Modern Sensor- Based Techniques for Identification of COVID- 19 79 Pratik Kulkarni, Shyam Vasvani, Tejas D. Barot, Piyush K. Rao, and Aayush Dey 6.1 Introduction: Current Diagnosis for COVID- 19 79 6.2 Newer and Emerging Technologies 79 6.2.1 Isothermal Amplification Assays 80 6.2.1.1 SHERLOCK Assay 80 6.2.1.2 RT- LAMP Assay 82 6.2.2 Protein- Based Tests 82 6.2.3 Point- of- Care (POC) Testing 83 6.2.4 Aptamer- Based Assay Techniques 84 6.2.4.1 Rapid Lateral Flow Platforms Based on Aptamer Technology 85 6.2.4.2 Aptamer- Based Diagnostics of COVID- 19 in the Future 86 6.2.5 Other Novel Technologies Developed for SARS- CoV- 2 Detection 88 6.2.5.1 Localized Surface Plasmon Resonance (LSPR) Sensor 88 6.2.5.2 Field- Effect Transistor (FET) 88 6.2.5.3 Cell- Based Potentiometric Biosensor 89 6.3 Conclusion 90 References 90 7 Advanced Digital Tools for Tracing and Analysis of COVID- 19 95 Archana Singh, Aayush Dey, and Deepak Rawtani 7.1 Introduction 95 7.2 Developments in Digital Strategies for COVID- 19 96 7.2.1 Monitoring of COVID- 19 Infection 96 7.2.2 Digital Techniques in Tracing and Analysis 97 7.2.2.1 Flow Modeling Tools 98 7.2.2.2 Quarantine Compliance Tools 98 7.2.2.3 COVID- 19 Symptom Tracking Tools 99 7.2.2.4 Proximity Tracing Tools for COVID- 19 99 7.2.2.5 Contact Tracing Tool 99 7.2.2.6 Quarantine and Self- Isolation 103 7.3 Artificial Intelligence in Curbing COVID- 19 103 7.3.1 Predictive Models and Tracking of COVID- 19 via AI 104 7.3.2 AI in the Screening of COVID- 19 Cases 104 7.3.3 Pre- Diagnostics of COVID- 19 and AI 105 7.3.4 AI in Protein Structure Mapping 105 7.3.5 AI and Development of Vaccines 105 7.3.6 AI in Genomics 105 7.4 Conclusion 105 References 106 8 Challenges and Preventive Interventions in COVID- 19 Transmission through Domestic Chemistry Hygiene: A Critical Assessment 111 Kanika Sharma, Payal Kesharwani, Ankit Jain, Nishi Mody, Gunjan Sharma, Swapnil Sharma, and Chaudhery Mustansar Hussain 8.1 Introduction 111 8.2 Bioaerosolization: Ground for Transmission of SARS- CoV- 2 112 8.3 Fomites: Role in the Transmission of COVID- 19 113 8.4 Vulnerable Places for COVID- 19 114 8.5 Exposure to SARS- CoV- 2 in Aerosolized Wastewater and Dynamic from the Sanitary Plumbing System 116 8.5.1 Bioaerosol Generation by Toilet Flushing 116 8.5.2 Bioaerosol Produced During Wastewater Treatment 116 8.5.3 Bioaerosol Produced During Irrigation 116 8.6 Scientific and Technological Solution for the Hygiene of Toilet Area to Curb COVID- 19 and Other Infections 117 8.6.1 Maintaining Hygiene and Sanitation of Bathroom by Physical and Chemical Disinfection 117 8.6.2 Antimicrobial Surface 118 8.6.3 Anti- adhesive Surface 119 8.6.4 No- Contact Use for the Operation of Sanitary Facility: Sensor Technology 120 8.6.5 Inexpensive Preventive Approaches Used at Home 120 8.6.6 Technology to Detect Virus 121 8.6.7 Steps for Wastewater Management 122 8.7 Conclusive Remarks and Prospects for Future Research 122 Acknowledgments 122 Conflict of Interest 122 References 123 9 Industries and COVID- 19 127 Pratik Kulkarni, Shyam Vasvani, Tejas D. Barot, Aayush Dey, and Deepak Rawtani 9.1 Introduction 127 9.2 Renewable and Green Energy Industries 129 9.3 Agriculture Industry 130 9.4 Petroleum and Oil Industry 130 9.5 Manufacturing Industry 131 9.6 Education 131 9.7 Health Care Industry 132 9.8 Pharmaceutical Industry 132 9.9 Hospitality 133 9.10 Tourism 133 9.11 Air Travel 134 9.12 Real Estate and Housing Industry 134 9.13 Sports Industry 135 9.14 Information Technology, Media, Research and Development 135 9.15 Food Sector 136 9.16 Conclusion 137 References 138 10 Ramifications of Coronavirus on the Environment 143 Elisa Kalugendo, Manka Marycleopha, Piyush K. Rao, and Dharmesh Silajiya 10.1 Introduction 143 10.2 Footprints of Coronavirus Pandemic on the Surroundings (Mother Nature) 144 10.3 Increase in Hospital Wastes 145 10.4 COVID- 19 Declined Global Warming 146 10.5 Poor Management of Waste 146 10.6 Reset of Nature 147 10.7 Soil Contamination 148 10.8 Destruction of Arable Land 149 10.9 Increased Poaching Activity 150 10.10 COVID- 19 Resulted in the Loss of a Great Number of People 150 10.11 Negligence of Environmental Sanitation 151 10.12 Decrease of Municipal Wastewater Particles 152 10.13 Future Implications 153 References 154 11 Management of Risks Associated with COVID- 19 159 Shrutika Singla, Shruthi Subhash, and Amarnath Mishra 11.1 Introduction 159 11.2 Types 160 11.3 Origin 161 11.4 Structure 162 11.5 Risk Associated with COVID- 19 163 11.5.1 Risk at Hospitals or Point- of- Care Centers 164 11.5.2 Risk at Airport and Other Transport Mediums 165 11.5.3 Environmental Risk Due to COVID- 19 165 11.6 Risk Management and Mitigation 166 11.6.1 Gathering Information from Different Sources 166 11.6.2 Preventing National and International Traveling 166 11.6.3 Vaccination 167 11.6.4 Self- Isolation and Quarantine 167 11.6.5 Clinical Management 167 11.6.6 Masks and PPE Kits Use 167 11.7 Conclusion and Future Perspectives 168 References 168 12 Case Studies: COVID- 19 and the Environment 171 Aayush Dey, Pratik Kulkarni, Piyush K. Rao, Nitasha Khatri, and Deepak Rawtani 12.1 Introduction 171 12.2 COVID- 19 and Its Impact on the Environment – A Case Study of China 172 12.3 Environmental Impact of Particulate Matter in Italy Due to COVID- 19 173 12.4 Impact Upon the Atmospheric Environment of the Southeast Asia Region 173 12.5 Impact of COVID- 19 Lockdown on PM 10 , SO 2 , and NO 2 Concentrations in Salé City, Morocco 175 12.6 Correlation of Pandemic- Induced Lockdown and Stone Quarrying and Crushing – An Indian Perspective 175 12.7 Temperature vs. COVID- 19 Transmission – Brazil 176 12.8 Correlation of COVID- 19 and Air Quality in Spain 177 12.8.1 Conclusive Statements 177 12.9 Weather Impacts COVID- 19 Transmission – A Case Study of Turkey 178 12.10 COVID- 19 vs. Ambient Temperature – A Perspective of Canada 178 12.11 Conclusion 180 References 180 13 Effect of Waste Generated Due to COVID- 19 185 Saeida Saadat, Piyush K. Rao, Nitasha Khatri, and Deepak Rawtani 13.1 Introduction 185 13.2 Impact of COVID- 19 on Waste Production 186 13.3 Classification of Waste Generated Due to the COVID- 19 Pandemic 187 13.3.1 Domestic Waste 187 13.3.2 Biomedical Waste 189 13.4 Reduction in Waste Recycling 190 13.5 Environmental Impacts of COVID- 19 190 13.6 Management of the Generated Waste Due to the COVID- 19 Pandemic 192 13.7 Technical Approaches to Waste Management for the Post- COVID- 19 World 193 13.8 Conclusion 195 References 196 14 Strategies for Effective Waste Management for COVID- 19 203 Aayush Dey, Nitasha Khatri, Piyush K. Rao, and Deepak Rawtani 14.1 Introduction 203 14.2 Composition of Wastes Corresponding to the COVID- 19 Pandemic 204 14.3 Solid Waste 205 14.3.1 Food Wastes 205 14.3.1.1 Probable Management Strategies 206 14.3.2 Plastic Wastes 207 14.3.2.1 Plastic Waste Management Strategies 208 14.3.3 Municipal Solid Waste and Management Strategies 208 14.4 Biomedical Wastes 209 14.4.1 Hazardous Biomedical Wastes 209 14.4.1.1 Infectious Waste 209 14.4.1.2 Pathological Waste 209 14.4.1.3 Sharps Waste 211 14.4.1.4 Chemical Waste 211 14.4.1.5 Pharmaceutical Waste 211 14.4.1.6 Genotoxic Waste 211 14.4.2 Probable Mitigation Strategies for Hazardous Biomedical Wastes Generated Due to COVID- 19 211 14.4.2.1 Incineration 211 14.4.2.2 Thermal Strategies for Biomedical Waste Mitigation 212 14.4.2.3 Biomedical Waste Management- Based via Chemical Techniques 213 14.4.2.4 COVID- 19 Biomedical Waste Management via Steam Sterilization Technique 213 14.5 A Global Perspective Upon COVID- 19 Waste Management 214 14.5.1 India’s Take on COVID- 19 Waste Management 214 14.5.2 COVID- 19 Waste Management in Spain 214 14.5.3 Practices for COVID- 19 Waste Management by the United States 215 14.5.4 China’s COVID- 19 Waste Management Strategy 215 14.6 Conclusion 215 References 216 15 Environmental Policies and Strategies for COVID- 19 221 Vimbai Masiyambiri, Piyush K. Rao, Nitasha Khatri, and Deepak Rawtani 15.1 Introduction 221 15.2 Linking Policy with the Environment 222 15.3 Challenges of Creating Environmental Policy for COVID- 19 and Subsequent Pandemics 226 15.3.1 Reactive Policies 226 15.3.2 Proactive Policy Formulation for COVID- 19 227 15.3.3 Environmental Indifference, Role of Media and COVID- 19 Environmental Policy 227 15.4 Environmental Strategies for COVID- 19 228 15.4.1 Risk Analyses and Assessment of COVID- 19 229 15.4.2 Implementation of Early Warning Systems in the Environment 229 15.4.3 Post- COVID- 19 Crisis Management of the Environment 230 15.4.4 Building Infrastructure for Separation of Waste 231 15.5 Conclusion 231 References 232 16 Environmental Implications of Pandemic on Climate 235 Sapna Jain, Bhawna Yadav Lamba, Madhuben Sharma, and Sanjeev Kumar 16.1 Introduction 235 16.2 Cast Study 1: Megacities of India 236 16.2.1 Methodology 236 16.2.2 Size Description and Data Collection 236 16.3 Results and Analysis 237 16.3.1 Meteorology and Air Quality in Megacities 238 16.4 Cast Study 2: Selected Cities of Rajasthan, India 239 16.4.1 Methodology 239 16.4.2 Size Description and Data Collection 239 16.5 Result and Analysis 240 16.5.1 Meteorology and Air Quality: Case Study 2 241 16.6 Special Area of Study: Bhiwadi 241 16.7 Conclusion 242 References 243 17 COVID- 19 Pandemic: A Blessing in Disguise 245 Pratik Kulkarni, Tejas D. Barot, Piyush K. Rao, and Deepak Rawtani 17.1 Introduction: A “Make or Break” Perspective 245 17.2 How Coronavirus Is Shaping Sustainable Development 246 17.2.1 Moving Toward a Sustainable Future 248 17.2.2 Building Back Better After COVID- 19 249 17.2.3 Global Shift to Renewable Energy. Is COVID- 19 Slowing It? 250 17.2.4 Clean Energy Momentum 250 17.3 Reverting to Dirty Fuels 250 17.3.1 Part Shortages 251 17.4 Consequences of the Pandemic on Fragile States 251 17.4.1 Food Systems and the Biodiversity Connection 251 17.4.2 Mining, Conflict, and Land Rights 252 17.4.3 Prevention of Pandemic and Its Cost Measures 252 17.4.4 Prevention of New Pandemics 253 17.4.5 Climate Change and Wildlife 254 17.4.6 Necessary Responses Needed 254 17.5 Energy Security 255 17.6 Conclusion 257 References 257 Index 261

Read more less

Book SynopsisSUSTAINABLE SOLUTIONS FOR ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION This first volume in a broad, comprehensive two-volume set, Sustainable Solutions for Environmental Pollution, concentrates on the role of waste management in solving pollution problems and the value-added products that can be created out of waste, turning a negative into an environmental and economic positive. Environmental pollution is one of the biggest problems facing our world today, in every country, region, and even down to local landfills. Not just solving these problems, but turning waste into products, even products that can make money, is a huge game-changer in the world of environmental engineering. Finding ways to make fuel and other products from solid waste, setting a course for the production of future biorefineries, and creating a clean process for generating fuel and other products are just a few of the topics covered in the groundbreaking new first volume in the two-volume set, Sustainable SolutTable of ContentsPreface xv 1 An Overview of Electro-Fermentation as a Platform for Future Biorefineries 1Tae Hyun Chung and Bipro Ranjan Dhar 1.1 Introduction 2 1.2 Fundamental Mechanisms 5 1.3 Value-Added Products from Electro-Fermentation 7 1.3.1 Carboxylates 11 1.3.1.1 Short-Chain Carboxylates 11 1.3.1.2 Medium-Chain Carboxylates 13 1.3.2 Bioethanol 14 1.3.3 Bio-Butanol 16 1.3.4 Microalgae Derived Lipids 18 1.3.5 Acetoin 21 1.3.6 Biopolymer 23 1.3.7 L-lysine 25 1.3.8 1,3-propanediol 27 1.4 Challenges and Future Outlook 29 1.5 Acknowledgements 30 References 30 2 Biodiesel Sustainability: Challenges and Perspectives 41Hussein N. Nassar, Abdallah R. Ismail and Nour Sh. El-Gendy Abbreviations 42 2.1 Introduction 44 2.2 Biodiesel Production 48 2.3 Factors Affecting Biodiesel Production Process 51 2.3.1 The Type of Feedstock 51 2.3.2 The Type of Alcohol 54 2.3.3 Effect of Alcohol to Oil Molar Ratio 55 2.3.4 Catalyst Concentration 55 2.3.5 Catalysts Type 56 2.3.5.1 Lipases 56 2.3.5.2 Acid Catalysts 58 2.3.5.3 Alkaline Catalysts 63 2.3.6 Effect of Reaction Temperature 73 2.3.7 Effect of Reaction Time 74 2.3.8 Mixing Efficiency 75 2.3.9 Effect of pH 76 2.4 Transesterification Mechanisms 76 2.4.1 Homogeneous Acid-Catalyzed Transesterification Reaction 76 2.4.2 Lipase-Catalyzed Transesterification Reaction 77 2.4.3 CaO-Catalyzed Transesterification Reaction 77 2.4.4 Other Calcium Derived-Catalyzed Transesterification Reaction 80 2.5 Production of Biodiesel Using Heterogeneous Catalyst Prepared from Natural Sources 81 2.6 Challenges and Perspectives 94 References 99 3 Multidisciplinary Sides of Environmental Engineering and Sustainability 123Said S. E. H. Elnashaie 3.1 Introduction 124 3.2 System Theory and Integrated System Approach 126 3.2.1 System Theory 126 3.2.2 The State of the System and State Variables 128 3.2.3 Input Variables (Parameters) 128 3.2.4 Design Variables (Parameters) 128 3.2.5 Physico-Chemical Variables (Parameters) 128 3.2.6 Boundaries of System 129 3.2.6.1 Isolated System 129 3.2.6.2 Closed System 129 3.2.6.3 Open System 129 3.2.7 Steady, Unsteady States and Thermodynamic Equilibrium of Systems 130 3.3 Sustainable Development, Sustainable Development Engineering and Environmental Engineering 130 3.3.1 Bio-Fuels and Integrated Bio-Refineries 132 3.3.2 Integrated System Approach 137 3.4 Advanced Multi-Disciplinary Sustainable Engineering Education 139 3.4.1 Bio-Fuels 143 3.4.1.1 Bio-Hydrogen 143 3.4.1.2 Bio-Diesel 143 3.4.1.3 Bio-Ethanol 144 3.4.2 Bio-Products 145 3.4.3 Integrated Bio-Refineries 146 3.4.4 Development of Novel Technologies 147 3.4.5 Economics of Bio-Fuels and Bio-Products 147 3.4.6 Nano-Technology (NT) 148 3.4.7 Non-Linear Dynamics (NLDs), Bifurcation (B), Chaos (C) and Complexity (COMP) 148 3.4.8 Sustainable Development (SD), Sustainable Development Engineering (SDE), System Theory (ST) and Integrated System Approach (ISA) 149 3.4.9 Novel Education 149 3.4.10 New Journal 150 3.5 Novel Designs for Auto-Thermal Behavior Towards Sustainability 152 3.5.1 Integrated System Approach Classification 153 3.6 Conclusions 156 References 156 4 Biofuels 163Karuna K. Arjoon and James G. Speight 4.1 Introduction 163 4.2 Composition 165 4.3 Classification of Biofuels 166 4.3.1 First-Generation Biofuels 166 4.3.1.1 Sugars and Starch 166 4.3.1.2 Cellulose 168 4.3.1.3 Lignin 168 4.3.2 Second-Generation Biofuels 169 4.3.3 Third-Generation Biofuels 169 4.4 Examples of Biofuels 170 4.4.1 Biodiesel 170 4.4.2 Bio-Alcohols 174 4.4.3 Bioethers 176 4.4.4 Biogas 177 4.4.5 Bio-Oil 179 4.4.6 Synthesis Gas 180 4.5 Property Variations with Source 181 4.6 Properties Compared to Fuels from Crude Oil Tar Sand Bitumen, Coal and Oil Shale 185 4.7 Fuel Specifications and Performance 189 4.8 Conclusion 195 References 197 5 Sustainable Valorization of Waste Cooking Oil into Biofuels and Green Chemicals: Recent Trends, Opportunities and Challenges 199Omar Aboelazayem and Ranim Alayoubi 5.1 Introduction 200 5.2 Waste Cooking Oil (WCO) 201 5.3 Biofuels from WCO 203 5.3.1 Biodiesel 203 5.3.2 Biojet Fuel 206 5.3.2.1 Hydro-Treatment Process 208 5.3.2.2 Cracking and Isomerisation Processes 209 5.4 Green Chemicals from WCO 210 5.4.1 Asphalt Rejuvenator 211 5.4.2 Plasticizers 212 5.4.3 Polyurethane Foam 214 5.4.4 Bio-Lubricants 215 5.4.5 Surfactants 215 5.5 Challenges and Future Work 216 5.6 Conclusion 217 References 218 6 Waste Valorization: Physical, Chemical, and Biological Routes 229Muhammad Faheem, Muhammad Azher Hassan, Tariq Mehmood, Sarfraz Hashim and Muhammad Aqeel Ashraf 6.1 Background 230 6.2 Land Biomass vs. Oceanic Biomass 233 6.3 Waste Management 233 6.4 Waste Valorization for Adsorbents Development 234 6.5 Waste Valorization for Catalysts Preparations 237 6.6 Bio-Based Waste Valorization for Bio-Fuel and Bio-Fertilizer Production 240 6.6.1 Biomass Briquetting: (Bio-Fuel) 240 6.6.2 Composting: (Bio-Fertilizer) 241 6.6.3 Anaerobic Digestion: (Bio-Fuel) 243 6.7 Biochemical Mechanism Involved in Anaerobic Digestion System 244 6.7.1 Hydrolysis 244 6.7.2 Acidogenesis 244 6.7.3 Acetogenesis 245 6.7.4 Methanogenesis 245 6.8 Challenges and Recent Advances in Anaerobic Digestion 245 6.9 Bio-Based Waste and Bioeconomy Perspective 246 6.10 Conclusion 248 References 248 7 Electrocoagulation Process in the Treatment of Landfill Leachate 257Mohd Azhar Abd Hamid, Hamidi Abdul Aziz and Mohd Suffian Yusoff 7.1 Introduction 258 7.2 Decomposition of Solid Waste 259 7.3 Landfill Leachate Properties 262 7.3.1 Organic Matter 262 7.3.2 Inorganic Substances 263 7.3.3 Heavy Metals 263 7.3.4 Xenobiotic Organics 264 7.4 Characteristics of Landfill Leachate 264 7.5 Electrocoagulation Process 267 7.5.1 Fundamentals of Electrocoagulation Process 267 7.5.2 Mechanism of Electrocoagulation Process 269 7.5.3 Advantages and Disadvantages 272 7.6 Key Parameters of Electrocoagulation Process 272 7.6.1 Electrodes Material 272 7.6.2 Electrodes Arrangement 274 7.6.3 Electrode Spacing 275 7.6.4 Current Density 276 7.6.5 Electrolysis Time 277 7.6.6 Initial pH 278 7.6.7 Agitation Speed 279 7.6.8 Electrolyte Conductivity 280 7.7 Operating Mode 281 7.8 Economic Analysis 283 7.9 Case Study: Removal of the Organic Pollutant of Colour in Natural Saline Leachate from Pulau Burung Landfill Site 284 7.9.1 Pulau Burung Landfill Site 285 7.9.2 Experimental Design 286 7.9.3 Results and Discussion 287 7.10 Gaps in Current Knowledge 288 7.11 Conclusion and Future Prospect 289 References 290 8 Sustainable Solutions for Environmental Pollutants from Solid Waste Landfills 305Salem S. Abu Amr, Mohammed J.K. Bashir, Sohaib K. M. Abujayyab and Waseem Ahmad 8.1 Introduction 306 8.2 Domestic Solid Waste and Its Critical Environmental Issues 306 8.3 Landfill Leachate Characterization and Its Impact on the Environment 307 8.4 Effect of Landfills on Air Quality 311 8.5 Effect of Unsuitable Location of Landfill on Environment and Community 315 8.6 Recent Sustainable Technologies for Leachate Treatment 318 8.6.1 Effects of AOPs on Leachate Biodegradability 320 8.6.2 Case Study and Proposed Data for Leachate Treatment Plant Using AOPs 322 8.7 Sustainable Solutions for Gas Emission 324 8.8 Consideration for Selection of Sustainable Locations for Landfills 328 8.9 Conclusion 331 References 332 9 Progress on Ionic Liquid Pre-Treatment for Lignocellulosic Biomass Valorization into Biofuels and Bio-Products 343Ranim Alayoubi and Omar Aboelazayem 9.1 Introduction 344 9.2 Lignocellulosic Biomass for Biofuels and Bio-Products 345 9.2.1 Cellulose 346 9.2.2 Hemicellulose 347 9.2.3 Lignin 348 9.3 Pre-Treatment Technologies for Lignocellulosic Biomass 349 9.4 Ionic Liquids for Lignocellulosic Biomass Pre-Treatment: Characteristics and Properties 354 9.5 Insights into Pre-Treatment Performance of Ionic Liquids 357 9.5.1 Interactions of Ionic Liquids with Lignocellulose 357 9.5.2 Effect of the Ionic Liquid Pre-Treatment on the Recovered Biomass 359 9.5.3 Impact of Ionic Liquids on the Biological Tools 361 9.6 Concluding Remarks: Challenges Facing the Development of Ionic Liquids Use at Large Scale and Future Directions 364 References 365 10 Septage Characterization and Sustainable Fecal Sludge Management in Rural Nablus – Palestine 375A. Rasem Hasan,Mohammed A. Hussein, Hanan A. Jafar and Amjad I.A. Hussein List of Abbreviations 376 10.1 Introduction 377 10.1.1 Background 377 10.1.2 What is Fecal Sludge? 378 10.1.3 Legal Considerations 378 10.1.4 Study Area 379 10.2 Septage Characteristics 381 10.2.1 Introduction 381 10.2.2 General Background of Septage Characterization 381 10.2.3 General Treatment of Fecal Sludge 385 10.3 Study Methodology 388 10.3.1 General 388 10.3.2 Research Methodology and Methods of Laboratory Analysis 388 10.3.2.1 Data Collection 388 10.3.2.2 Sampling and Storage 388 10.3.2.3 Sampling of Septage 389 10.3.2.4 Sampling of Stools and Urine 390 10.3.2.5 Storage of Samples 390 10.3.3 Characterization of Fecal Sludge (FS) 390 10.3.4 Statistical Analysis of Data on Characterization of FS 390 10.4 Septage Pre-Treatment Process 391 10.4.1 General Treatment Options 391 10.4.2 Selection of Treatment Options 391 10.4.3 Septage Quality Determination 392 10.4.4 Software Selection 392 10.4.4.1 Modeling by GPS-X 7.0 392 10.4.5 End-Use and Disposal 393 10.5 Results and Discussion 393 10.5.1 Measured Parameters for Fecal Sludge 393 10.5.1.1 Septage Characteristics 393 10.5.2 Stools Characteristics 398 10.5.3 Urine Characteristics 398 10.5.4 Specific Parameters in Details 398 10.5.4.1 pH and EC 398 10.5.4.2 Turbidity 398 10.5.4.3 COD/BOD5 401 10.5.4.4 Total Nitrogen and Ammonia 401 10.5.4.5 TS, TDS, and TSS 402 10.5.4.6 VS, VDS, and VSS 402 10.5.4.7 PO4 -P and PO4 -T 403 10.5.4.8 Fat and Grease 403 10.5.4.9 Alkalinity 404 10.5.4.10 TC and FC 404 10.6 Pre-Treatment of the Fecal Sludge – Results and Discussions 404 10.6.1 Quantification of Domestic Septage 404 10.6.2 Design Septage Characteristics 405 10.6.2.1 Untreated Septage Characteristics 405 10.6.2.2 Treated Septage Characteristics 406 10.6.3 Software Design 406 10.6.3.1 Treatment Plant Modeling 406 10.6.3.2 Optimizing the Appropriate Model 408 10.7 Treatment Plant Estimated Cost Breakdown 408 10.8 Conclusion 410 10.9 Recommendations 412 References 413 11 Lipase Catalyzed Reactions: A Promising Approach for Clean Synthesis of Oleochemicals 417Ahmad Mustafa 11.1 Introduction to Oleochemicals Industry 418 11.2 Sources of Lipases 420 11.2.1 Bacterial Lipases 420 11.2.2 Fungal Lipases 422 11.2.3 Plant Lipases 422 11.2.4 Animal Lipases 422 11.3 Application of Lipases 422 11.3.1 Monoglycerides Production 423 11.3.2 Oil/Fats Glycerolysis (Chemically Catalyzed) 423 11.3.3 Oil/Fats Glycerolysis (Enzymatically Catalyzed) 425 11.3.4 Biodiesel Production 429 11.4 Lipase Catalyzed Production of Biodiesel 430 11.4.1 Production of Biodiesel from Oil Extracted from Spent Bleaching Earth (SBE) 431 11.5 Esterification of Fatty Acids with Glycerol 433 11.5.1 Chemically Catalyzed Esterification 433 11.5.2 Lipase Catalyzed Production of Monoglycerides 435 11.6 Interesterification 435 11.6.1 Chemical Interesterification 438 11.6.2 Enzymatic Interesterification 438 11.7 Environmental Benefits of Enzymatic Process Against Chemical Process 439 11.8 Conclusion 440 References 441 12 Seaweeds for Sustainable Development 449Nermin Adel El Semary 12.1 Introduction 449 12.2 Types of Seaweeds 451 12.2.1 Green Algae 451 12.2.2 Red Algae 451 12.2.3 Brown Algae 452 12.3 Bioremediation 452 12.3.1 Pollution 452 12.3.2 Bioremediation of Polluted Water 452 12.3.3 Algal Bioremediation of Eutrophic Water 456 12.4 Seaweeds in Nutrition 457 12.4.1 Human Nutrition 457 12.4.2 Animal Feed and Feed Additive 457 12.5 Seaweeds as a Source of Pharmaceutics 458 12.5.1 Pharmaceutics from Green Algae 458 12.5.2 Pharamaceutics from Brown Algae 458 12.5.3 Pharmaceutics from Red Algae 458 12.6 Seaweeds Hydrocolloids and Biopolymers 459 12.6.1 Agar 459 12.6.2 Carrageenans 459 12.6.3 Alginates (Alginic Acid) 460 12.7 Seaweeds and Bioenergy 460 12.8 Seaweeds as Biofertilizers 461 12.9 Seaweeds as Ecological Player in Sulfur Geocycle 462 12.10 Culturing Seaweeds in the Marine Habitat (Algal Maricultures) 463 12.10.1 Mariculture Establishment 464 12.10.1.1 Single Culture 464 12.10.1.2 Repeated Culture 464 12.10.1.3 Multiple Cultures 464 12.10.2 Cultured Seaweed Harvest 464 12.10.3 Processes Following the Algae Harvest 465 12.11 Conclusion 465 12.12 Recommendations 466 12.13 References 466 About the Editor 471 Index 473

Read more less

Book SynopsisFundamental Design of Steelmaking Refractories Comprehensive up-to-date resource organizing fundamental aspects for the design and performance of steelmaking refractories Fundamental Design of Steelmaking Refractories provides a fundamental understanding in the design of steelmaking refractories, in detail and all in one source, enabling readers to understand various issues including how heat and mass transfer occurs throughout the refractory, how matrix impurity or their contact affects the phases, and how invisible defects form during refractory manufacturing that eventually facilitates to analyze wear, corrosion, and performance of different refractory linings for primary and secondary steelmaking vessels, tundish, and continuous casting refractories. Other specific sample topics covered in Fundamental Design of Steelmaking Refractories include: Phase formations and correlation with impurity effects and refractory processing shortcomingsStress, wear, and corrosion to design refracTable of ContentsPreface xv Acknowledgment xvii About Author xix 1 Heat and Mass Transfer 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Energy Conservation 2 1.3 Conduction 6 1.3.1 Basic Concept and Properties 6 1.3.2 One-Dimensional Steady-state Conduction 9 1.3.3 Two-Dimensional Steady-state Conduction 14 1.4 Convection 16 1.4.1 Boundary Layers 18 1.4.2 Laminar and Turbulent Flow 21 1.4.3 Free and Forced Convection 23 1.4.4 Flow in Confined Region 24 1.5 Radiation 29 1.5.1 Basic Concepts 29 1.5.2 Emission from Real Surfaces 29 1.5.3 Absorption, Reflection, and Transmission by Real Surfaces 31 1.5.4 Exchange Radiation 32 1.6 Mass Transfer 34 1.6.1 Convection Mass Transfer 35 1.6.2 Multiphase Mass Transfer 35 1.6.3 Analogy—Heat, Mass, and Momentum Transfer 37 1.7 Heat Transfer in Refractory Lining 39 1.7.1 Tunnel Kiln 39 1.7.2 Ladle Lining 40 References 43 2 Equilibrium and Nonequilibrium Phases 45 2.1 Introduction 45 2.2 Basics of Phase Diagram 45 2.2.1 Gibb’s Phase Rule 45 2.2.2 Binary Phase Diagram and Crystallization 47 2.2.3 Ternary Phase Diagram and Crystallization 55 2.2.4 Alkemade Lines 60 2.3 One-Component Phase Diagrams 62 2.3.1 Water 62 2.3.2 Quartz 63 2.4 Two-Component Phase Diagrams 64 2.4.1 Fe–C 64 2.4.2 Two Oxides Phase Diagrams 66 2.5 Three-Component Phase Diagrams 72 2.5.1 Three Oxides Phase Diagrams 72 2.5.2 FeO–SiO2 –C 78 2.6 Nucleation and Crystal Growth 79 2.6.1 Homogenous and Heterogeneous Nucleation 79 2.6.2 Crystal Growth Process 82 2.7 Nonequilibrium Phases 83 References 85 3 Packing, Stress, and Defects in Compaction 87 3.1 Introduction 87 3.2 Refractory Grading and Packing 88 3.2.1 Binary and Ternary System 89 3.2.2 Particle Morphology and Mechanical Response 91 3.2.3 Nanoscale Particles and Mechanical Response 93 3.2.4 Binder and Mixing on Packing 95 3.3 Stress–Strain during Compaction 98 3.4 Agglomeration and Compaction 99 3.5 Uniaxial Pressing 102 3.6 Cold Isostatic Pressing 104 3.7 Defects in Shaped Refractories 107 References 111 4 Degree of Ceramic Bonding 113 4.1 Introduction 113 4.2 Importance of Heating Compartment 114 4.2.1 Loading and Heating 114 4.2.2 Heat Distribution 116 4.2.3 Temperature Conformity 116 4.3 Initial Stage Sintering 118 4.3.1 Sintering Mechanisms of Two-particle Model 118 4.3.2 Atomic Diffusion 120 4.3.3 Sintering Kinetics 121 4.3.4 Sintering Variables 125 4.3.5 Limitations of Initial Stage of Sintering 126 4.4 Intermediate and Final Stage Sintering 126 4.4.1 Intermediate Stage Model 126 4.4.2 Final Stage Model 128 4.4.3 Influence of Entrapped Gases 129 4.5 Microstructure Alteration 130 4.5.1 Recrystallization and Grain Growth 130 4.5.2 Grain Growth: Normal and Abnormal 131 4.5.3 Pores and Secondary Crystallization 135 4.6 Sintering with Low Melting Constituents 137 4.7 Bonding Below 1000°C 138 4.7.1 Organic Binder 139 4.7.2 Inorganic Binder 140 4.7.3 Carbonaceous Binder 141 References 142 5 Thermal and Mechanical Behavior 143 5.1 Introduction 143 5.2 Mechanical Properties 144 5.2.1 Elastic Modulus 144 5.2.2 Hardness 146 5.2.3 Fracture Toughness 147 5.2.4 Strength 149 5.2.5 Fatigue 154 5.3 Cracking 154 5.3.1 Theory of Brittle Fracture 156 5.3.2 Physics of Fracture 158 5.3.3 Spontaneous Microcracking 159 5.4 Thermal Properties 160 5.4.1 Stress Anisotropy and Magnitude 160 5.4.2 Thermal Conductivity 162 5.4.3 Thermal Expansion 164 5.4.4 Thermal Shock 166 5.4.5 Thermal Stress Distribution 166 5.5 Thermomechanical Response 168 5.5.1 Refractoriness under Load 169 5.5.2 Creep in Compression (CIC) 171 5.5.3 Hot Modulus of Rupture 174 5.6 Wear 176 5.6.1 System-dependent Phenomena 176 5.6.2 Adhesive 178 5.6.3 Abrasive 179 5.6.4 Erosive 180 5.6.5 Oxidative 181 References 182 6 High Temperature Refractory Corrosion 183 6.1 Introduction 183 6.2 Thermodynamic Perceptions 184 6.3 Effect of Temperature and Water Vapor 187 6.4 Slag–Refractory Interactions 191 6.4.1 Diffusion in Solids 193 6.4.2 Oxidation 195 6.4.3 Infiltration 198 6.4.4 Dissolution 201 6.4.5 Crystallite Alteration 204 6.4.6 Endell, Fehling, and Kley Model 205 6.5 Phenomenological Approach and Slag Design 206 6.5.1 Refractory Solubility 209 6.5.2 Slag Composition and Volume Optimization 210 References 215 7 Operation and Refractories for Primary Steel 217 7.1 Introduction 217 7.2 Operational Features in BOF 221 7.2.1 Charging and Blowing 222 7.2.2 Mode of Blowing 223 7.2.3 Physicochemical Change in BOF 227 7.2.4 Tapping 230 7.2.5 Slag Formation 231 7.3 Operational Features in EAF 232 7.4 Refractory Designing and Lining 236 7.4.1 Steel Chemistry and Slag Composition 236 7.4.2 Thermal and Mechanical Stress 239 7.4.3 Refractory Lining and Corrosive Wear 243 7.4.4 Refractory Composition and Properties 249 7.5 Refractory Maintenance Practice 252 7.6 Philosophy to Consider Raw Materials 254 7.7 Microstructure-dependent Properties of Refractories 257 7.7.1 Microstructure Deterioration Inhibition to Improve Slag Corrosion Resistance 257 7.7.2 Slag Coating to Protect the Working Surface 258 7.7.3 Microstructure Reinforcement by Evaporation-Condensation of Pitch 259 7.7.4 Whisker Insertion to Reinforce Microstructure 259 7.7.5 Fracture Toughness Enhancement and Crack Propagation Inhibition 259 References 260 8 Operation and Refractories for Secondary Steelmaking 263 8.1 Introduction 263 8.2 Steel Diversity, Nomenclature, and Use 267 8.3 Vessels for Different Grades of Steel 270 8.4 Operational Features of Vessels 272 8.4.1 Ladle Furnace (LF) 273 8.4.2 Argon Oxygen Decarburization (AOD) 278 8.4.3 Vacuum Ladle Degassing Process 279 8.4.4 Stirring and Refining Process in Degassing 285 8.4.5 Composition Adjustment by Sealed Ar Bubbling with Oxygen Blowing (CAS–OB) 288 8.4.6 RH Snorkel 289 8.5 Designing Aspects of Refractories 291 8.6 Refractories for Working Lining 303 8.6.1 Magnesia–Carbon Refractories 303 8.6.2 Alumina–Magnesia–Carbon Refractories 306 8.6.3 Dolo–Carbon Refractories 310 8.6.4 Magnesia–chrome (MgO-Cr2O3) 313 8.6.5 Spinel Bricks 314 References 315 9 Precast and Purging System 319 9.1 Introduction 319 9.2 Composition Design of Castables 320 9.2.1 Choice of Raw Materials and Properties 322 9.2.2 Choice of Binders 329 9.2.3 Aggregates Grading 333 9.2.4 On-site Castable Casting 335 9.3 Precast-Shape Design and Manufacturing 337 9.4 Precast Shapes and Casting 337 9.5 Purging Plugs 341 9.5.1 Plug Design and Refractory 341 9.5.2 Gas Purging 344 9.5.3 Installation and Maintenance 346 9.5.4 Clogging and Corrosion 348 References 350 10 Refractories for Flow Control 353 10.1 Introduction 353 10.2 First–Second–Third Generation Slide Gate 355 10.3 New Generation Ladle Slide Gate System 359 10.4 Ladle Slide Gate Plate 360 10.4.1 Critical Design Parameters 362 10.4.2 Selection of Slide Plate and Fixing 366 10.4.3 Materials and Fabrication of SGP 369 10.4.4 Mode of Failures 374 10.4.5 FEA for Stress and Cracking 378 10.5 Tundish Slide Gate and Plate 380 10.5.1 Modern Slide Gate and Refractory Assembly 381 10.5.2 Materials and Fabrication 381 10.5.3 Cracking and Corrosion Phenomena 383 10.6 Short Nozzles for Ladle and Tundish 389 10.7 Nozzle Diameter and Gate Opening in Flow 390 References 393 11 Refractories for Continuous Casting 395 11.1 Introduction 395 11.2 Importance of Long Nozzles in Steel Transfer 397 11.2.1 Furnace to Ladle Transfer 397 11.2.2 Ladle to Tundish Transfer 398 11.2.3 Tundish to Mold Transfer 399 11.3 Tundish Lining 400 11.3.1 Lining and Failure 400 11.3.2 Lining Improvement and Maintenance 407 11.4 Ladle Shroud (LS) 409 11.4.1 Design and Geometry 409 11.4.2 Failures, Materials and Processing 418 11.4.3 Operational Practice 424 11.4.4 Flow Pattern 425 11.5 Mono Block Stopper 427 11.5.1 Preheating Schedule 427 11.5.2 Installation 428 11.5.3 Failures 429 11.5.4 Glazing 430 11.6 Submerged-Entry Nozzle 430 11.6.1 Installation and Failures 431 11.6.2 SEN Fixing for Thin Slab Caster 432 11.6.3 SES Installation and Failures 432 11.6.4 Corrosion and Clogging 435 References 444 12 Premature Refractory Life by Other Parameters 445 12.1 Introduction 445 12.2 Refractory Manufacturing Defects 446 12.2.1 Consistence Raw Material 447 12.2.2 Processing Parameters 449 12.2.3 Pressing and Firing 451 12.3 Packing and Transport 453 12.3.1 Packaging and Packing Material 453 12.3.2 Vibration-free Packaging 454 12.3.3 Loading, Transporting, and Unloading 455 12.4 Procurement and Lining Failures 456 12.4.1 Total Cost of Ownership Concept 457 12.4.2 Preliminary Features of Lining 458 12.4.3 Workmanship 462 12.5 Preventive Maintenance in Operation 463 12.5.1 Professional Service 464 12.5.2 Slag Composition, Temperature, and Viscosity 465 12.5.3 Monitor and Maintenance of Lining 472 12.6 Consistent Supply and Time Management 475 12.6.1 Cycle Concept 476 12.6.2 Pull/Push Concept 476 References 477 Index 479

Read more less

Book SynopsisConstruction Project Organising Discover foundational and cutting-edge ideas in the organisation of construction projects In Construction Project Organising, an authoritative team of construction researchers delivers a comprehensive exploration of the many organisational processes and forms that can be found in construction project organising and the many dimensions that can influence these forms. The authors examine these dimensions, detailing their importance to projects and enabling managers to respond to calls by industry professionals for more collaborative forms of organising that focus on value creation. The book investigates the relationship between structure and action, and how patterns of action are created, recreated and maintained by scrutinising the myriad of organisational arrangements between clients, financiers, design teams, contractors, stakeholders and supply chains. It also discusses different concepts in the development and management of construction project organiTable of ContentsPreface xiii Editorial – Construction Project Organising: Towards a Theoretical and Practical Understanding xvSimon Addyman and Hedley Smyth Summary of Chapters xxxix Part I The Cultural Landscape 1 1 Construction Cultures: Sources, Signs, and Solutions of Toxicity 3Stewart Clegg, Martin Loosemore, Derek Walker, Alfons van Marrewijk and Shankar Sankaran 1.1 Introduction 3 1.2 Organisational Culture 3 1.3 Toxic Project Culture 5 1.4 Sources of Toxic Project Culture 5 1.5 Detoxing a Project Culture 7 1.6 Stimulating Reflection and Learning 9 1.7 Conclusions 12 References 12 2 Organising Occupational Health, Safety, and Well-Being in Construction: Working to Rule or Working Towards Well-Being? 17Jing Xu and Yanga Wu 2.1 Introduction 17 2.2 Safety Management: A Tale of Two Paradigms 18 2.3 Working Towards Occupational Health and Well-Being in Construction 19 2.3.1 The Structuration of Occupational Health and Well-Being 20 2.4 Methods 20 2.5 Findings 21 2.5.1 Signification and Communication of OHW 21 2.5.1.1 Interpretations of OHW 21 2.5.1.2 The Meaning of OHW in Management 22 2.5.2 Domination and Responsibility of OHW 22 2.5.2.1 The Tensions Between Business Priorities and OHW 22 2.5.2.2 Imbalanced Power and Responsibility Between Management and Workers 23 2.5.3 Legitimation, Norms, and OHW 24 2.5.3.1 ‘Norms’ of Construction Project Business and Works 24 2.5.3.2 The Influence of ‘Norms’ on Trust and OHW 24 2.6 Discussion 25 2.7 Conclusion 27 References 28 Part II Wider Integration 31 3 Systems Integration in Construction: An Open-Ended Challenge for Project Organising 33Jennifer Whyte and Andrew Davies 3.1 Introduction 33 3.2 Challenges of Systems Integration in Construction Project Organising 35 3.2.1 Construction Projects as Interventions 35 3.2.2 Construction Projects as Evolving Phenomena 36 3.2.3 Construction Projects as Heterogeneous 37 3.3 From the Origins of Systems Integration to Its Application in Construction 39 3.3.1 Origins of Systems Integration 39 3.3.2 Systems Integration and Organisation Theory: Collaboration Through Coordination and Cooperation 40 3.3.3 Systems Integration and Construction 41 3.4 Systems Integration in Construction and Contexts of Use 42 3.5 Conclusions 45 References 46 4 Organising Project Finance 51D’Maris Coffman and John Kelsey 4.1 Introduction 51 4.2 Economic and Finance Theory 52 4.2.1 The Basis of Project Value 52 4.2.2 Sources of Forecasting Error 52 4.2.3 Why Do Firms Exist? 53 4.2.4 Managers vs. Owners and the Basis of Firm Value 53 4.3 Agency Costs and Project Governance 54 4.3.1 Governance of Large Projects to Minimise Agency Costs 54 4.3.2 The Whole Life Contract Mechanism as a Means of Minimising Agency Costs 55 4.3.3 Long-Term vs. Short-Term Risk 56 4.3.4 Project Finance as a Solution to Project Governance 56 4.3.5 UK Public–Private Finance Initiative 57 4.4 Methodology 58 4.5 Case Study: Peterborough City Hospital (National Audit Office 2012, 2013) 59 4.5.1 Background 59 4.5.2 The New Hospital 60 4.5.3 Organisational and Governance Arrangements 60 4.5.4 Operational Performance 61 4.5.5 Client–SPV Relations 62 4.6 Discussion, Lessons, and Theoretical Challenges 62 4.7 Conclusions 64 References 64 5 Organising for Digital Transformation: Ecosystems, Platforms, and Future States 69Bethan Morgan, Eleni Papadonikolaki and Tim Jaques 5.1 Introduction 69 5.2 Modularity, Platforms, and Business Ecosystems 71 5.2.1 Modularity and Industry Change 71 5.2.2 Platform Thinking 72 5.2.3 Business Models 73 5.2.4 Complexity 74 5.2.5 Business Ecosystems 75 5.3 Organising for Digitalisation: New Entrants and Incumbent Firms 77 5.4 Future States 78 5.4.1 Future State Founding Principles 79 5.4.2 The Advantages of Using Future State Thinking in the Built Environment 79 5.4.3 Using Future States to Create a Business Ecosystem 80 5.5 Conclusion 81 References 82 6 A Resilience Perspective on Governance for Construction Project Delivery 85Nils O.E. Olsson and Ole Jonny Klakegg 6.1 Introduction 85 6.2 Theoretical Background 87 6.2.1 Governance 87 6.2.2 Resilience in Different Research Areas 87 6.2.3 Resilience in Projects 88 6.2.4 Resilience and Flexibility 88 6.3 Reflections on Project Governance, Resilience, and Survival 89 6.4 Project Cases and Implications on Governance 90 6.4.1 Before Decision – Staying Alive Long Enough to Get Funding 91 6.4.1.1 Nord-Norge Line 91 6.4.2 After Decision – Staying Relevant and Delivery Through Execution 92 6.4.2.1 Venjar-Langset 92 6.4.2.2 Gardermoen Line 93 6.4.3 Non-Survival of Norwegian Railway Projects 94 6.4.3.1 High-Speed Railway 94 6.5 Discussion 94 6.5.1 Different Approaches to Resilience in Different Project Phases 94 6.5.2 Reflections on the Norwegian Railway Cases 95 6.6 Conclusions 96 References 98 Part III The Firm–Project Interface 101 7 Organising Construction Firms 103Hedley Smyth 7.1 Introduction 103 7.2 What the Literature Says 103 7.2.1 Government and Industry Reports and Their Limitations for Performance Improvement 104 7.2.2 Systems of Systems, Systems Integration, and Loose Coupling 105 7.2.3 Transactional and Transformational Business Models 106 7.2.4 Organising and Reorganising the Construction Firm 108 7.3 Methodology and Methods 109 7.4 A Range of Findings and Analysis 110 7.5 Conclusions 113 References 114 8 Aligning Construction Projects with Strategy 119Catherine Killen, Shankar Sankaran, Stewart Clegg and Hedley Smyth 8.1 Introduction 119 8.2 PPM and Strategy 120 8.3 PPM and Strategy in Construction 120 8.4 Method 121 8.5 Findings Addressing the Question ‘How Do Construction Companies Align Projects with Strategy?’ 122 8.5.1 The Nature of Strategic Resource Allocation Decisions in Construction 122 8.5.2 Strategy and Competitive Advantage 122 8.5.3 Multi-Project Management 123 8.5.4 How Is Portfolio Management Achieved in Construction Firms? 123 8.5.5 Portfolio Decision-Making – Whether and How to Bid 125 8.5.6 Flexibility and Responsiveness 125 8.5.7 Repeat Business and Resources 125 8.5.8 Challenges and Performance 126 8.6 Discussion 127 8.6.1 Strategy and Projects – A Two-Way Relationship 127 8.6.2 Internal and External Decisions Determine the Portfolio 129 8.6.3 Flexibility and Responsiveness 129 8.6.4 PPM in Practice in Construction 129 8.7 Conclusions and Recommendations 131 References 132 9 Urban Development Project Ecologies – An Organisational Routines Perspective 135Susanna Hedborg 9.1 Introduction 135 9.2 Urban Development as a Project Ecology 136 9.3 Project Ecologies and Its Temporary Organising 137 9.4 Organisational Routines in a Project Context 137 9.5 The Case of an Urban Development District 138 9.5.1 Case Background 138 9.5.2 A Note on Collecting and Analysing the Material 139 9.6 Illustrative Examples of Inter-Project Routines 140 9.6.1 The Procuring Together Routine 141 9.6.2 The Meeting Routine 141 9.7 Discussion 142 9.7.1 Project Ecologies Further the Understanding of Construction Project Contexts 142 9.7.2 Inter-Project Routines Influence on Urban Development Project Ecologies 143 9.7.3 The Client Role in Urban Development Project Ecologies 144 9.8 Concluding Thoughts and Further Development 145 References 145 10 Reflective Practices and Learning in Construction Organisations via Professional Communities of Practice 149Meri Duryan 10.1 Introduction 149 10.2 Reflective Practice 150 10.2.1 Reflective Practice in Construction Organisations 151 10.3 Communities of Practice as Boundary Spanners in Construction Firms 152 10.3.1 Reflective Practice in Communities of Practice 153 10.4 Methodology and Methods 153 10.5 Findings and Discussion 155 10.5.1 Professional Communities of Practice 155 10.5.2 Reflective Practice 159 10.6 Conclusions 161 References 162 Part IV Inside the Project 165 11 The Use of Collaborative Space and Socialisation Tensions in Inter- Organisational Construction Projects 167Kirsi Aaltonen and Virpi Turkulainen 11.1 Introduction 167 11.2 Theoretical Background 168 11.2.1 The Origins of Co-Locational Spaces and Their Use in Construction Projects 168 11.2.2 The Use and Outcomes of Collaborative Spaces in Inter-Organisational Construction Projects 169 11.2.3 Socialisation in Inter-Organisational Projects 170 11.3 Methodology 171 11.4 Findings 172 11.4.1 The Spatial Design of the Physical Collaborative Space 172 11.4.2 Facilitation of Collaborative Working in the Collaborative Space 175 11.4.3 Emergent Boundaries Between Full- and Part-Time Members of the Collaborative Space 176 11.4.4 Development of a Shared Identity in the Collaborative Space 177 11.5 Discussion and Conclusions 178 11.5.1 Theoretical Contribution and Implications 179 11.5.2 Further Research 180 11.5.3 Managerial Implications 181 References 181 12 On the Synchronisation of Activities During Construction Projects 185Tuomas Ahola 12.1 Introduction 185 12.2 Synchronisation of Activities in Construction Projects 186 12.2.1 Task Interdependencies and Synchronisation 186 12.2.2 Synchronisation of Activities in Temporary Organising 187 12.3 Processes by Which Synchronisation Is Lost and Restored 188 12.4 Performance Implications of Desynchronisation 191 12.5 Factors Associated with Synchronisation in Construction Projects 193 12.6 Conclusion 195 References 197 13 Organising Beyond the Hierarchy – A Network Management Perspective 201Huda Almadhoob 13.1 Introduction 201 13.2 Social Network Analysis 202 13.3 The Case Study 203 13.3.1 Background 203 13.3.2 BSCU Project Formal Organisational Structure 204 13.4 Empirical Analysis 205 13.4.1 Clusters in BSCU Project Networks 205 13.4.2 Intra-Cluster Relationships and Decision-Making 208 13.5 Conclusion 216 References 217 14 Procurement, Collaboration, and the Role of Dialogue 221Simon Addyman 14.1 Introduction 221 14.2 Procurement and Collaborative Working Practices 222 14.3 Language and Dialogue in Organisations 223 14.4 Applying Chronotope to the Analysis of Dialogue 226 14.5 Implications for Collaborative Working Practices 228 14.6 Conclusion 231 References 232 Author Biographies 237 Index 243

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of ContentsPreface ix Series Preface xv Acknowledgments xvii Chapter 1: Introduction 1 References 12 Chapter 2: Current Waste Management Practices 13 2.1 Urbanization and Waste Generation 13 2.2 Waste Collection 20 2.2.1 Why Waste Collection is Low in Developing Countries 23 2.2.1.1 Waste Collection Flow 23 2.2.1.2 Waste Collection Vehicles and Their Capacity 25 2.2.1.3 Traffic Situation in Developing Countries 29 2.2.1.4 Trained Waste Collection Workers 30 2.2.1.5 Lack of Social Awareness and Illegal Dumping 31 2.2.1.6 Absence of Regulations and/or Lack of Interest in Implementing Them 32 2.2.2 Consequences of Having Lower Waste Collection and Associated Open Dumping 32 2.2.2.1 Polluted Water Channels/Lakes/Rivers/Oceans 33 2.2.2.2 Flash Flooding During Rainy Seasons 34 2.2.2.3 Serious Health Hazards 35 2.3 Processing and Final Disposal 36 2.3.1 Problems with Landfilling in Both Developed and Developing Countries 39 2.3.2 Problems with Open Dumping – Only in Developing Countries 43 2.3.2.1 Water Pollution 43 2.3.2.2 Air Pollution 45 2.3.2.3 Safety and Operation 47 2.4 Composting 56 2.5 Recycling 56 2.6 Waste-to-Energy (WTE) 59 2.6.1 Case Study: Reppie Waste-to-Energy (WTE) Plant in Addis Ababa, Ethiopia 61 2.7 Summary of Current Challenges of Waste Management in Developing Countries 66 References 66 Chapter 3: Case Studies – SWIS Winter School Ambassadors 69 3.1. Bangladesh 71 3.1.1. Introduction 71 3.1.2. Collection 71 3.1.3. Processing and Recycling 72 3.1.4. Final Disposal 74 3.1.5. Major Problems 74 3.2 Brazil 78 3.2.1 Introduction 78 3.2.2 Collection 79 3.2.3 Processing and Recycling 79 3.2.4 Final Disposal 80 3.2.5 Major Problems 81 3.3 Colombia 84 3.3.1 Introduction 84 3.3.2 Collection 84 3.3.3 Processing and Recycling 85 3.3.4 Final Disposal 86 3.3.5 Major Problems 86 3.4 Ethiopia 89 3.4.1 Introduction 90 3.4.2 Collection 90 3.4.3 Processing and Recycling 93 3.4.4 Final Disposal 94 3.4.5 Major Problems 95 3.5 Georgia 99 3.5.1 Introduction 99 3.5.2 Collection 100 3.5.3 Processing and Recycling 100 3.5.4 Final Disposal 101 3.5.5 Major Problems 102 3.6 India 105 3.6.1 Introduction 106 3.6.2 Collection 106 3.6.2.1 Collection and Processing of Wastes 106 3.6.3 Processing and Recycling 107 3.6.4 Final Disposal 108 3.6.5 Major Problems 109 3.7 Lebanon 112 3.7.1 Introduction 112 3.7.2 Collection 113 3.7.3 Processing and Recycling 113 3.7.4 Final Disposal 115 3.7.5 Major Problems 116 3.8 Mexico 118 3.8.1 Introduction 118 3.8.2 Collection 120 3.8.3 Processing and Recycling 121 3.8.4 Final Disposal 122 3.8.5 Major Problems 124 3.9 Pakistan 127 3.9.1 Introduction 127 3.9.2 Collection 128 3.9.3 Processing and Recycling 129 3.9.4 Final Disposal 133 3.9.5 Major Problems 135 3.10 Portugal 139 3.10.1 Introduction 139 3.10.2 Collection 140 3.10.3 Processing and Recycling 140 3.10.4 Final Disposal 141 3.10.5 Major Problems 141 3.11 Serbia 145 3.11.1 Introduction 146 3.11.2 Collection 146 3.11.3 Processing and Recycling 147 3.11.4 Final Disposal 147 3.11.5 Major Problems 149 3.12 UAE 151 3.12.1 Introduction 152 3.12.2 Collection 152 3.12.3 Processing and Recycling 154 3.12.4 Final Disposal 155 3.12.5 Major Problems 156 3.13 Vietnam 158 3.13.1 Introduction 158 3.13.2 Collection 159 3.13.3 Processing and Recycling 160 3.13.4 Final Disposal 160 3.13.5 Major Problems 160 3.14 Summary 165 References 166 Chapter 4: Future Directions 173 4.1 Material Flow in Sustainable Waste Management System 180 4.2 Part A: Sustainable Waste Management Framework – Waste Collection 180 4.2.1 Creating Social Awareness of Importance of Waste Collection and Management 182 4.2.2 Mixed Waste vs. Source Separated Waste 184 4.2.3 Collection Vehicles 185 4.2.4 Creation of Different Zonings for City Waste Collection 186 4.2.5 Collection Time and Frequency 187 4.2.6 Training and Creating Skilled Manpower 187 4.3 Part B: Sustainable Waste Management Framework: Waste Processing and Recycling 188 4.3.1 Material Recovery Facility (MRF) 188 4.3.1.1 Immediate Impact of China Ban 190 4.3.2 The Impact of COVID-19 on Plastic Waste 192 4.3.2.1 Generation and Classification of COVID-19 Waste 193 4.3.2.2 Issues Pertaining to the Littering of COVID-19 Waste and their Consequences 198 4.3.3 Characteristics of Waste during COVID-19 (April to December 2020) (Aurpa 2021) 200 4.3.3.1 Characteristics of MSW 200 4.3.3.2 Plastic Waste Characterization 200 4.3.3.3 The Implication of Plastic Waste Increase on Landfill Life 202 4.3.4 Reuse of Plastic Waste in Engineering Applications 203 4.3.4.1 Case Study I – The Use of Recycled Plastics Pins (RPPs) for Highway Slope Stabilization 204 4.3.4.2 Case Study II: Plastic Road 211 4.3.5 Reuse of Recycled Food Waste: Composting 218 4.4 Part C: Sustainable Waste Management Framework – Disposal/Final Destination 222 4.4.1 Anaerobic Digester 222 4.4.1.1 UTA Research on Gas Production (Latif 2021) 228 4.4.2 Temporary Disposal (Biocell) 232 4.4.2.1 UTA Research on Gas Production: Laboratory-Scale Simulated Biocell Study 236 4.4.2.2 UTA Research on Gas Production: UTA Field-Scale Biocell Operation (Rahman 2018) 245 4.4.3 Landfill Mining of Biocell Operation 256 4.4.3.1 Feasibility Study of Landfill Mining in Texas 258 4.4.3.2 Case 1 –City of Denton Landfill in Texas, USA 259 4.4.3.3 Case 2 – City of Irving Landfill in Texas, USA 271 4.4.3.4 Reuse of Mined Biocell Materials 284 4.4.4 Waste-to-Energy as a Final Disposal Option 284 4.4.4.1 Sample Calculation 286 4.4.4.2 Lower Calorific Value of Overall Waste Mass 286 4.5 SMART Facilities Challenges and Opportunities – The Case of Ethiopia 288 4.5.1 Ethiopia Country Profile 289 4.5.2 SMART Facility in Ethiopia 291 4.6 Training and Human Capacity Building 294 4.6.1 Inception of Solid Waste Institute for Sustainability (SWIS) 295 4.6.2 Training and Educating Solid Waste Professionals – ISWA-SWIS Winter School 2016 297 4.6.2.1 Program Objectives 298 4.6.2.2 Planned Program Activities to Achieve Goals 299 4.6.2.3 Program Response 302 4.6.2.4 Future Continuation of the Program 304 References 306 Chapter 5: Decision Making for Sustainable Waste Management Systems 313 5.1 Small City – Bahir Dar, Ethiopia 315 5.1.1 Waste Characteristics 316 5.1.2 Existing Waste Management Practices and Problems for Decision Making 316 5.1.3 Proposed Sustainable Waste/Resource Management Approach 318 5.2 Medium City – Guwahati, India 321 5.2.1 Waste Characteristics 322 5.2.2 Existing Waste Management Practices and Problems for Decision Making 323 5.2.3 Proposed Sustainable Waste/Resource Management Approach 324 5.3 Large City – Bogotá, Colombia 327 5.3.1 Waste Characteristics 328 5.3.2 Existing Waste Management Practices and Problems for Decision Making 329 5.3.3 Proposed Sustainable Waste/Resource Management Approach 330 References 335 Chapter 6: Summary 337 Index 343

Read more less

Book SynopsisA MUST-HAVE, PRACTICAL GUIDE THAT CONNECTS SCHEDULING AND CONSTRUCTION PROJECT MANAGEMENT In A Contractor's Guide to Planning, Scheduling, and Control, an experienced construction professional delivers a unique and effective approach to the planning and scheduling responsibilities of a construction project manager, superintendent, or jobsite scheduler. The author describes the complete scheduling cycle, from preconstruction and scheduling through controls and closeout, from the perspective of real-world general contractors and scheduling professionals. Filled with tools and strategies that actually help contractors build projects, and light on academic jargon and terminology that's not used in the field, the book includes examples of real craft workers and subcontractors, like electricians, carpenters, and drywallers, to highlight the concepts discussed within. Finally, an extensive appendix rounds out the book with references to additional resources for the readTable of ContentsList of Companion Website Materials xv List of Figures and Tables xvii Preface xxi Acknowledgments xxii List of Abbreviations xxv Part I Introductory Topics 1 Chapter 1 Introduction 3 1.1 Schedulers 4 1.2 Schedule types 5 1.3 Introduction to the book 8 1.4 Introduction to the case study 11 1.5 Summary 12 1.6 Review questions 12 Chapter 2 Construction Management 15 2.1 Introduction 15 2.2 Delivery and procurement methods 16 Traditional General Contractor Delivery 16 Construction Management Delivery 17 Part II Planning 33 Chapter 3 Preconstruction 35 Design- Build Delivery 18 Procurement 18 2.3 Contracts 19 2.4 Pricing 20 2.5 Estimating 20 2.6 Project management 24 2.7 General contractor organizations 25 Contractor Team Member Responsibilities 26 2.8 Summary 29 2.9 Review questions 31 2.10 Exercises 31 3.1 Introduction 35 3.2 Preconstruction phase 36 Design Phases 37 3.3 Preconstruction services 38 Budget Estimating 39 Scheduling 39 Constructability Review 42 Partnering 43 Building Information Modeling 44 Sustainable Construction 45 Environmental Compliance45 Planning 46 3.4 Preconstruction contracts 47 3.5 Preconstruction fees 48 3.6 Summary 49 3.7 Review questions 50 3.8 Exercises 51 Chapter 4 Schedule Planning 53 4.1 Introduction 53 4.2 Planning elements 54 Activities 57 4.3 Work breakdown structure 58 Project Item List 59 4.4 Logic 61 Relationships 62 Lag 63 Administrative Restraints 65 4.5 Resources 67 4.6 Variables 68 Interruptions 70 Logic Tools 70 4.7 Collaboration 73 4.8 First draft 74 Bar Chart 74 4.9 Summary 75 4.10 Review questions 76 4.11 Exercises 76 Chapter 5 Lean Construction Planning 79 5.1 Introduction 79 5.2 Activity- based costing 80 5.3 Lean construction 81 Target Value Design 82 Just- In- Time Deliveries 84 Last Planners 84 Pull Planning 85 5.4 Value engineering 87 5.5 Subcontractors and suppliers 88 5.6 Supply chain material management 89 Off- Site Prefabrication 89 Local Material Purchases 90 5.7 Jobsite laydown and material handling 90 5.8 Scheduling lean 91 5.9 Summary 92 5.10 Review questions 94 5.11 Exercises 94 Chapter 6 Contract and Time Considerations 95 6.1 Introduction 95 6.2 Contract documents 95 Potential Contract Documents 98 6.3 Contract language 99 Contractual Terms 100 Liquidated Damages 100 Float 102 6.4 Schedule inclusion 102 Subcontract Agreements 102 6.5 Contractual schedule format 103 6.6 Contractual timeline 104 Commencement 104 Duration 105 Work Days 105 Completion 105 Occupancy Considerations 106 6.7 Risk analysis 108 6.8 Summary 109 6.9 Review questions 110 6.10 Exercises 110 Part III Scheduling 111 Chapter 7 Schedule Types 113 7.1 Introduction 113 7.2 Bar charts 115 7.3 Arrow diagramming method 117 7.4 Precedence diagramming method 118 7.5 Contract schedules 121 7.6 Short- interval schedules 123 7.7 Specialty schedules 124 7.8 Schedule format 127 7.9 Summary 128 7.10 Review questions 129 7.11 Exercises 129 Chapter 8 Schedule Development Process 131 8.1 Introduction 131 8.2 Schedule planning 132 8.3 Schedule development 133 Process 134 Activities 134 Restraints 137 Durations 138 Time 140 Constraints 142 Presentation 142 8.4 Summary schedule 145 8.5 Schedule concepts 146 8.6 Summary 147 8.7 Review questions 148 8.8 Exercises 148 Chapter 9 Schedule Calculations 151 9.1 Introduction 151 Precalculation Refresher 151 9.2 Forward pass 153 9.3 Backward pass 156 9.4 Float 159 Total Float 159 Free Float 161 Strategies 162 9.5 Critical path 164 9.6 Summary 165 9.7 Review questions 166 9.8 Exercises 166 Chapter 10 Resource Balancing 169 10.1 Introduction 169 10.2 Resource allocation 170 10.3 Balancing, not leveling 171 10.4 Labor productivity 172 Construction Crews 175 Overtime Affects 178 10.5 Indirect resources 182 Jobsite General Conditions 182 Construction Equipment 182 Home Office Resources 184 10.6 Reporting 185 10.7 Summary 186 10.8 Review questions 187 10.9 Exercises 187 Chapter 11 Cash Flow Schedule 189 11.1 Introduction 189 11.2 Cash flow schedule process 190 Cost-loaded Schedule 191 Cash Flow Curve 194 11.3 Jobsite expenditures 196 Jobsite Revenue 197 11.4 Net cash flow and impacts to home office 198 Methods to Improve Cash Flow 198 11.5 Summary 200 11.6 Review questions 200 11.7 Exercises 201 Chapter 12 Schedule Technology 203 12.1 Introduction 203 12.2 Software advantages 204 12.3 Microsoft Excel 206 12.4 Microsoft Project 208 12.5 Primavera Project Planner 209 12.6 Touchplan 210 12.7 Other technology tools 213 PowerProject by Atlas 213 Smartsheet 213 Building Information Modeling 213 Bluebeam 214 12.8 Software shortcomings 215 12.9 Summary 217 12.10 Review questions 218 12.11 Exercises 218 Part IV Project Controls 219 Chapter 13 Schedule Control 221 13.1 Introduction 221 13.2 Schedule control tools 222 13.3 Schedule control techniques 223 13.4 Contract schedule: Status, update and/or revise 225 Schedule Status 225 Schedule Updates 228 Schedule Revisions 231 Recovery Schedules 232 13.5 Three- week look- ahead schedules 233 To- Do Lists 235 13.6 Summary 237 13.7 Review questions 239 13.8 Exercises 239 Chapter 14 Scheduling Tools 241 14.1 Introduction 241 14.2 Submittal schedule 242 Types of Submittals 244 Submittal Processing 244 14.3 Project management scheduling tools 248 Pay Requests 248 Monthly Fee Forecast 248 Float Management 249 As- built Schedule 250 14.4 Site supervision scheduling tools 250 Pull Schedules 251 Concrete Pour Schedules 251 Equipment Schedule 252 Tower Crane Schedules 254 Daily Job Diary 254 14.5 Reports 256 14.6 Technology tools 258 Building Information Modeling 259 Resources 259 14.7 Summary 260 14.8 Review questions 261 14.9 Exercises 261 Chapter 15 Jobsite Control Systems 263 15.1 Introduction 263 15.2 Safety control 265 15.3 Cost control 266 Change Order Processing 269 Pay Request Processing 270 15.4 Quality control 270 15.5 Document control 271 15.6 Additional jobsite control systems 272 Environmental Controls 272 Traffic Control 272 Jobsite Laydown Management 273 Material Management 273 Equipment Management 274 15.7 Summary 274 15.8 Review questions 275 15.9 Exercises 275 Chapter 16 Earned Value Management 277 16.1 Introduction 277 16.2 Development of the third curve 277 16.3 Earned value as a construction management control tool 278 Schedule Status 279 Cost Status 280 16.4 Earned value indices 282 16.5 Forecasting 285 16.6 Earned value as a pay request tool 286 16.7 Summary 287 16.8 Review questions 287 16.9 Exercises 288 Chapter 17 Subcontract Management 291 17.1 Introduction 291 17.2 Subcontracted scopes of work 292 17.3 Subcontract documents 293 17.4 Subcontractor prequalification 294 Early Release of Subcontractor and Supplier Bid Packages 294 17.5 Subcontractor selection 295 17.6 Team building 296 17.7 Subcontractor management 297 Collaborative Scheduling 297 Subcontractor Controls 299 Supplier Management 301 17.8 Summary 301 17.9 Review questions 303 17.10 Exercises 303 Chapter 18 Schedule Impacts 305 18.1 Introduction 305 18.2 Time value of money 306 18.3 Time and cost trade- offs 307 18.4 As- built schedules 308 18.5 Claims 310 Sources of Claims 310 Claim Prevention 313 Claim Preparation 314 Claim Defense 316 Claim Resolution 317 18.6 Legal impacts 318 18.7 Risk management 319 18.8 PERT and other advanced scheduling methods 320 18.9 Summary 322 18.10 Review questions 324 18.11 Exercises 324 Glossary 327 References 349 Five Sample Case Studies 351 Case 40: Glazing schedule 351 Case 41: Drywall subcontractor 352 Case 42: Liquidated damages 352 Case 43: Schedule hold 354 Case 77: Subcontractor Quality Control 355 Index 357

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of ContentsList of Figures xiii List of Tables xv List of Cases xvii Preface xix 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Some Types of 'Design and Build' 1 1.2 The Nature of Design and Build 2 1.3 A Brief History of Design and Build Contracts 4 1.4 Recent Developments in Design and Build 5 1.5 How to Use This Book 6 2 Construction Contracts 7 2.1 General 7 2.2 The Structure of a Construction Contract 7 2.3 Fairness as a Concept 14 Part I 19 3 Design and Build as Originally Intended 21 3.1 The Parties' Primary Obligations Under a Design and Build Contract 21 3.2 The Employer's Representative 24 3.3 The Relationship Between the Employer's Requirements and the Contractor's Proposals 26 3.4 The Employer's Requirements 29 3.5 The Contractor's Proposals 34 3.6 The Pricing Document 41 4 Consultants and the Employer's Representative 55 4.1 Means of Appointing Consultants 56 4.2 Obligations and Services 58 5 Procurement and Tendering 73 5.1 Procurement 73 5.2 Tendering 75 5.3 Types of Tender Processes 79 5.4 Early Contractor Involvement 83 5.5 Tender Returns and Evaluation 91 5.6 Contractor Selection and Appointment 94 6 Subcontracting 97 6.1 General 97 6.2 Domestic Subcontractors 103 6.3 'Nominated' or 'Named' Subcontractors 106 6.4 Early Subcontractor Involvement 114 7 Collateral Warranties, Third-Party Rights, Bonds, and Guarantees 117 7.1 General 117 7.2 Collateral Warranties 119 7.3 Third-Party Rights 123 7.4 Bonds and Guarantees 125 8 Construction133 8.1 General 133 8.2 Commencement 135 8.3 Completion in Sections (Subdividing the WholeWorks) 138 8.4 Progress 144 8.5 Acceleration 152 8.6 Programme 156 8.7 Interim Payments 162 8.8 Variations 178 8.9 Valuation (or Assessment) of Variations 196 8.10 Extensions of Time 212 8.11 Additional Costs (Loss and Expense) 225 8.12 Testing and Defects 229 9 Concluding the Contract 243 9.1 Termination 243 9.2 Obligations Prior to Completing the Physical Works 265 9.3 Meaning of 'Completion' 269 9.4 Damages for Late Completion 278 9.5 Rectification or Completing Outstanding Works After Completion 286 9.6 Final Account 298 9.7 Resolving Disputes 313 9.8 Concluding the Contract 330 Part II 335 10 Design and Build in Its Current Form 337 10.1 Reduction of the Contractor's Design 337 10.2 Novation of Design Consultants 339 11 Common Amendments to Design and Build Contracts 347 11.1 Project-Specific Amendments 348 11.2 Amendments with a Practical Benefit 349 11.3 Increased Liability for Contractor's Design 350 11.4 Reduced Employer's Risk/Increased Employer's Benefit 352 11.5 Reduced Contractor Rights (Not Design Related) 353 11.6 Increased Benefits to the Contractor 355 11.7 Clarifications 356 12 Possible Future Development in Design and Build 359 12.1 Continuing Trend of Reducing the Extent of Contractor Design 359 12.2 Novation of Design Consultants 361 12.3 Detailed Pricing Documents 362 12.4 Detailed Procedures for Testing and Commissioning 363 12.5 CollateralWarranties (FIDIC and NEC4) 365 Appendix A JCT Design and Build Contracts Reconciliation 367 Appendix B FIDIC Yellow Book Reconciliation 381 Appendix C NEC Engineering and Construction Contract (ECC) Reconciliation 387 Index 395

Read more less

Book SynopsisARC WELDING PROCESSES HANDBOOK An applied reference, each part of this Handbook gives valuable information regarding the industry or industries where the process is commonly used as well as a description of the equipment. Written by a welding/metallurgical engineer with over 40 years of experience, Arc Welding Processes Handbook delivers the welding and materials expertise required to master complex welding processes and techniques to ensure that the task is done correctly and safely, while reinforcing an understanding of international welding standards and rules. The perfect handbook for those professionals who need an up-to-date reference to advance processes as well as those welders new to the field and need to hone their skills. Arc Welding Processes Handbook five-part treatment starts with a clear and rigorous exposition of the applications and equipment of Shielded Metal Arc Welding (SMAW) and Gas Tungsten Arc Welding (GTAW), followed by self-contained parts concerning processes Table of ContentsList of Figures xvii List of Tables xxv Foreword xxix Preface xxxi 1 Introduction to Welding Processes 1 1.1 Synopsis 1 1.2 Keywords 1 1.3 Welding 1 1.4 Defining Welding 2 1.5 Welding and Joining Processes 3 1.6 Arc Welding 3 1.6.1 Carbon Arc Welding 3 1.6.2 Shielded Metal Arc Welding (SMAW) 3 1.6.3 Gas Tungsten Arc Welding (GTAW) 4 1.6.4 Gas Metal Arc Welding (GMAW) 7 1.6.5 Submerged Arc Welding (SAW) 7 1.7 Efficiency of Energy Use 7 1.8 Welding Procedures 8 1.9 Qualification of Welders and Operators 11 2 Shielded Metal Arc Welding (SMAW) 13 2.1 Synopsis 13 2.2 Keywords 13 2.3 Introduction 13 2.4 Process Fundamentals 14 2.5 How the Process Works 15 2.6 Power Sources 16 2.6.1 Constant Current and Constant Voltage Power Source 17 2.6.2 Constant Current Curve 18 2.6.3 Constant Voltage Curve 18 2.7 AC Power Sources 18 2.7.1 The Alternator Type AC Welding Machines 19 2.7.2 Movable Coil Type Control 20 2.7.3 Movable Shunt Type Control 20 2.7.4 Movable Core (Reactor) Type of Control 20 2.7.5 Magnetic Amplifier Method of Current Control 21 2.7.6 Diode 22 2.7.7 Silicon-Controlled Rectifiers (SCRs) 23 2.7.8 Transistors 24 2.8 Direct Current Power Sources 24 2.8.1 Generator 26 2.8.2 Alternator 27 2.8.2.1 Power Source Remote Control 29 2.8.3 Installation of Welding Machines 29 2.8.3.1 Cooling System for Welding Power Sources 30 2.8.3.2 Welding Connections – Welding Cable and Electrode Holders 30 2.8.4 Electrode Holders 31 2.8.5 Arc Welding Power Source Classification by NEMA 32 2.8.5.1 Duty Cycle 33 2.8.5.2 Power Requirement 34 2.9 Welding Safety and Personal Protecting Equipment 34 2.9.1 Shields and Helmets 34 2.9.2 Optical Clarity for Welding 37 2.9.3 Other Essential Clothing for Welders 38 2.10 Covered Electrodes Used in SMAW Process 39 2.10.1 Coating Types 39 2.10.1.1 Cellulose-Coated Electrodes 40 2.10.1.2 Rutile-Coated Electrodes 40 2.10.1.3 Basic-Coated Electrodes 40 2.10.2 Portfolio of SMAW Electrode 41 2.10.3 Identification of Welding Electrode 41 2.10.4 Need for the Covered Electrode 45 2.10.5 Electrode Conditioning 45 2.11 Welding Training – Making of a Welder 47 2.11.1 Joint Design and Preparation 47 2.11.2 SMAW Welding of Plate 50 2.11.3 Making of a SMAW Welder 50 2.11.3.1 SMAW Welding Practice Step 1 51 2.11.3.2 SMAW Welding Practice Step 2 52 2.11.3.3 SMAW Welding Practice Step 3 56 2.11.4 Inspection of the Weld 57 2.11.4.1 Appearance of the Weld 57 2.11.5 Step 3 Practice 2 59 2.11.6 SMAW Welding Step 4 59 2.11.7 SMAW Welding Step 5 60 2.11.8 Set a Next Goal to Achieve 61 2.11.9 SMAW Welding of Pipes 62 2.11.9.1 Pipe Welding Step 1 62 2.11.10 Pipe Welding Technique and Pipeline Welding 67 2.11.10.1 Vertical Up Technique 69 2.11.11 In-Plant Piping 70 2.11.12 Pipeline Welding 72 2.11.12.1 Making a Root Pass 72 2.12 Welding Other Metals 74 2.12.1 SMAW Welding Aluminum 74 2.12.2 Aluminum Alloys and Their Characteristics 75 2.12.2.1 1xxx Series Alloys 75 2.12.2.2 2xxx Series Alloys 75 2.12.2.3 3xxx Series Alloys 75 2.12.2.4 4xxx Series Alloys 76 2.12.2.5 5xxx Series Alloys 76 2.12.2.6 6XXX Series Alloys 76 2.12.2.7 7XXX Series Alloys 77 2.12.3 The Aluminum Alloy Temper and Designation System 77 2.12.4 Wrought Alloy Designation System 78 2.12.5 Cast Alloy Designation 78 2.12.6 The Aluminum Temper Designation System 80 2.12.6.1 Aluminum Welding Electrodes 82 2.12.6.2 Electrical Parameters 83 2.12.7 SMAW Welding of Stainless Steel 83 2.12.8 Introduction to Stainless-Steels 84 2.12.8.1 Cutting Stainless Steel for Fabrication 84 2.12.8.2 Finishing 84 2.12.9 Fabrication of Stainless Steel 85 2.12.9.1 Why Use Stainless Steel 85 2.12.10 General Welding Characteristics 85 2.12.10.1 Protection Against Oxidation 86 2.12.11 Welding and Joining Stainless Steel 87 2.12.12 Importance of Cleaning Before and After Welding 87 2.12.13 Filler Metals 88 2.12.14 Austenitic Stainless Steels 89 2.12.14.1 Metallurgical Concerns Associated with Welding Austenitic Stainless Steels 89 2.12.14.2 Mechanical Properties of Stainless Steels 89 2.12.15 Welding of Austenitic Stainless Steels 90 2.12.16 Super-Austenitic Stainless Steels 91 2.12.17 Welding and Joining of Supper-Austenitic Stainless Steels 92 2.12.17.1 Difficulties Associated with Welding Stainless Steel 93 2.12.18 Martensitic Stainless Steels 96 2.12.18.1 Properties and Application 96 2.12.18.2 Welding Martensitic Stainless Steels 97 2.12.19 Welding Ferritic Stainless Steels 98 2.12.19.1 Properties and Application 98 2.12.20 Welding Ferritic Steel 99 2.12.21 Precipitation Hardening (PH) Stainless Steels 100 2.12.21.1 Properties and Application of Precipitation Hardening Steels 100 2.12.22 Welding Precipitation Hardened (PH) Steels 100 2.13 Welding and Fabrication of Duplex Stainless Steels 103 2.13.1 Mechanical Properties 103 2.13.2 Heat Treatment 104 2.14 SMAW Welding Nickel Alloys 106 2.14.1 Welding of Precipitation Hardenable Nickel Alloy 109 2.14.2 Welding of Cast Nickel Alloy 110 2.14.3 Nickel – Chromium Alloys 110 2.14.4 Nickel – Copper (Cupro-Nickle Alloys) 111 2.14.5 Nickel – Iron – Chromium Alloys 111 2.15 Minimizing Discontinuities in Nickel and Alloys Welds 112 2.15.1 Porosity 112 2.15.2 Weld Cracking 113 2.15.3 Stress Corrosion Cracking 113 2.15.4 Effect of Slag on Weld Metal 113 2.16 Review Your Knowledge 114 3 Gas Tungsten Arc Welding 115 3.1 Synopsis 115 3.2 Keywords 115 3.3 Introduction to Gas Tungsten Arc Welding Process 115 3.4 Process Description 117 3.5 How the Process Works 118 3.6 Process Advantages and Limitations 120 3.7 Power Sources 122 3.7.1 AC Power Sources 122 3.7.1.1 The Alternator Type AC Welding Machines 124 3.7.1.2 Movable Coil Movable Core (Reactor) 124 3.7.1.3 Magnetic Amplifier Method of Current Control 125 3.7.1.4 AC Inverters for GTAW Process 125 3.7.2 Other Control Methods 126 3.7.2.1 Wave Forms 126 3.7.2.2 Independent Amperage Control 127 3.7.2.3 Adjustable AC Output Frequency 127 3.7.2.4 Extended Balance Control 130 3.7.3 Diode 132 3.7.4 Silicon-Controlled Rectifiers (SCRs) 132 3.7.5 Transistors 133 3.7.6 A Direct Current Power Source for GTAW 134 3.7.6.1 Generator 134 3.7.6.2 Alternator 136 3.7.6.3 The Output Current 137 3.7.6.4 Duty Cycle 137 3.7.7 The Inverter Machines 138 3.8 Shielding Gases 138 3.9 Gas Regulators and Flowmeters 139 3.10 GTAW Torches, Nozzles, Collets, and Gas Lenses 141 3.10.1 Gas Lens 142 3.11 Tungsten Electrodes 145 3.11.1 Grinding of Tungsten Electrode Tips 146 3.11.2 Tungsten Grind Angles and How They Affect Weld Penetration 148 3.11.2.1 The Impact of Tungsten Tip Angles on Weld 148 3.12 Joint Design 149 3.13 Power Source Remote Control 151 3.14 Installation of Welding Machines 151 3.15 Power Source Cooling System 151 3.16 Welding Connections – Welding Cable and Welding Torch Connections 152 3.17 Welding Power Source Classification by NEMA 154 3.18 Welding Personal Protecting Equipment 155 3.19 Other Essential Clothing for Welders 156 3.20 Filler Wires Used in GTAW Process 156 3.21 Classification and Identification of Welding Wires 157 3.21.1 Designation of Aluminum Welding Wires 157 3.21.2 Aluminum Alloys and Their Characteristics 158 3.22 The Aluminum Alloy Temper and Designation System 161 3.22.1 Wrought Alloy Designation System 161 3.22.2 Cast Alloy Designation 162 3.22.3 The Aluminum Temper Designation System 162 3.23 Welding Metals Other Than Carbon and Alloy Steels 164 3.24 GTAW Welding of Aluminum 165 3.25 GTAW Welding of Stainless Steel 176 3.25.1 Introduction to Stainless-Steels 176 3.25.1.1 Cutting Stainless Steel for Fabrication 177 3.25.1.2 Finishing 177 3.25.2 Fabrication of Stainless Steel 178 3.25.3 Why Stainless Steel 178 3.25.4 General Welding Characteristics 179 3.25.5 Protection Against Oxidation 179 3.25.6 Welding and Joining 180 3.25.7 Importance of Cleaning Before and After Welding 180 3.25.8 Filler Metals 182 3.25.9 Austenitic Stainless Steels 182 3.25.9.1 Metallurgical Concerns Associated with Welding Austenitic Stainless Steels 182 3.25.9.2 Mechanical Properties of Stainless Steels 183 3.25.9.3 Welding of Austenitic Stainless Steels 183 3.25.10 Welding Super-Austenitic Stainless Steels 185 3.25.10.1 Material Properties and Applications 185 3.25.10.2 Welding and Joining of Supper-Austenitic Stainless Steels 188 3.25.10.3 Difficulties Associated with Welding Stainless Steel 189 3.25.11 Welding Martensitic Stainless Steels - Properties and Application 190 3.25.12 Welding Martensitic Stainless Steels 191 3.25.13 Welding Ferritic Stainless Steels 192 3.25.13.1 Welding Ferritic Steel 193 3.25.14 Welding Precipitation Hardening Stainless Steels 193 3.25.14.1 Welding Precipitation Hardened (PH) Steels 194 3.26 Mechanical Properties 195 3.26.1 Heat Treatment of Duplex Steels 195 3.26.2 How to Weld Duplex Stainless Steel 197 3.26.2.1 Filler Metal 197 3.26.2.2 Heat Input and Interpass Temperatures 198 3.26.2.3 Quality Checks 198 3.27 Welding Nickel Alloys 198 3.27.1 Welding of Precipitation Hardenable Nickel Alloy 200 3.27.2 Welding of Cast Nickel Alloy 200 3.27.3 Nickel – Chromium Alloys 200 3.27.4 Nickel – Copper (Cupro-Nickle Alloys) 201 3.27.5 Nickel – Iron – Chromium Alloys 202 3.27.6 Minimizing Discontinuities in Nickel and Alloys Welds 202 3.27.6.1 Porosity 203 3.27.6.2 Weld Cracking 203 3.27.6.3 Stress Corrosion Cracking 203 3.27.6.4 Effect of Inclusions on Weld Metal 204 3.28 Later Developments in GTAW Process 204 3.29 Plasma Arc Welding 204 3.30 Review Your Knowledge 207 4 Gas Metal Arc Welding 209 4.1 Synopsis 209 4.2 Keywords 209 4.3 Introduction to Gas Metal Arc Welding Process 209 4.3.1 Developmental History of GMAW Process 209 4.3.2 The Advantages of GMAW 213 4.3.2 Limitations of GMAW 213 4.4 Process Description 214 4.4.1 Gas Metal Arc Welding (GMAW) Process Introduction 214 4.4.1.1 Short Circuiting Transfer (GMAW-S) 217 4.4.1.2 Globular Transfer 221 4.4.1.3 Spray Transfer 223 4.4.1.4 Pulsed Spray Transfer Mode 224 4.4.2 Gas Metal Arc Welding: Newer Variants 229 4.5 Components of the Welding Arc 231 4.5.1 Shielding Gases for GMAW 232 4.5.1.1 Argon Gas 233 4.5.1.2 Helium Gas 234 4.5.2 Dissociation and Recombination 234 4.5.2.1 Dissociation and Recombination of CO2 Gas 234 4.5.2.2 Oxygen as Shielding Gas 234 4.5.2.3 Hydrogen Gas 235 4.5.3 Binary Shielding Gases 235 4.5.3.1 Argon + Helium 235 4.5.3.2 Argon + CO2 235 4.5.4 Shielding Gases by Transfer Mode 236 4.5.4.1 Common Short-Circuiting Transfer 236 4.5.4.2 Common Axial Spray Transfer 236 4.5.5 Ternary Gas Shielding Blends 237 4.5.5.1 Common Ternary Gas Shielding Blends 237 4.6 Effects of Variables on Welding 238 4.6.1 Current Density 241 4.6.2 Electrode Efficiencies 241 4.6.2.1 Calculation of Required Electrode Based on the Electrode Efficiency (EE) 242 4.6.3 Deposition Rate 242 4.6.4 Electrode Extension and Contact Tip to Work Distance 243 4.7 Advanced Welding Processes for GMAW 244 4.8 The Adaptive Loop 245 4.9 Advanced Waveform Control Technology 246 4.9.1 Surface Tension Transfer™ (STT™) 246 4.10 Equipment for GMAW Process 248 4.11 GMAW Power Sources 249 4.11.1 The Transformer Rectifiers 249 4.11.2 Inverters 250 4.12 Installation of Welding Machines 253 4.12.1 GMAW Torches 254 4.12.1.1 Welding Torches for Automation and Robotic GMAW 257 4.12.1.2 The Wire Drive and Accessories 257 4.12.1.3 Special Wire Feeding Considerations 258 4.12.1.4 Shielding Gas Regulation 259 4.12.1.5 Welding Cables and Other Accessories 259 4.12.1.6 Welding Personal Protecting Equipment 261 4.12.1.7 Other Essential Clothing for Welders 262 4.13 Welding Various Metals 262 4.13.1 Carbon Steel 263 4.13.2 Aluminum and Aluminum Welding 263 4.13.2.1 Understanding Aluminum 263 4.13.2.2 Designation of Aluminum Welding Wires 264 4.13.3 Aluminum Metallurgy and Grades 265 4.13.3.1 1xxx Series Alloys 265 4.13.3.2 2xxx Series Alloys 265 4.13.3.3 3xxx Series Alloys 266 4.13.3.4 4xxx Series Alloys 266 4.13.3.5 5xxx Series Alloys 266 4.13.3.6 6XXX Series Alloys 267 4.13.3.7 7XXX Series Alloys 267 4.13.4 The Aluminum Alloy Temper and Designation System 267 4.13.5 Wrought Alloy Designation System 268 4.13.6 Cast Alloy Designation 268 4.13.7 The Aluminum Temper Designation System 269 4.13.8 Welding Aluminum 271 4.13.8.1 Electrode Selection 271 4.13.9 Welding Stainless Steel with the Gas Metal Arc Process 271 4.13.10 Introduction to and Understanding Stainless Steel 274 4.13.11 Alloying Elements and Their Impact on Stainless Steel 275 4.13.11.1 The Elements that Promote Ferrite are 276 4.13.11.2 The Elements that Promote Austenite are 276 4.13.11.3 Neutral Effect Regarding Austenite & Ferrite 276 4.13.12 Weldability of Stainless Steels 276 4.13.12.1 Welding Austenitic Steels 276 4.13.12.2 Challenges of Welding Austenitic Steels 277 4.13.12.3 Sensitization 277 4.13.12.4 Intergranular Corrosion in the Heat Affected Zone Control of Carbide Precipitation 278 4.13.12.5 Hot Cracking 279 4.13.12.6 Design for Welding Stainless Steels 280 4.13.12.7 Determining and Measuring the Ferrite in Welds 281 4.13.12.8 Welding Ferritic Stainless Steels 282 4.13.12.9 Properties and Application 282 4.13.12.10 Welding Ferritic Steel 283 4.13.12.11 Precipitation Hardening Stainless Steels 283 4.13.12.12 Welding Precipitation Hardened (PH) Steels 284 4.13.12.13 Martensitic Stainless Steels 285 4.13.12.14 Properties and Application 285 4.13.12.15 Welding Martensitic Stainless Steels 285 4.13.12.16 Duplex Stainless Steels 287 4.13.12.17 Mechanical Properties 287 4.13.12.18 Heat Treatment 288 4.14 Welding Nickel Alloys 289 4.14.1 Welding of Precipitation Hardenable Nickel Alloy 291 4.14.2 Welding of Cast Nickel Alloy 291 4.14.3 Nickel – Chromium Alloys 291 4.14.4 Nickel – Copper (Cupro-Nickle Alloys) 292 4.14.5 Nickel – Iron – Chromium Alloys 293 4.15 Minimizing Discontinuities in Nickel and Alloys Welds 293 4.15.1 Porosity 294 4.15.2 Weld Cracking 294 4.15.3 Stress Corrosion Cracking 295 4.15.4 Effect of Slag on Weld Metal 295 4.16 Calculating Heat Input in Pulsed Arc GMAW 295 4.17 Review Your Knowledge 296 5 Flux Cored Arc Welding (FCAW) Process 299 5.1 Synopsis 299 5.2 Keywords 299 5.3 Introduction to Flux Cored Arc Welding (FCAW) Process 299 5.4 Process Description 301 5.4.1 Self Shielding Flux Cored Arc Welding (FCAW-S) Process 302 5.4.2 Flux Core Arc Welding (FCAW-G) Gas Shielding Process 303 5.5 Welding Wires/Electrodes 304 5.5.1 Construction of FCAW Electrodes 306 5.5.2 Sheath Thickness Variations 307 5.5.3 Important FCAW Variables 307 5.5.4 Contact Tip to Work Distance (CTWD) 307 5.5.5 Travel Angle 307 5.5.6 Single Pass Limitations 308 5.5.7 Thickness Restrictions 308 5.5.8 Charpy V-Notch Toughness Properties 308 5.5.9 Electrode Care and Packaging 308 5.6 Power Sources 310 5.6.1 Arc Voltage (Constant Voltage) 310 5.6.2 CTWD, ESO and WFS 311 5.7 Other Accessories to Power Source 313 5.7.1 Welding Cable 313 5.7.2 Semiautomatic Wire Feeders 313 5.7.3 Welding Guns 313 5.7.4 Reverse Bend Gun Tubes 313 5.7.5 Gun Angles 314 5.7.6 Polarity 314 5.8 Shielding Gases 314 5.8.1 Attributes of Shielding Gases 315 5.8.2 How Shielding Gas Works? 315 5.8.3 Properties of Shielding Gases 315 5.8.4 Limits on the Use of Inert Gases 316 5.8.5 Argon and Carbon Dioxide Gas Blends 316 5.8.6 How the Shielding Gas and Blends Affect the Mechanical Properties of the Weld Metal? 317 5.8.7 Understanding the Performance of Various FCAW-G Gases 319 5.8.7.1 Shielding Gas Cost 319 5.8.7.2 Overall Operator Appeal and Impact on Productivity 319 5.8.7.3 Typical Use of Shielding Gas 321 5.9 Welding Various Metals 321 5.9.1 Applicable Base Metals 322 5.9.2 Types of Welding Procedure Specifications (WPS) 323 5.9.3 FCAW Welding Austenitic, Ferritic Stainless Steels and Duplex Steels 323 5.9.3.1 Stainless Steel 323 5.9.3.2 Duplex Steels 324 5.9.3.3 Welding Ferritic Stainless Steels 324 5.9.3.4 Choice of Shielding Gases 324 5.9.4 FCAW Welding of Aluminum 324 5.9.5 Welding Nickel and Nickel Alloys by FCAW Process 325 5.10 Tips for Good Welding by FCAW Process 325 5.11 Test Your Knowledge 326 6 Submerged Arc Welding (SAW) 329 6.1 Synopsis 329 6.2 Keywords 329 6.3 Introduction to Submerged Arc Welding (SAW) Process 329 6.4 Operating Characteristics 333 6.5 Submerged Arc Welding (SAW) Process 334 6.5.1 Advantages and Limitations of Submerged Arc Welding 334 6.6 How the SAW Process Works 335 6.6.1 Depositing a Root Pass with SAW Process 335 6.6.2 Travel Mechanism 335 6.6.3 Variables of the SAW Process 336 6.7 SAW Process Variants 337 6.7.1 Variants Based on Use of Welding Wire 338 6.7.1.1 Multi-Wire Systems 338 6.7.1.2 Use of Hot-Wire 338 6.7.2 Adding Iron Powder to the Flux 339 6.7.3 The Utilization of a Strip Electrode for Surfacing 340 6.8 SAW Power Source and Equipment 340 6.9 Welding Heads (Gun) 340 6.10 Fluxes 341 6.10.1 Types of Granular Fluxes 341 6.10.2 Fused Fluxes versus Bonded Fluxes 342 6.10.3 Fused Fluxes 342 6.10.4 Bonded Fluxes 342 6.10.5 Neutral Fluxes 343 6.10.6 Acid Fluxes 343 6.10.7 Basic Fluxes 343 6.10.8 Selection of Specific Flux 345 6.11 Submerged Arc Welding Various Metals 345 6.12 Test Your Knowledge 347 7 Useful Data and Information Related to Welding and Fabrication 349 7.1 Common Weld Symbols and Their Meanings 349 7.2 Fillet Welds 351 7.3 Groove Welds 353 7.4 Pipe Schedule 359 7.5 Terms and Abbreviations 360 7.5.1 ASME Section IX QW 432 - F Number Table for Carbon and Alloy Steel 363 7.6 Procedure Qualification Range as Per the Material Group 364 7.7 Material Qualification Rage for Procedure Qualification Based on P-Numbers 364 7.8 Temperature Conversion 365 7.9 Useful Calculations 367 7.10 Effect of Temperature on Gas Cylinder Pressure 368 Index 369

Read more less

Book SynopsisFIRE RISK MANAGEMENT Practical methodologies to develop holistic and comprehensive fire safety strategies for buildings and industrial assets In Fire Risk Management: Principles and Strategies for Buildings and Industrial Assets, a team of distinguished authors delivers an incisive combination of risk management principles and fire safety assessment methods that offers practical strategies and workflows to prevent and mitigate today's complex fire scenarios. The book summarizes modern, risk-based approaches to fire safety, discussing fire safety objectives in terms of functional statements, performance requirements, and detailed protection measures for buildings and industrial assets towards the development of a fire safety case to timely manage risk with a systematic and structured approach throughout the life cycle of the asset. The authors introduce the fundamentals of fire safety and design principles before moving on to discuss topics like fire risk aTable of ContentsForeword xiii Preface xix Acknowledgments xxi List of Acronyms xxiii About the Companion Website xxvii 1 Introduction 1 2 Recent Fires and Failed Strategies 3 2.1 Torre dei Moro 4 2.1.1 How It Happened (Incident Dynamics) 4 2.2 Norman Atlantic 6 2.2.1 How It Happened (Incident Dynamics) 7 2.3 Storage Building on Fire 8 2.3.1 How It Happened (Incident Dynamics) 8 2.4 ThyssenKrupp Fire 9 2.4.1 How It Happened (Incident Dynamics) 9 2.5 Refinery’s Pipeway Fire 12 2.5.1 How It Happened (Incident Dynamics) 13 2.6 Refinery Process Unit Fire 16 2.6.1 How It Happened (Incident Dynamics) 17 3 Fundamentals of Risk Management 21 3.1 Introduction to Risk and Risk Management 22 3.2 ISO 31000 Standard 26 3.2.1 The Principles of RM 28 3.3 ISO 31000 Risk Management Workflow 28 3.3.1 Leadership and Commitment 28 3.3.2 Understanding the Organisation and Its Contexts 30 3.3.3 Implementation of the RM Framework 31 3.3.4 The Risk Management Process 32 3.4 The Risk Assessment Phase 32 3.5 Risk Identification 33 3.6 Risk Analysis 34 3.6.1 Analysis of Controls and Barriers 35 3.6.2 Consequence Analysis 35 3.6.3 Frequency Analysis and Probability Estimation 36 3.7 Risk Evaluation 36 3.7.1 Acceptability and Tolerability Criteria of the Risk 37 3.8 The ALARP Study 40 3.9 Risk Management over Time 43 3.10 Risk Treatment 44 3.11 Monitoring and Review 46 3.12 Audit Activities 47 3.13 The System Performance Review 47 3.14 Proactive and Reactive Culture of Organisations Dealing with Risk Management 50 3.15 Systemic Approach to Fire Risk Management 64 4 Fire as an Accident 65 4.1 Industrial Accidents 65 4.2 Fires 67 4.2.1 Flash Fire 67 4.2.2 Pool Fire 71 4.2.3 Fireball 72 4.2.4 Jet Fire 75 4.3 Boiling Liquid Expanding Vapour Explosion (BLEVE) 76 4.4 Explosion 76 4.5 Deflagrations and Detonations 78 4.5.1 Vapour Cloud Explosion 79 4.5.2 Threshold Values 79 4.5.3 Physical Effect Modelling 81 4.6 Fire in Compartments 82 5 Integrate Fire Safety into Asset Design 93 6 Fire Safety Principles 103 6.1 Fire Safety Concepts Tree 103 6.2 NFPA Standard 550 104 6.3 NFPA Standard 551 111 6.3.1 The Risk Matrix Method Applied to Fire Risk 121 7 Fire-Safety Design Resources 123 7.1 International Organisation for Standardisation (ISO) 123 7.1.1 Iso 16732 125 7.1.2 Iso 16733 133 7.1.3 Iso 23932 139 7.1.3.1 Scope and Principles of the Standard 139 7.1.4 Iso 17776 143 7.1.5 Iso 13702 143 7.2 British Standards (BS) – UK 146 7.2.1 Pas 911 147 7.2.1.1 Risk and Hazard Assessment 152 7.2.2 Bs 9999 156 7.3 Society of Fire Protection Engineers – USA (SFPE-USA) 159 7.3.1 Engineering Guide to Fire Risk Assessment 160 7.3.2 Engineering Guide to Performance-Based Fire Protection 163 7.4 Italian Fire Code 167 7.4.1 IFC Fire-Safety Design Method 168 8 Performance-Based Fire Engineering 175 9 Fire Risk Assessment Methods 189 9.1 Risk Assessment Method Selection 191 9.2 Risk Identification 192 9.2.1 Brainstorming 193 9.2.2 Checklist 194 9.2.3 What–If 194 9.2.4 Hazop 196 9.2.5 Hazid 199 9.2.6 Fmea/fmeda/fmeca 201 9.3 Risk Analysis 215 9.3.1 Fault Tree Analysis (FTA) 215 9.3.2 Event Tree Analysis (ETA) 219 9.3.3 Bow-Tie and LOPA 224 9.3.3.1 Description of the Method 226 9.3.3.2 Building a Bow-Tie 229 9.3.3.3 Barriers 232 9.3.3.4 LOPA Analysis in Bow-Tie 238 9.3.4 FERA and Explosion Risk Assessment and Quantitative Risk Assessment 243 9.3.5 Quantitative Risk Assessment (QRA) 243 9.3.6 Fire and Explosion Risk Assessment (FERA) 254 9.4 Risk Evaluation 258 9.4.1 FN Curves 258 9.4.2 Risk Indices 259 9.4.3 Risk Matrices 260 9.4.4 Index Methods 264 9.4.4.1 An Example from a “Seveso” Plant 266 9.4.5 SWeHI Method 267 9.4.6 Application 268 9.5 Simplified Fire Risk Assessment Using a Weighted Checklist 272 9.5.1 Risk Levels 273 10 Risk Profiles 281 10.1 People 282 10.2 Property 283 10.3 Business Continuity 285 10.4 Environment 287 11 Fire Strategies 289 11.1 Risk Mitigation 289 11.2 Fire Reaction 295 11.3 Fire Resistance 296 11.4 Fire Compartments 300 11.5 Evacuation and Escape Routes 303 11.6 Emergency Management 312 11.7 Active Fire Protection Measures 317 11.8 Fire Detection 323 11.9 Smoke Control 330 11.10 Firefighting and Rescue Operations 332 11.11 Technological Systems 334 12 Fire-Safety Management and Performance 339 12.1 Preliminary Remarks 339 12.2 Safety Management in the Design Phase 341 12.3 Safety Management in the Implementation and Commissioning Phase 344 12.4 Safety Management in the Operation Phase 345 13 Learning from Real Fires (Forensic Highlights) 349 13.1 Torre dei Moro 349 13.1.1 Why It Happened 349 13.1.2 Findings 350 13.1.3 Lessons Learned and Recommendations 350 13.2 Norman Atlantic 352 13.2.1 Why It Happened 352 13.2.2 Findings 355 13.2.3 Lessons Learned and Recommendations 357 13.3 Storage Building on Fire 357 13.3.1 Why It Happened 357 13.3.2 Findings 358 13.3.3 Lessons Learned and Recommendations 359 13.4 ThyssenKrupp Fire 360 13.4.1 Why It Happened 360 13.4.2 Findings 363 13.4.3 Lessons Learned and Recommendations 364 13.5 Refinery’s Pipeway Fire 366 13.5.1 Why It Happened 366 13.5.2 Findings 367 13.5.3 Lessons Learned and Recommendations 367 13.6 Refinery Process Unit Fire 367 13.6.1 Why It Happened 367 13.6.2 Findings 370 13.6.3 Lessons Learned and Recommendations 373 13.7 Fire in Historical Buildings 374 13.7.1 Introduction 374 13.7.1.1 Description of the Building and Works 376 13.7.2 The Fire 379 13.7.2.1 The Fire Damage 379 13.7.3 Fire-Safety Lessons Learned 379 13.8 Fire Safety Concepts Tree Applied to Real Events 380 14 Case Studies (Risk Assessment Examples) 387 14.1 Introduction 396 14.2 Facility Description 396 14.3 Assessment 397 14.3.1 Selected Approach and Workflow 397 14.3.2 Methods 398 14.3.3 Fire Risk Assessment 404 14.3.4 Specific Insights 406 14.4 Results 410 15 Conclusions 421 Bibliography 425 Index 435

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of Contentsxi Foreword 2 Introduction: Building Futures 5 Part 1 6 Chapter 1 On Technology I 24 Chapter 2 Morphosis’s Immaterial Moments in the Making of Things 46 Chapter 3 on Technology II 58 Chapter 4 UNStudio’s Future Lifecycles 81 Part 2 82 Chapter 5 On Ecology I 94 Chapter 6 Zaha Hadid’s Circular Economy 118 Chapter 7 on Ecology II 132 Chapter 8 Winka Dubbeldam’s Synthetic Natures 153 Part 3 154 Chapter 9 On Construction I 166 Chapter 10 Componibile, by Remote Control, GRO Architects 178 Chapter 11 on Construction II 198 Chapter 12 On Practice 206 Chapter 13 Assembly OSM’s Modular Platforms and Digital Twins 224 Chapter 14 A Practical Synopsis 235 Index

Read more less

Book SynopsisWAVE AND CURRENT POWER GENERATION Written by two well-known and respected engineers, this exciting new volume is the most up-to-date and comprehensive text on power generation from waves and water currents available today to engineers, scientists, and students, also covering the latest advances in wind power generation. As the world turns further and further away from fossil fuel energy sources, unconventional and renewable sources of energy, such as power generation from water sources and wind energy, are becoming more and more important. Hydropower has been around for decades, but this book suggests new methods that are more cost-effective and less intrusive to the environment for creating power sources from rivers, the tides, and other sources of water. Written by two experts in the field, it also covers wind energy and how it can be more efficiently harnessed. This groundbreaking new volume deals with modern problems of using wind energy, namely, jet currents in the atmosphere aTable of ContentsPreface vii 1 Renewable Energy of the World 1 2 Conversion of the Energy of Currents 59 3 Collinear Units and Their Modifications 95 4 Orthogonal Power Units 159 4.1 High Speed Orthogonal Turbines in the Infinite Flow 159 4.2 Efficiency Turbine with Different Parameters 163 4.3 One and Two Blades Turbines 173 4.4 Double-Acting Turbine 184 4.5 Many Blades Turbines with Large Diameter and Control Position of Blades 187 4.6 General 192 References 193 5 Turbines with Transverse Turbulent Energy Transfer 195 5.1 Introduction 195 5.2 Efficiency of Ordinal VAWT – Brake of Flow Within the Aggregate 201 5.3 New Design with Turbulent Vertical Mixing of Streams 202 5.4 Conclusion 215 References 215 6 Damless Hydropower and Tidal Power Plants 217 7 Tidal Power as Basis for Hydrogen Energetic 231 Conclusion 254 References 255 8 High Jet Power Plant 257 References 281 9 Power Unit with a Controlled Thrust Vector – The Base for a Vehicle of Absolute Cross-Country Capability 283 Conclusion 290 References 290 Conclusion General 290 10 High Altitude Turbine (HAT): The Future of Wind Energy 293 Harnessing the Wind Energy 293 Basic Architecture of HAT 295 Air Borne Module (ABM) 296 Tether 298 The Conversion Unit 300 Ground-Based Power Generation 300 On-Board Power Generation 302 Dirigible-Based Rotors (DBR) 303 The Launcher and Landing System 304 Balance-of-Station 304 Comparison of HAT with Conventional Wind Turbine (CWT) 304 Multidimensional Scope of HAT 306 Probable Drawbacks 307 Commercial Endeavors 308 Case Study 309 References 315 Application 1 Development and Adaptation of a Mathematical Model for a Two-Dimensional Calculation of the Flow Around an NACA0021 Airfoil Moving Along a Circular Track 319 Index 355

Read more less

Book SynopsisAN EFFECTIVE STRATEGY FOR SAFE DESIGN IN ENGINEERING AND CONSTRUCTION Practically and efficiently implement the Construction (Design and Management) Regulations in any project In An Effective Strategy for Safe Design, safety and risk professionals David England and Dr Andy Painting provide a comprehensive exploration of the design process, from initial idea to the validation of the product in service, from a product and project safety perspective. In that context, the authors show how the appropriate implementation of the requirements of the Construction (Design and Management) Regulations 2015 can not only improve health and safety on a project but can also improve the project's output as well as offering savings in both capital and operational expenditure. Readers will discover how the seemingly complex matters of regulation and risk management can be practically applied to projects via examples, illustrations, and real-world references. They will find out how safety regulation, sTable of ContentsFigures ix Tables xi Foreword xiii Introduction 1 Aims of the Book 1 Who the Book is For 2 How the Book is Structured 2 Promoting Safe Design 4 Example Case Studies 5 Nuclear Power Plant 6 Office Block 6 Warship 6 Home Printer 6 Motor Car 6 The Context of Design 7 Design and the Product Life Cycle 7 Influences on Design 9 Preventing Error 13 Safety as a Design Component 13 Introduction—Summary 15 Glossary of Terms 16 1 Elements of the Design Process 19 Initiating Need 19 Business Case 20 Requirements Capture 20 The Design Process 21 Design Feasibility 21 Design Specification 23 Full or Technical Design 23 Production Phase 24 Validating the Design 24 Lessons Learned 26 The Design Process—Summary 27 2 The Regulatory Environment 29 The Importance of Regulation in Design 29 Health and Safety at Work etc. Act 1974 31 Environmental Protection Act 1990 34 Construction (Design and Management) Regulations 2015 (CDM) 34 Provision and Use of Work Equipment Regulations 1998 40 CE Marking 41 Building Information Modelling 43 Standards 44 The “Four Cs” 46 How Construction Regulations Align with the Design Process 48 Benefits of Implementing CDM 48 Pre-construction Including Design 52 Construction Phase 53 Handover and Use 55 The Regulatory Environment—Summary 55 3 Design Process Considerations 57 Management Structure and Delegations 57 Client Relationship 58 Documentation and Management Systems 63 Communication and Dissemination 64 Project Management Methodologies 66 RIBA Plan of Work 67 PRINCE2 68 Environmental Impact and the Circular Economy 69 The Circular Economy 72 Environmental Impact—A Footnote 74 Further Considerations 75 Provision of Materials and Manufacturing Techniques 75 Ergonomics and the Work Environment 76 Space 77 Air Quality 77 Light—Quality, Quantity, Colour Temperature 78 Green Spaces 78 Anthropometry 79 Spatial Design 79 Operating and Maintenance Procedures in Service 79 Training Provision 81 Obsolescence 82 Influences Surrounding the Product Life Cycle 84 Managing/Maintaining the Design Objective 86 Design Management—Summary 88 4 The Management of Risk 89 The Importance of Managing Risk 89 Risk Management Process 90 The Risk Register 92 Influences on Risk Management 93 Risk Appetite 95 External Influencing Factors 97 Control Measures 103 Risk Identification Tools 104 Failure Modes Effects (and Criticality) Analysis 105 Fault Tree Analysis 105 Event Tree Analysis 106 Probabilistic Risk Assessment 107 Bow Tie Method 107 General Principles of Prevention and the Hierarchy of Control 108 CDM Deliverables in Support of Risk Management 114 Pre-construction Information 115 Construction Phase Plan 116 Health and Safety File 117 Competently Dealing with Risk 118 Risk Management Summary 120 5 Effective Design Strategy 123 The Importance of an Effective Design Strategy 123 Initiating Need 125 Business Case 128 “Make/Buy” and “Do Nothing” Approaches 129 Key Stakeholder Engagement 130 Responsibilities 131 Design Risk Management 131 Requirements Capture 135 Initiating the Design Process 137 Management Structure and Delegations 139 Documentation and Management Systems 140 Pre-construction Information 141 Design Feasibility 144 Environmental and External Influences 146 Design A 148 Design B 148 Design C 149 Design D 149 General Principles of Prevention 150 Design Review—Feasibility 153 Additional Stakeholder Engagement 156 Supplier Engagement 157 User Requirements 158 Design Specification 160 Regulatory Environment 160 Operating and Maintaining 161 Design Review—Specification 163 Full/Technical Design 166 Design Review—Full 166 Construction Phase Plan 167 Production 170 Production Risk Management 171 Design Review—Validation 171 Acceptance/Handover 172 Health and Safety File 173 In Service 176 Risk Management in Service 177 Training Provision 178 Operation and Maintenance 180 Repurposing 181 Disposal 182 Disposal Risk Assessment 183 Bibliography 185 Index 187

Read more less

Book SynopsisCOMPUTATIONAL FLUID DYNAMICS FOR WIND ENGINEERING An intuitive and comprehensive exploration of computational fluid dynamics in the study of wind engineering Computational Fluid Dynamics for Wind Engineering provides readers with a detailed overview of the use of computational fluid dynamics (CFD) in understanding wind loading on structures, a problem becoming more pronounced as urban density increases and buildings become larger. The work emphasizes the application of CFD to practical problems in wind loading and helps readers understand important associated factors such as turbulent flow around buildings and bridges. The author, with extensive research experience in this and related fields, offers relevant and engaging practice material to help readers learn and retain the concepts discussed, and each chapter includes accessible summaries at the end. In addition, the use of the OpenFOAM toolan open-source wind engineering applicationis explored. Computational Fluid Dynamics for Wind Table of ContentsPreface 1 Introduction 1.1 Brief Review of Steps in CFD Modeling 1.2 CFD for Wind Engineering 2 Introduction to Fluid Mechanics 2.1 Navier-Stokes Equations 2.2 Governing Equations for Compressible Newtonian Flow 2.3 Definition of Convection and Diffusion 2.4 Derivation of Bernoulli Equations 2.5 Velocity Computation in an Incompressible, Irrotational, Steady and Inviscid Flow 2.6 Non-dimensional NS Equations 2.7 Properties of Fluids 2.7.1 Properties of Air 2.7.2 Change in Velocity to Change in Energy 2.7.3 Change in Temperature to Change in Energy 2.8 Solution of Linear and Nonlinear Equations 2.9 Laminar and Turbulence Flow 2.10 Velocity Spectrum & Spectrum Considered by Different Turbulence Models 2.11 Turbulence Modeling 2.12 Law of the Wall 2.13 Boundary Layer Depth Estimation 2.14 Chapter Outcome Problems References 3 Finite Difference Method 3.1 Introduction to Finite Difference Method 3.2 Example for 2D Potential Problem and Solution of Simultaneous Equations-Direct & Iterative Methods 3.3 Finite Difference Method of Approximating the Partial Differential Equation 3.3.1 Introduction to Finite Difference Method 3.3.2 Physical Problem and Modeling 3.3.3 Direct Method of Solution 3.3.4 Memory Requirements for a 100x100 Mesh 3.3.5 Iterative Method by Gauss-Siedel (GS) or Successive Over Relaxation (SOR) 3.3.6 Details of Program Pcham.f 3.3.7 Optimum Relaxation Parameter RF for SOR 3.3.8 Inviscid Flow Over a Square Cylinder or Building 3.3.9 Iterative Solvers Used in Practical Applications 3.4 Unsteady Problem-Explicit and Implicit Solution for the Wave Equation 3.4.1 Discretization of the Wave Equation by Different FDM Schemes 3.4.2 Input Preparation 3.4.3 Information Needed to Solve Unsteady Problems 3.5 Solution of the Incompressible Navier-Stokes (NS) Equations 3.6 Storage of Variables in Staggered and Non-Staggered Grid Systems 3.7 Node and Cell-Centered Storage Locations 3.8 Structured and Unstructured Grid Systems 3.9 Variable Storage Methods 3.10 Practical Comments for Solving the NS equation 3.11 Chapter Outcome Problems References 4 Introduction to Wind Engineering 4.1 Wind Velocity Profile Due to Ground Roughness and Height 4.1.1 Wind Velocity with Height 4.2 Topographic Effect on Wind Speed 4.3 Wind Speed and Wind Pressure 4.4 Wind and Structure Interaction 4.4.1 Shape effect 4.4.2 Structural Dynamic Effect in the Along Wind Direction 4.4.3 Structural Dynamic Effect in the Across Wind Direction 4.5 Opening in the Building 4.6 Phenomena not Considered by the ASCE 7-16 4.7 ASCE 7-16 on Method of Calculating Wind Load Problems References 5 CFD for Turbulent Flow 5.1 Mean and Peak Pressure Coefficients from ASCE 7-16 and Need for CFD 5.2 Procedure for CFD Modeling 5.3 Need for Non-dimensional Flow Modeling 5.4 Flow Over 2D Building & Flow Over an Escarpment 5.5 Pressure on the Texas Tech University (TTU) Building Without Inflow Turbulence 5.5.1 Mathematical & Numerical Modeling 5.5.2 Detail of the TTU Building and the Computational Region 5.5.3 Grid Generation 5.5.4 Time Step and Total Time to Run 5.5.5 Details of Program yif2.f 5.5.6 Files Needed to Run the Program 5.5.7 Input Data File-yif-i.txt 5.5.8 Output Detail 5.5.9 Screen-Writing 5.5.10 File Detail: yif-o.plt 5.5.11 File Detail: yif-o2.plt 5.5.12 File Detail: yif-o3.plt 5.5.13 File Detail: yif-p.plt 5.5.14 File Detail: prcon.plt 5.6 Unsteady Flow over Building 5.6.1 Pressure on the TTU Building with Inflow Turbulence 5.6.2 Inflow Turbulence Generation Methods 5.6.3 Inflow Turbulence Effect on Flow and Pressure without Building 5.6.4 Computation of Wind Spectrum Using the Program yif2.f 5.6.5 Peak Pressure on TTU Building Using Inflow Turbulence 5.7 Flow Around a Cylinder and Practical Relevance to Bridge Aerodynamics 5.8 Chapter Outcome Problems References 6 Advanced Topics 6.1 Grid Generation for Practical Applications 6.1.1 Flow Around Complex Building and Bridge Shapes 6.2 Structural Aeroelasticity and Structural Dynamics 6.2.1 Fluid Structure Interaction (FSI) Methods 6.2.2 Moving Grid for FSI Computation 6.2.3 Vortex Shedding 6.2.4 Galloping of a Rectangular Cylinder 6.2.5 Bridge Aerodynamics 6.2.5.1 Fixed Bridge Computation 6.2.5.2 Movable Bridge Computation for Critical Flutter Velocity Using Moving Bridge 6.2.5.3 Estimation of Negative Damping Coefficient of a Bridge Considering the Response as a Free Vibration 6.3 Inflow Turbulence by Body Forcing 6.4 CFD for Improving Wind Turbine Performance and Siting and Wind Tunnel Design 6.4.1 Actuator Disc Method (ADM) 6.4.2 Actuator Line Method (ALM) 6.4.3 Multiple Reference Frame 6.4.4 Sliding Mesh Model or Rigid Body Motion Model 6.4.5 Wind Tunnel Flow Modeling and Design 6.4.6 Improving Wind Turbine Performance 6.5 Tornado-Structure Interaction 6.5.1 Tornado Models for Engineering Applications 6.5.2 Analytical Vortex Model 6.5.3 Vortex Generation Chamber Models 6.5.3.1 Stationary Vortex Chamber 6.5.3.2 Moving Vortex Chamber 6.6 Wind Environment Around Buildings 6.7 Pollutant Transport Around Buildings 6.8 Parallel Computing for Wind Engineering 6.9 Chapter Outcome Problems References 7 Introduction to OpenFOAM Application to Wind Engineering 7.1 Introduction to OpenFOAM and ParaView for Wind Engineering 7.1.1 OpenFOAM for Wind Engineering 7.1.2 Grid Generation 7.1.3 Visualization 7.2 Installation of OpenFOAM, ParaView and Running a Sample File 7.2.1 Installation of OpenFOAM and ParaView 7.2.2 Running a Problem Using OpenFOAM 7.3 CFD Solvers and Explanation of Input File for Flow Around a Cube 7.3.1 Numerical Schemes and Solvers for the NS equation 7.3.2 Flow Around a Cube Using Uniform Inflow 7.3.3 Detail of ‘constant’ Directory 7.3.4 Detail of ‘0’ Directory 7.3.5 Grid Generation Using blockMesh 7.3.6 Detail of ‘fvSchemes’ File 7.3.7 Detail of ‘fvSolution’ File 7.3.8 Detail of ‘controlDict’ File 7.3.9 Time Variation of Data 7.3.10 Space Data Retrieval from ParaView 7.4 Visualization Using ParaView 7.5 Analysis of Flow Over Cube Data for Uniform Flow at the Inlet 7.6 Computation of Turbulent Flow Over a Cube 7.6.1 Detail of ‘constant’ Directory 7.6.2 Detail of ‘system’ Directory 7.6.3 Inflow Details 7.7 Multilevel Mesh Resolution Using snappyHexMesh Mesh Generator in OpenFOAM 7.8 Challenges in Using OpenFOAM 7.9 Summary and Conclusions 7.10 Chapter Outcome Problems References Appendices A.1 Tecplot for Visualization A.2 Random Process for Wind Engineering References A.3 Direct Solution of Ax=b by A-1

Read more less

Book SynopsisRENEWABLE AND EFFICIENT ELECTRIC POWER SYSTEMS Join the energy revolutionthis comprehensive resource offers quantitative and practical approaches for designing a sustainable, 21st-century electricity system, covering renewable generation technologies, conventional power plants, energy efficiency, storage, and microgrids. Renewable and Efficient Electric Power Systems dives into the fundamentals of modern electricity systems, introducing key technologies, economic and environmental impacts, and practical considerations for energy and climate professionals. The book explains the science and engineering underlying renewable energyincluding solar, wind, and hydropoweralong with an expanded set of key energy technologies such as fuel cells, batteries, and hydrogen. This updated edition prepares readers to participate in the world's ongoing efforts to decarbonize the electricity sector and move toward a more sustainable future. The book covers foundational knowlTable of ContentsAbout the Authors xv 1 The US Electric Power Industry 1 1.1 Electromagnetism: The Technology Behind Electric Power 2 1.2 The Early Battle Between Edison and Westinghouse 3 1.3 The Regulatory Side of Electric Utilities 5 1.3.1 The Public Utility Holding Company Act of 1935 6 1.3.2 The Public Utility Regulatory Policies Act of 1978 7 1.3.3 Utilities and Nonutility Generators 8 1.3.4 Opening the Grid to NUGs 9 1.3.5 The Emergence of Competitive Markets 11 1.4 Electricity Infrastructure: The Grid 15 1.4.1 The North American Electricity Grid 17 1.4.2 Balancing Electricity Supply and Demand 18 1.4.3 Grid Stability 23 1.4.4 Industry Statistics 27 1.5 Electric Power Infrastructure: Generation 32 1.5.1 Basic Steam Power Plants 33 1.5.2 Coal-Fired Steam Power Plants 34 1.5.3 Gas Turbines 38 1.5.4 Combined-Cycle Power Plants 39 1.5.5 Integrated Gasification Combined-Cycle Power Plants (IGCC) 40 1.5.6 Nuclear Power 42 1.6 Financial Aspects of Conventional Power Plants 46 1.6.1 Annualized Fixed Costs 46 1.6.2 The Levelized Cost of Energy (LCOE) 48 1.6.3 Screening Curves 51 1.6.4 Load Duration Curves 52 1.6.5 Including the Impact of Carbon Costs and Other Externalities 56 1.7 Summary 58 Problems 58 References 63 2 Basic Electric and Magnetic Circuits 69 2.1 Introduction to Electric Circuits 69 2.2 Definitions of Key Electrical Quantities 70 2.2.1 Charge 70 2.2.2 Current 71 2.2.3 Kirchhoff’s Current Law 73 2.2.4 Voltage 74 2.2.5 Kirchhoff’s Voltage Law 75 2.2.6 Power 76 2.2.7 Energy 76 2.2.8 Summary of Principal Electrical Quantities 77 2.3 Idealized Voltage and Current Sources 77 2.3.1 Ideal Voltage Source 78 2.3.2 Ideal Current Source 79 2.4 Electrical Resistance 79 2.4.1 Ohm’s Law 79 2.4.2 Resistors in Series 80 2.4.3 Resistors in Parallel 81 2.4.4 The Voltage Divider 83 2.4.5 Wire Resistance 85 2.5 Capacitance 90 2.6 Magnetic Circuits 93 2.6.1 Electromagnetism 93 2.6.2 Magnetic Circuits 94 2.7 Inductance 98 2.7.1 Physics of Inductors 98 2.7.2 Circuit Relationships for Inductors 100 2.8 Transformers 104 2.8.1 Ideal Transformers 104 2.8.2 Magnetization Losses 108 Problems 112 3 Fundamentals of Electric Power 117 3.1 Effective Values of Voltage and Current 117 3.2 Idealized Components Subjected to Sinusoidal Voltages 121 3.2.1 Ideal Resistors 121 3.2.2 Idealized Capacitors 123 3.2.3 Idealized Inductors 126 3.2.4 Impedance 128 3.3 Power Factor 132 3.3.1 The Power Triangle 134 3.3.2 Power Factor Correction 135 3.4 Three-Wire, Single-Phase Residential Wiring 138 3.5 Three-Phase Systems 141 3.5.1 Balanced, Wye-Connected Systems 141 3.5.2 Delta-Connected, Three-Phase Systems 148 3.6 Synchronous Generators 149 3.6.1 The Rotating Magnetic Field 151 3.6.2 Phasor Model of a Synchronous Generator 153 3.7 Transmission and Distribution 155 3.7.1 Resistive Losses in T&D 156 3.7.2 Importance of Reactive Power Q in T&D Systems 159 3.7.3 Impacts of P and Q on Line Voltage Drop 161 3.8 Power Quality 164 3.8.1 Introduction to Harmonics 165 3.8.2 Total Harmonic Distortion 169 3.8.3 Harmonics and Overloaded Neutrals 169 3.8.4 Harmonics in Transformers 172 3.9 Power Electronics 173 3.9.1 AC-to-DC Conversion 173 3.9.2 DC-to-DC Conversions 176 3.9.3 DC-to-AC Inverters 182 3.10 Back-To-Back Voltage-Source Converter 184 Problems 185 References 192 4 The Solar Resource 193 4.1 The Solar Spectrum 193 4.2 The Earth’s Orbit 197 4.3 Altitude Angle of the Sun at Solar Noon 200 4.4 Solar Position at Any Time of Day 203 4.5 Sun Path Diagrams for Shading Analysis 207 4.6 Shading Analysis Using Shadow Diagrams 210 4.7 Solar Time and Civil (Clock) Time 213 4.8 Sunrise and Sunset 216 4.9 Clear-Sky Direct-Beam Radiation 219 4.10 Total Clear-Sky Insolation on a Collecting Surface 223 4.10.1 Direct Beam Radiation 223 4.10.2 Diffuse Radiation 225 4.10.3 Reflected Radiation 227 4.10.4 Tracking Systems 229 4.11 Monthly Clear-Sky Insolation 237 4.12 Solar Radiation Measurements 240 4.13 Solar Insolation Under Normal Skies 245 4.13.1 TMY Insolation on a Solar Collector 245 4.14 Average Monthly Insolation 248 Problems 256 References 261 5 Photovoltaic Materials and Electrical Characteristics 263 5.1 Introduction 263 5.2 Basic Semiconductor Physics 266 5.2.1 The Band-Gap Energy 267 5.2.2 Band-Gap Impact on PV Efficiency 271 5.2.3 The p–n Junction 274 5.2.4 The p–n Junction Diode 277 5.2.5 A Generic PV Cell 279 5.3 PV Materials 280 5.3.1 Crystalline Silicon 280 5.3.2 Amorphous Silicon 284 5.3.3 Gallium Arsenide 286 5.3.4 Cadmium Telluride 287 5.3.5 Copper Indium Gallium Selenide (CIGS) 288 5.3.6 Emerging PVs 289 5.4 Equivalent Circuits for PV Cells 290 5.4.1 The Simplest Equivalent Circuit 291 5.4.2 A More Accurate Equivalent Circuit for a PV Cell 294 5.5 From Cells to Modules to Arrays 298 5.5.1 From Cells to a Module 299 5.5.2 From Modules to Arrays 301 5.6 The PV I–V Curve Under Standard Test Conditions 302 5.7 Impacts of Temperature and Insolation on I–V Curves 305 5.8 Shading Impacts on I–V Curves 307 5.8.1 Physics of Shading 308 5.8.2 Bypass Diodes and Blocking Diodes for Shade Mitigation 312 5.9 Maximum Power Point Trackers 315 5.9.1 The Buck–Boost Converter 315 5.9.2 MPPT Controllers 319 Problems 322 References 328 6 Photovoltaic Systems 331 6.1 Introduction 331 6.2 Physical Components in a Behind-the-Meter, Grid-Connected System 331 6.2.1 Microinverters 334 6.2.2 Using Space Strategically: Securing Solar Panels with Racking and Mounting Systems 336 6.3 Predicting Performance 339 6.3.1 Non Temperature-Related PV Power Derating 340 6.3.2 Temperature-Related PV Derating 345 6.3.3 The “Peak-Hours” Approach to Estimate PV Performance 347 6.3.4 Normalized Energy Production Estimates 350 6.3.5 Capacity Factors for PV Grid-Connected Systems 352 6.3.6 Practical Design Considerations 353 6.3.7 Codes and Requirements 356 6.4 PV System Economics 357 6.4.1 Net Metering and Feed-in Tariffs 357 6.4.2 PV System Costs 359 6.4.3 Amortizing Costs 362 6.4.4 Cash Flow Analysis 367 6.4.5 Residential Rate Structures 369 6.4.6 Commercial and Industrial Rate Structures 372 6.4.7 Economics of PV Systems on Commercial Buildings 374 6.4.8 Power Purchase Agreements 375 6.4.9 Utility-Scale PVs 376 6.5 Summary of System Design for Solar PV on Buildings 378 Problems 380 References 386 7 Wind Power Systems 389 7.1 Historical Development of Wind Power 389 7.2 Wind Turbine Technology: Rotors 395 7.3 Wind Turbine Technology: Generators 398 7.3.1 Fixed-Speed Synchronous Generators 399 7.3.2 The Squirrel-Cage Induction Generator 400 7.3.3 The Doubly Fed Induction Generator 402 7.3.4 Variable-Speed Synchronous Generators 403 7.4 Power in the Wind 405 7.4.1 Temperature and Altitude Correction for Air Density 407 7.4.2 Impact of Tower Height 410 7.5 Wind Turbine Power Curves 413 7.5.1 The Betz Limit 413 7.5.2 Idealized Wind Turbine Power Curve 417 7.5.3 Real Power Curves 418 7.5.4 IEC Wind Turbine Classifications 422 7.5.5 Measuring the Wind 423 7.6 Average Power in the Wind 424 7.6.1 Discrete Wind Histogram 424 7.6.2 Wind Power Probability Density Functions 428 7.6.3 Weibull and Rayleigh Statistics 429 7.6.4 Average Power in the Wind with Rayleigh Statistics 431 7.6.5 Wind Power Maps and Classifications 433 7.7 Estimating Wind Turbine Energy Production 435 7.7.1 Wind Speed Cumulative Distribution Function 435 7.7.2 Using Real Power Curves with Weibull Statistics 439 7.7.3 A Simple Way to Estimate Capacity Factors 445 7.8 Wind Farms 450 7.8.1 Onshore Wind Power Potential 450 7.8.2 Curtailment and Transmission 458 7.8.3 Offshore Wind Farms 458 7.9 Wind Turbine Economics 465 7.9.1 Annualized Cost of Electricity from Wind Turbines 465 7.9.2 LCOE with MACRS and PTC 468 7.9.3 Debt and Equity Financing of Wind Energy Systems 473 7.10 Environmental Impacts of Wind Turbines 473 Problems 476 References 481 8 More Renewable Energy Systems for Electricity Generation 487 8.1 Introduction 487 8.2 Concentrating Solar–Thermal Power Systems 487 8.2.1 Carnot Efficiency for Heat Engines 488 8.2.2 Direct Normal Irradiance (DNI) 491 8.2.3 Condenser Cooling for CSP Systems 494 8.2.4 Thermal Energy Storage for CSP 495 8.2.5 Linear Parabolic Trough Systems 499 8.2.6 Solar Central Receiver Systems (Power Towers) 501 8.2.7 Linear Fresnel Reflectors (LFRs) 504 8.2.8 Solar Dish-Stirling (Dish/Engine) Power Systems 505 8.2.9 Summarizing CSP Technologies 509 8.3 Wave Energy Conversion 512 8.3.1 The Wave Energy Resource 512 8.3.2 Wave Energy Conversion Technology 517 8.3.3 Predicting WEC Performance 518 8.3.4 A Future for Wave Energy 520 8.4 Tidal Power 521 8.4.1 Tidal Current Power 522 8.4.2 Origin of the Tides 523 8.4.3 Estimating In-stream Tidal Power 525 8.4.4 Estimating Tidal Energy Delivered 528 8.5 Hydroelectric Power 531 8.5.1 Hydropower Configurations 532 8.5.2 Basic Principles 534 8.5.3 Turbines 536 8.5.4 Accounting for Losses 538 8.5.5 Measuring Flow for a Micro-Hydro System 541 8.5.6 Electrical Aspects of Small-scale Hydro 542 8.6 Pumped Storage Hydro 543 8.7 Biomass for Electricity 546 8.7.1 Is Biomass a Carbon-Neutral Resource? 547 8.7.2 Fuel Types for Electricity Generation 548 8.8 Geothermal Power 551 8.8.1 Resource Sites 552 8.8.2 Energy Extraction 553 8.8.3 Summary of Geothermal Power 554 Problems 556 References 560 9 Mainstreaming Energy Efficiency as a Renewable Resource 569 9.1 Introduction 569 9.2 Efficiency Versus Conservation 570 9.3 Energy Efficiency at Different Scales 571 9.3.1 Energy Efficiency of Countries 571 9.3.2 Energy Efficiency of Companies 572 9.3.3 Energy Efficiency of Cities and Buildings 572 9.3.4 Energy Efficiency of Equipment 573 9.4 Benefits of Energy Efficiency 575 9.5 Building Energy Efficiency 576 9.5.1 Building Design: Passive and Active Strategies 576 9.5.2 Efficient Operations: Commissioning, Monitoring, and Energy Management Systems 585 9.5.3 Integrating Renewable Energy 585 9.6 Policy and Regulation for Energy-Efficient Buildings 586 9.7 Smart Grid 588 9.7.1 Automating Distribution Systems 589 9.7.2 Volt/VAR Optimization 589 9.7.3 Better Control of the Grid 591 9.7.4 Advanced Metering Infrastructure (AMI) 593 9.7.5 Demand Response (DR) 594 9.7.6 Dynamic Dispatch 596 9.8 Electricity Storage 598 9.9 Establishing Demand-Side Management Programs 598 9.9.1 Disincentives Caused by Traditional Ratemaking 600 9.9.2 Necessary Conditions for Successful DSM Programs 601 9.9.3 Cost-Effectiveness Measures of DSM 603 9.10 Economics of Energy Efficiency 605 9.10.1 Energy Conservation Supply Curves 605 9.11 Reducing Carbon: Greenhouse Gas Abatement Curves 608 9.12 District Heating and District Cooling 610 9.13 Combined Heat and Power Systems for Buildings and Districts 612 9.13.1 CHP Efficiency Measures 612 9.13.2 Economics of Combined Heat and Power (CHP) 614 9.14 Technologies Used in CHP/Cogeneration Plants 617 9.14.1 HHV and LHV 617 9.14.2 Microturbines 619 9.14.3 Reciprocating Internal Combustion Engines 621 9.15 Data and Energy 623 9.15.1 Building Operations 624 9.15.2 Multi-Building Operations and Planning 625 9.15.3 City Climate Action 625 9.15.4 Data Centers and the IT Sector 626 Problems 629 References 633 10 Energy Storage: Batteries, Fuel Cells, and Hydrogen 639 10.1 Ensuring Resource Adequacy 640 10.2 The Need for Energy Storage 641 10.3 Battery Basics 642 10.4 Lithium-Ion Batteries 644 10.5 Emerging Battery Technologies 646 10.5.1 Silicon Anodes 646 10.5.2 Lithium-Metal Batteries 647 10.5.3 Solid-State Batteries 648 10.6 Beyond the Cell: Producing Battery Modules and Packs 648 10.6.1 Thermal Safety 651 10.7 The Big Picture: Diverse Applications for Li-Ion Batteries 652 10.8 Lead–Acid Batteries 654 10.8.1 Basics of Lead–Acid Batteries 654 10.8.2 Battery Chemistry of Lead–Acid Batteries 656 10.9 Battery Storage Capacity 6.5.7 659 10.10 Coulombic Efficiency Instead of Energy Efficiency 663 10.11 Battery Systems for Buildings 664 10.11.1 Commercial Buildings 666 10.11.2 Operating to Maximize Cost Savings and Financial Benefits 668 10.11.3 Incentives and Regulations for Energy Storage 669 10.12 Carbon Savings 670 10.13 Utility-Scale Batteries 674 10.13.1 Flow Batteries 678 10.13.2 Iron–Air Batteries for Long-Duration Energy Storage 681 10.13.3 Sodium–Sulfur Batteries 682 10.14 Dynamic Dispatch and Grid Storage with Electric Vehicle Fleets 682 10.15 Hydrogen, Fuel Cells, Electrolyzers, and Prospects for Long-Term Storage 686 10.15.1 Fuel Cells 687 10.15.2 Historical Development 688 10.15.3 Basic Operation of Fuel Cells 688 10.15.4 Fuel Cell Thermodynamics: Enthalpy 690 10.15.5 Entropy and the Theoretical Efficiency of Fuel Cells 694 10.15.6 Gibbs Free Energy and Fuel Cell Efficiency 697 10.15.7 Electrical Output of an Ideal Cell 698 10.15.8 Electrical Characteristics of Real Fuel Cells 699 10.15.9 Types of Fuel Cells 701 10.15.10 Producing Hydrogen 706 Problems 711 References 716 11 Microgrids 725 11.1 Introduction 725 11.2 Microgrids for Local Resilience 726 11.3 Microgrids for Off-Grid Applications 727 11.4 Off-Grid Solar PV with Battery Systems 728 11.4.1 Stand-Alone System Components 729 11.4.2 Self-Regulating Modules 731 11.4.3 Estimating the Load 733 11.4.4 Initial Array Sizing Assuming an MPP Tracker 737 11.4.5 Battery Sizing for Stand-Alone Systems 738 11.4.6 Sizing an Array with No MPP Tracker 742 11.4.7 A Simple Design Template 745 11.4.8 Stand-Alone PV System Costs 749 11.5 PV-Powered Water Pumping 751 11.5.1 The Electrical Side of the System 753 11.5.2 Hydraulic Pump Curves 754 11.5.3 Hydraulic System Curves 758 11.5.4 Putting It All Together to Predict Performance 761 11.6 Distributed Energy Resources 764 Problems 764 References 768 A Energy Economics Tutorial 771 A.1 Simple Payback Period 771 A.2 Initial (Simple) Rate of Return 772 A.3 The Time Value of Money and Net Present Value 772 A.4 Internal Rate of Return 775 A.5 Net Present Value with Fuel Escalation 777 A.6 IRR with Fuel Escalation 779 A.7 Annualizing the Investment 780 A.8 Levelized Cost of Electricity 781 A.9 Cash-Flow Analysis 785 Index 787

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe Civil Engineer's Guide to Effective Project Management A project's success requires more than technical calculations and engineered designs. As this book details, effective management in civil engineering involves aligning operations with the broader context of stakeholder objectives. Management Essentials for Civil Engineers is a comprehensive resource designed to help civil engineers enhance their project management and business development skills. This text integrates engineering acumen with management principles, offering insights on business, communication, ethics, and risk analysis. Topics included in this book: Project Management Principles specifically tailored for civil engineers with content relevant to infrastructure and real estate projects. Leadership and Power Dynamics to understand and leverage various forms of power that support team objectives. Risk Management concepts to develop skills in anticipating, assessing, and responding effectively to project threats and opportunities. Contract Law and Liability covering the complexities of contractual frameworks, project delivery methods, and broader legal aspects. Effective Communication strategies to enhance interactions with diverse clients, project team members, and external stakeholders. Value Creation principles that consider cost management while ensuring meaningful value in the project deliverables. Systems Perspective viewing projects as integral components of broader operational frameworks, including program and portfolio management. Supplementing the content of each chapter is a narrative that threads through the core topics of this book, providing tangible context to theoretical constructs. This narrative approach facilitates the application of project management principles. Authored by three professionals with backgrounds in engineering, law, and business, this book combines insightful experiences with practical recommendations. The interdisciplinary approach underscores the book's comprehensive nature, providing core frameworks directly applicable to real-world projects.

Read more less

Book SynopsisGenomics Approach to Bioremediation Provides insights into the various aspects of microbial genomics and biotechnology for environmental cleanup In recent years, the application of genomics to biodegradation and bioremediation research has led to a better understanding of the metabolic capabilities of microorganisms, their interactions with hazardous and toxic chemical compounds, and their adaptability to changing environmental conditions. Genomics Approach to Bioremediation: Principles, Tools, and Emerging Technologies provides comprehensive and up-to-date information on cutting-edge technologies and approaches in bioremediation and biodegradation of environmental pollutants. Edited by prominent researchers in the field, this authoritative reference examines advanced genomics technologies, next-generation sequencing (NGS), and state-of-the-art bioinformatics tools while offering valuable insights into the unique functional attributes of different microbiTable of ContentsAbout the Editors xxiii List of Contributors xxv Preface xxxiii Acknowledgements xxxix Part 1 Fundamentals of Metagenomics and Bioremediation 1 1 Application of Bioremediation for Environmental Clean-Up: Issues, Recent Developments, and the Way Forward 3 Sneha Bandyopadhyay, Vivek Rana, and Subodh Kumar Maiti 1.1 Introduction 3 1.2 Bioremediation: A Sustainable Approach 4 1.3 Importance of Vegetation for Bioremediation 8 1.4 Application of Bioremediation to Clean Up Environmental Pollutants 8 1.5 Advantages and Disadvantages of Bioremediation Technology 9 1.6 Recent Advancements in Bioremediation Technology 10 1.7 Conclusion 12 References 12 2 Omics in Biomethanation and Environmental Remediation 17 Manan Kaur Ghai, Indu Shekhar Thakur, and Shaili Srivastava 2.1 Introduction 17 2.2 Feedstocks Used 18 2.3 Microbiology and Biochemical Reactions in Anaerobic Digestions 21 2.4 Omics in Biomethanation and Bioremediation 23 2.5 Role of Factors in Anaerobic Digestions in Biomethanation 26 2.6 Inhibitory Substances for Anaerobic Digestion 28 2.7 Degradation and Bioremediation of Toxic Compounds for Enhanced Production of Biomethanation 29 2.8 Circular Economy Perspective in Biogas Production 30 2.9 Conclusion 32 References 32 3 Enzyme Immobilization: An Effective Platform to Improve the Reusability and Catalytic Efficiency of Enzymes 35 Nisha Bhardwaj, Komal Agrawal, and Pradeep Verma 3.1 Introduction 35 3.2 Immobilization of Enzymes 36 3.3 Aspects Affecting the Performance of Immobilized Enzyme 37 3.4 Factors Contributing Toward the Immobilized Enzyme Activity Enhancement 40 3.5 Immobilized Enzyme Applications 44 3.6 Conclusion 44 References 46 4 Biostimulation and Bioaugmentation: Case Studies 53 Ana Maria Queijeiro López and Amanda Lys dos Santos Silva 4.1 Introduction 53 4.2 Biostimulation 54 4.3 Bioagumentation 57 4.4 Commercially Available Bioremediation Agents 63 4.5 Conclusions 65 References 65 5 Plant Microbe Synergism for Arsenic Stress Amelioration in Crop Plants 69 Vandana Anand, Jasvinder Kaur, Sonal Srivastava, Varsha Dharmesh, Vidisha Bist, Akshita Maheshwari, Sumit Yadav, and Suchi Srivastava 5.1 Introduction 69 5.2 Distribution of Arsenic in Soil and Water 70 5.3 Methods of Arsenic Remediation 71 5.4 Arsenic-Induced Toxicity in Crop Plants 73 5.5 Arsenic Remediation Through Mineral Fertilization 74 5.6 Bioremediation 76 5.7 Plant–Microbe Interaction and Their Role in Reducing As Toxicity in Crop Plants 80 5.8 Plant–Microbe Interaction as a Boon for Arsenic Remediation 82 5.9 Microbial Methylation of Arsenic in Soil and its Reduced Uptake in Plants 83 5.10 Conclusion 85 References 85 6 Metagenomic Characterization and Applications of Microbial Surfactants in Remediation of Potentially Toxic Heavy Metals for Environmental Safety: Recent Advances and Challenges 89 Geetansh Sharma, Kirti Shyam, Saurabh Thakur, Manu Yadav, Saransh Nair, Navneet Kumar, Himani Chandel, and Gaurav Saxena 6.1 Introduction 89 6.2 Biosurfactants’ Characteristics 90 6.3 Classification of Biosurfactants 91 6.4 Screening of Microorganisms for Biosurfactants Production 96 6.5 Metagenomic Characterization of Biosurfactant-Producing Microorganisms 99 6.6 Biosynthesis of Biosurfactants 100 6.7 Characterization of Biosurfactants 101 6.8 Factors Influencing Biosurfactants Production 104 6.9 Applications of Biosurfactants in Heavy Metals Environmental Remediation 105 6.10 Challenges in Cost-Effective Production of Biosurfactants 107 6.11 Future Research Needs 110 6.12 Conclusions 110 References 111 Part 2 Metagenomics in Environmental Cleanup 125 7 Metagenomic Approaches Applied to Bioremediation of Xenobiotics 127 Júlia Ronzella Ottoni, Márcio Thomaz dos Santos Varjão, Aline Cavalcanti de Queiroz, Alysson Wagner Fernandes Duarte, and Michel Rodrigo Zambrano Passarini 7.1 Introduction 127 7.2 Metagenomic Approaches in Bioremediation Processes 129 7.3 Metagenomics in the Hydrocarbon Degradation 131 7.4 Metagenomic Approaches in the Drugs Degradation 133 7.5 Metagenomic Approaches in the Dye Degradation 134 7.6 Metagenomic Approaches in the Pesticides Degradation 135 7.7 Metagenomics in Heavy Metal Biorremediation 136 References 137 8 Omics Approaches for Microalgal Applications in Wastewater Treatment 143 Banani Ray Chowdhury, Sudip Das, Shreyan Bardhan, and Dibyajit Lahiri 8.1 Introduction 143 8.2 Concept on Microalgal Biofilms 144 8.3 Factors Influencing Nutrient Extraction and Microalgal Growth 148 8.4 Mechanism of Microalgal Remediation 148 8.5 Multi-Omics Approach 150 8.6 Conclusion 153 References 153 9 Microbial Community Profiling in Wastewater of Effluent Treatment Plant 157 Hansa Mathur, Navneet Joshi, and Sarita Khaturia 9.1 Source of Wastewater 157 9.2 Wastewater Treatment Plant 158 9.3 Wastewater Treatment Facilities Have a Wide Range of Microbial Diversity 159 9.4 Microbial Composition in WWTPs 161 9.5 Screening, Selection, and Identification of Microbial Communities 165 9.6 Health Problem for Wastewater Treatment Employees 172 9.7 Conclusion 174 9.8 Future Prospective 174 References 175 10 Mining of Novel Microbial Enzymes Using Metagenomics Approach for Efficient Bioremediation: An Overview 183 Shruti Dwivedi, Supriya Gupta, Aiman Tanveer, Gautam Anand, Sangeeta Yadav, and Dinesh Yadav 10.1 Introduction 183 10.2 Omics for Microbial Enzymes in Bioremediation 184 10.3 Implementing Metagenomics for Énvironmental Remediations 186 10.4 Metagenomics, Microbial Enzymes, and Bioremediation 189 10.5 Meta –Omics Advances for Bioremediation 192 10.6 Conclusion 194 References 195 11 Bioremediation Approaches for Genomic Microalgal Applications in Wastewater Treatment 199 N. Nirmala, S.S. Dawn, and J. Arun 11.1 Introduction 199 11.2 Implantation of Microalgae in Wastewater Treatment 200 11.3 Strategies to Enhance the Removal of Nutrients 201 11.4 Mechanism of Nitrogen and Phosphorus Removal from Wastewater 202 11.5 Biofuel Production with Simultaneous Wastewater Treatment 203 11.6 Genetic Engineering and Bioremediation Approaches 204 11.7 Bioremediation Approaches in Value-Added Products Formation 205 11.8 Economic Feasibility of Nutrient Removal Methods 206 11.9 Conclusion 206 References 207 12 Application of Microbial Enzymes in Wastewater Treatment 209 Saloni Sahal, Sarita Khaturia, and Navneet Joshi 12.1 Introduction 209 12.2 Types and Functions of Microbial Enzymes 211 12.3 Major Contaminants in Waste Water 212 12.4 Technologies Used for Enzymatic Treatment of Waste Water 216 12.5 Enzymatic Treatment Benefits 220 12.6 Conclusion 221 12.7 Future Perspectives 222 References 222 13 Microbial Biodegradation and Biotransformation of Petroleum Hydrocarbons: Progress, Prospects, and Challenges 229 Kuruvalli Gouthami, A.M.M. Mallikarjunaswamy, Ram Naresh Bhargava, Luiz Fernando Romanholo Ferreira, Abbas Rahdar, Ganesh Dattatraya Saratale, Paul Olusegun Bankole, and Sikandar I. Mulla 13.1 Introduction 229 13.2 Pollution and Toxic Effect of Petroleum Hydrocarbons 232 13.3 Taxonomic Relationships of Hydrocarbon-Utilizing Microorganisms 234 13.4 Biotransformation 235 13.5 Microbial-Mediated Remediation of Petroleum Hydrocarbons 235 13.6 Metagenomics Approaches 243 13.7 Current and Future Prospective 244 Acknowledgments 245 References 245 14 Sewage Treatment System: Recent Trends, Challenges, and Opportunities 249 Teow Yeit Haan, Ho Kah Chun, and Chien Hwa Chong 14.1 Introduction 249 14.2 Important Monitoring and Water Quality Parameters in Biological Sewage Treatment Systems 251 14.3 Biological Treatment Option for Sewage Treatment Systems 253 14.4 Challenges and Opportunities with Current Biological Sewage Treatment Processes 262 14.5 Conclusion 264 Acknowledgments 264 Abbreviation 265 References 265 15 Omics Approach in Nano-Bioremediation of Persistent Organic Pollutants 271 Jyoti, Nikita Yadav, Indu Shekhar, and Shaili Srivastava 15.1 Introduction 271 15.2 POP Into the Environment 272 15.3 Nano-bioremediation of POPs 273 15.4 Types of POPs and Their Degradation Pathways in the Environment 274 15.5 Nanomaterial Used in Thermal Degradation of Persistent Organic Pollutants 283 15.6 Conclusion 289 References 290 16 Application of Genetically Modified Microorganisms for Bioremediation of Heavy Metals from Wastewater 295 Ankita Bhatt, Jugnu Shandilya, S.K. Singal, and Sanjeev Kumar Prajapati 16.1 Introduction 295 16.2 Bioremediation 296 16.3 Genetically Modified Microorganisms (GMMs) for Bioremediation 302 16.4 GMMs for Bioremediation of Heavy Metal-Contaminated Wastewater 303 16.5 Case Studies 305 16.6 Conclusions 312 Acknowledgments 313 References 313 17 Biostimulation and Bioaugmentation of Petroleum Hydrocarbons: From Microbial Growth to Genomics 321 Isabela Karina Della-Flora, Vanessa Kristine de Oliveira Schmidt, Karina Cesca, Maikon Kelbert, Débora de Oliveira, and Cristiano José de Andrade 17.1 Introduction 321 17.2 Impact of Petroleum Hydrocarbons on Microbial Diversity 322 17.3 Genomic Approaches 323 17.4 Soil Bioremediation 328 17.5 Groundwater and Surface Water Bioremediation 332 17.6 Organic and Inorganic Amendments to Biostimulation 335 17.7 Conclusion 338 References 338 18 Omics Approach in Bioremediation of Heavy Metals (HMs) in Industrial Wastewater 343 Nikita Yadav, Jyoti, Indu Shekhar, and Shaili Srivastava 18.1 Introduction 343 18.2 Nomenclature Used 344 18.3 Heavy Metals as Pollutant Into the Water Environment: Sources and Pathways 344 18.4 Toxicity and Physio-Biochemical Effects of Heavy Metals 348 18.5 Existing Technologies for the Removal of Heavy Metals from the Environmental Matrices 350 18.6 Omics Approach in the Bioremediation of Heavy Metals 353 18.7 Nano-Bioremediation of Heavy Metals: An Emerging Approach 356 18.8 Recent Advancement and Development of Nano-Bioremediation of HMs 356 18.9 Conclusion 358 References 358 Part 3 Recent Trends and Future Outlook in Metagenomics to Bioremediation 363 19 CRISPR/Cas Editing in Relation to Phytoremediation: Progress and Prospects 365 Satarupa Dey, Uttpal Anand, Devendra Kumar Pandey, Mimosa Ghorai, Mahipal S.Shekhawat, Muddasarul Hoda, Potshangbam Nongdam, and Abhijit Dey 19.1 Introduction 365 19.2 Conventional Molecular Tools for Creating Genetically Modified Plants 366 19.3 CRISPR-Mediated Gene Editing Technique 367 19.4 Target Genes of CRISPR-Mediated Genetic Modification 368 19.5 CRISPR-Mediated Strategies for Phytoremediation 370 19.6 Role CRISPR-Mediated Strategies in Generating Stress Tolerant Plants 371 19.7 Concluding Remarks and Future Perspectives 372 References 372 20 Biosensors as a Principal Tool for Bioremediation Monitoring 379 Simranjeet Singh, Monika Thakur, Daljeet Singh Dhanjal, Ruby Angurana, Dhriti Kapoor, Vaidehi Katoch, Tunisha Verma, Joginder Singh, and Praveen C. Ramamurthy 20.1 Introduction 379 20.2 Types of Biosensors 380 20.3 Biochemical Potential and Working of Different Biosensors 383 20.4 Analysis Systems of Biosensors for Bioremediation Detection 384 20.5 Using Biosensors to Detect Biochemical Potentials 384 20.6 Biosensors 386 20.7 Molecular-Based Methods 386 20.8 Biosensors Based on Enzymes 387 20.9 Bioaffinity-Based Biosensors 387 20.10 Monitoring Bioremediation 387 20.11 Parameters Monitored During Bioremediation 388 20.12 Chemical Parameters 388 20.13 Biological Parameters 388 20.14 Toxicity Assessment 389 20.15 Online Monitoring of Bioremediation 389 20.16 Conclusion 389 Acknowledgment 390 References 390 21 Integration of Pathway Analysis as a Powerful Tool for Microbial Remediation of Pollutants 397 Parul Johri, Aditi Singh, Mala Trivedi, and Sachidanand Singh 21.1 Introduction 397 21.2 Microbial Approaches for Remediation of Pollutants 398 21.3 Integration of Genetic and Metabolic Engineering in Remediation Process 399 21.4 Alternative Strategies for Microbial Remediation of Pollutants via Synthetic Biology 403 21.5 Using Bacteria as Whole Cell Bacterial Catalysis 407 21.6 Ecological Safety and Risk Assessment 409 21.7 Future Perspective and Challenges 410 21.8 Conclusion 411 References 412 22 Oxidative Catalytic Potential of Lignin-Modifying Enzymes in the Treatment of Emerging Contaminants 417 Sthefany Araujo Bomfim, Gabriela Pereira Barros, Ram Naresh Bharagava, Vineet Kumar, Katlin Ivon Barrios Eguiluz, and Luiz Fernando Romanholo Ferreira 22.1 Introduction 417 22.2 Ligninolytic Enzymes 418 22.3 Conclusion and Perspectives 425 References 425 23 Omics Technologies in Environmental Microbiology and Microbial Ecology: Insightful Applications in Bioremediation Research 433 Kirti Shyam, Navneet Kumar, Himani Chandel, Abhinav Singh Dogra, Geetansh Sharma, and Gaurav Saxena 23.1 Introduction 433 23.2 Basics of Bioremediation 434 23.3 Limitations of Conventional Molecular Sequencing Technologies 437 23.4 Omics Technologies: An Overview 437 23.5 Applications of Omics in Bioremediation Research 440 23.6 Computational, Bioinformatics, and Biostatistics Tools in Omics Approaches 444 23.7 Challenges and Opportunities 448 23.8 Conclusions 449 References 449 24 Bioinformatics and Its Contribution to Bioremediation and Genomics: Recent Trends and Advancement 455 Sonal Nigam and Surbhi Sinha 24.1 Introduction 455 24.2 Bioinformatics Tools for Bioremediation 456 24.3 Application of Omics Technology in Bioremediation 462 24.4 Conclusion 464 References 464 25 Genetically Modified Bacteria for Arsenic Bioremediation 467 Sougata Ghosh and Bishwarup Sarkar 25.1 Introduction 467 25.2 Genetically Modified Bacteria for Arsenic Bioremediation 468 25.3 Conclusions and Future Perspectives 481 References 481 26 Proteomics and Bioremediation Using Prokaryotes 485 Ana Maria Queijeiro López and Amanda Lys dos Santos Silva 26.1 Introduction 485 26.2 Prokaryotic Membranes, Proteins, and Adaptation to Biodegradation Dynamics 486 26.3 Stimuli to Biodegradation 488 26.4 Protein Contribution of Subcellular Components to Biodegradation 489 26.5 Expression of Proteins and Proteomic Steps 491 26.6 Strategies for Identifying and Quantifying Proteins by Mass Spectrometry (MS) 493 26.7 Posttranslational Modifications of Proteins 495 26.8 Improvements Required to Proteomic Techniques 497 26.9 Conclusions 499 References 499 Index 503

Read more less

Book SynopsisEnables readers to easily understand the contract to enable better compliance and efficiency Guide to the FIDIC Conditions of Contract for Construction: The Red Book 2017 helps the reader overcome some of the difficulties encountered on a typical international construction project using the FIDIC Construction Contract 2nd Edition (the 2017 Red Book), by summarizing the activities and duties of those involved, and crystallizing the requirements of the contract. To aid in reader comprehension, the text explains clauses in the sequence they appear in the contract, but also in the order they happen in real time on site. It further provides practical guidance in a concise manner, and in straightforward, jargon-free language. It is a highly practical resource for use during the project, rather than a legal review of the contractual requirements, ensuring readers are fully conversant with the revised requirements and procedures mandated by the 2017 edition of the contraTable of ContentsPreface Acknowledgements Clause 1 General Provisions Clause 2 The Employer Clause 3 The Engineer Clause 4 The Contractor Clause 5 Subcontracting Clause 6 Staff and Labour Clause 7 Plant, Materials and Workmanship Clause 8 Commencement, Delays and Suspension Clause 9 Test on Completion Clause 10 Employer’s Taking Over Clause 11 Defects after Taking Over Clause 12 Measurement and Valuation Clause 13 Variations and Adjustments Clause 14 Price and Payment Clause 15 Termination by the Employer Clause 16 Suspension and Termination by the Contractor Clause 17 Care of the Works and Indemnities Clause 18 Exceptional Events Clause 19 Insurance Clause 20 Employer’s and Contractor’s Claims Clause 21 Disputes and Arbitration Appendices Appendix A Guidance for the Preparation of Particular Conditions Appendix B Employer’s Claims Appendix C Contractor’s Claims Appendix D Notices and Site Organisation Appendix E Daywork and Contemporary Record Sheets Appendix F Contractor’s Costs Appendix G Joint Ventures Index

Read more less

Book SynopsisGLOBAL MEGAPROJECTS The definitive guide to international megaprojects from an undisputed authority in the field In Global Megaprojects: Lessons, Case Studies, and Expert Advice on International Megaproject Management, distinguished international megaproject researcher and consultant Virginia A. Greiman delivers a comprehensive and incisive discussion of a key topic in global infrastructure development: the international megaproject. In the book, readers will find indispensable guidance and insights from experienced megaproject experts, as well as over 20 case studies highlighting practical solutions to common and pressing issues faced by project stakeholders around the world. This book was written to demonstrate that megaprojects can and have accomplished major economic, social, and technical advancements thought impossible but achieved by successfully confronting the challenges of the time. This book offers solutions and prescriptions for megaproject participants to overcome the compTable of ContentsList of Figures xiii List of Tables xv List of Boxes xvii Author’s Perspectives xix Acknowledgments xxi Introduction to This Book xxiii Key Concepts and Objectives xxiii Pedagogy xxiv Book Structure xxv Overview of Book Chapters xxvi References xxviii 1 Introduction to Global Megaprojects 1 Introduction 1 Globalization and Megaprojects 2 Characterization of Global Megaprojects 3 Megaprojects: The Global Timeline 6 Prehistory 7 The Middle Ages 8 The Golden Age of Globalization (1870–1914) 9 The Great Depression (1930–1940s) 12 The Great Megaproject Era (1950–1970s) 14 The Era of Great Tunnel, Energy, and Pipeline Projects: (1970s–2000) 17 The Millennium Projects 23 Why Study Megaprojects? 26 Summary 33 References 35 2 Megaproject Finance: Innovation and Value Driven Megaproject Management 43 Introduction: Financing the World’s Infrastructure 43 Project Finance Definition and Characteristics 45 Project Finance v. Corporate Finance 48 Investment in the Developing Countries 49 Infrastructure Financing in the United States 51 Infrastructure Financing in the European Union 52 Sources of Funding for Project Financing 54 The Legal Framework: The Major Project Participants and Agreements 59 Export Credit Agencies (ECAs) 65 Multilateral Development Banks 67 Public–Private Partnership Structures 69 Evaluation Criteria for Project Finance 70 Megaproject Evaluation: Beyond the Iron Triangle 77 Looking Back and Looking Forward: Ex-ante and Ex-post Evaluations 78 Evaluating Projects Through the Life Cycle 81 Looking Back and Looking Forward and Qualitative Scoring 85 Summary 86 References 88 3 The Multilaterals and World Development 95 Introduction 95 Growing Demand for Global Infrastructure 96 The Role of the Multilaterals in Development 101 Mobilization of Capital 107 The Changing Landscape of Development Banks 116 International Development Case Studies 118 A Collective Action Perspective on the Planning of Global Megaprojects 121 The Social, Economic and Institutional Value of Megaprojects 123 Frameworks for Sustainable Development 124 Summary 127 References 129 4 Leading Complex Global Projects 135 Introduction 135 Complexity in Relation to Uncertainty, Ambiguity, Conflict, and Risk 138 Case Studies of Complex Projects 146 Strategic Management of Complexity 151 Summary 159 References 161 5 Global Megaproject Governance 167 Introduction to Global Governance of Megaprojects 167 Developing a Megaproject Governance Framework 174 Project Governance Between Developed and Developing Countries: Considerations for Improving Governance 188 Case Studies in Governance: What Causes Governance Failure? 191 Summary 198 References 200 6 Integrated Project Organizations and Public Private Partnerships 207 Introduction 207 Part I: Project Organization Integration: A New Mindset for Systems Engineering and Program Management 209 Part II: The Structure of Organizations as Systems of Systems 211 Part III. Public–Private Partnerships: The Sharing of Risk and Opportunity 225 Case Studies in Public–Private Partnership Development 236 Emerging Trends and Social Considerations for PPP Development 241 Summary 243 References 249 7 Managing the Megaproject Implementation and Delivery 255 Introduction 255 Phase 1: Initiation of the Megaproject 257 Phase 2: Global Project Delivery Methodologies and Procurement 261 Phase 3: Implementation 263 Phase 4: Project Controls 279 Phase 5: Transitioning a Megaproject to Operations 289 Lessons Learned on Cost and Schedule 290 Summary 294 References 297 8 Megaprojects and Mega Risk: Opportunity, Risk, and Resilience Management 301 Introduction 301 Emerging Risks on a Global Scale Impacting Megaprojects 302 Defining Risk and Risk Management 305 Structure of Megaproject Risks 306 Resilience and Risk Management 307 What Is Project Risk Intelligence? 310 Developing a Risk Management Framework: A Shared Vision of Risk 313 Global Risk Factors in International Projects 325 Business Continuity Planning in the Management of Risks 327 Root Cause Analysis 327 Characterizing Risk 330 Normalization of Deviance Related to Risk Discovery 333 Catastrophic Loss Potential: Natural and Manmade Disasters 336 Summary 341 References 344 9 Megaprojects: Troubles and Triumphs 349 Introduction 349 What Is Meant by Success? Successful Megaproject Failures 350 Characteristics of Failed Projects 356 Characteristics of the Most Successful Projects 370 Summary 372 References 373 10 Laws and Contracts in Global Megaprojects 381 Introduction 381 Planning for Procurement 382 Concession Procurement 383 Private Sector Procurement 383 Megaproject Procurement Contracts in the United States 385 Laws Governing International Megaproject Contracting 387 Challenging Negotiations in Megaproject Contracts 391 Collaborative Contracting 414 Emerging Issues in Global Development Laws and Contracts 414 Summary 419 References 421 11 Megaproject Innovation and Resilience 425 Introduction 425 Where Does Innovation Come From? 427 What Is an Innovation Megaproject? 429 Megaproject Innovation Programs 431 What Is an Innovation Strategy? 435 Enablers and Challenges to Innovation 439 Best Practices for Innovation 443 Summary 450 References 452 12 The Future of Global Megaprojects 459 Introduction 459 Blue Ocean Thinking 460 Blue Economy Thinking 461 Challenges of Future Megaprojects 463 Meeting the Grand Challenges of the Twenty-first Century 469 Global Change and International Cooperation 474 Global Megaprojects and the Leaders of Tomorrow 474 Megaprojects and the Growth of the Digital Economy 478 Megaproject Management: Looking Back to Move the Future Forward 485 Leadership for Megaprojects in the Emergent Era 486 A New Principle Based Approach to Project Management 489 Megaprojects and System Perspectives 490 Summary 492 References 494 Glossary 501 Acronyms 523 Index 527

Read more less

Book SynopsisA transdisciplinary approach to investigating relationships between biomass burning and human health outcomes Environmental degradation is causing severe impacts on the various Earth ecosystems. Unsustainable development and anthropogenic pressure have altered the natural balance. From this perspective, sustainability has become a major issue to frame a greener and cleaner Earth for future generations. It can be argued that the worst example of unsustainable development is habitat degradation. Therefore, ecorestoration and other ecological practices are becoming increasingly important in our march toward sustainability. The present book covers all the aspects of ecorestoration and sustainability and how various areas intersect in this space. Environmental degradation is increasing all over the world at an unprecedented rate. This includes air, water, soil, and other natural resources resulting in the depletion of natural resources and an unsustainable planet. Therefore, it is incredTable of ContentsList of Contibutors xv Preface xix 1 Ecorestoration for Environmental Sustainability—An Introductory Framework 1 Arnab Banerjee, Manoj Kumar Jhariya, Surendra Singh Bargali and Debnath Palit 1.1 Introduction 2 1.2 Global Scenario of Ecosystem Types and Their Degradation 4 1.2.1 Agroecosystem 5 1.2.2 Forests 6 1.2.3 Freshwater 7 1.2.4 Grasslands, Shrub Lands, and Savannahs 7 1.2.5 Mountains 8 1.2.6 Oceans and Coasts 8 1.2.7 Peat Lands Around 9 1.2.8 Urban Areas 10 1.3 Need of Ecorestoration 10 1.3.1 The Economy 11 1.3.2 Food Security 12 1.3.3 Clean Water 12 1.3.4 Health and Well-Being 13 1.3.5 Climate Change Mitigation 13 1.3.6 Climate Change Adaptation 14 1.3.7 Security 14 1.3.8 Biodiversity 15 1.3.9 Synergies and Trade-Offs 16 1.4 Ecological Restoration and Forestry 16 1.4.1 Forested Wetland Restoration 16 1.5 Ecological Restoration and Societal Development 17 1.5.1 Ecological Restoration in Social Context 17 1.6 Policies and Strategy Formulation for Ecological Restoration Toward Environmental Sustainability 17 1.6.1 Novel Ecosystems and Adapting to Rapid Global Change 18 1.6.2 Climate-Smart Agriculture and Enhancing Socioecological Resilience 19 1.6.3 Increasing the Multifunctionality and Productivity of Agricultural Landscapes 20 1.6.4 Green Infrastructure and Nature-Based Solutions 20 1.6.5 Ecorestoration of Agroecosystem 21 1.6.6 Urbanization and Development 22 1.6.7 Biodiversity Offset Mitigation Through Ecological Restoration 23 1.6.8 Ecological Restoration as an Integral Component of Production Landscapes 24 1.7 Evidence of Success and Benefits of Ecological Restoration 25 1.8 Conclusion 26 References 27 2 Agricultural Soil Management and Ecorestoration Under Climate Change: Practices for Sustainable Soil Resource 49 Zied Haj-Amor, Tesfay Araya, Tapos Kumar Acharjee, Salem Bouri and Ruediger Anlauf 2.1 Introduction 50 2.2 Impacts of Climate Change on Agricultural Soil 51 2.2.1 Soil Erosion 51 2.2.2 Soil Salinization 52 2.2.3 Drought 53 2.3 Potential for Soil and Ecorestoration to Mitigate Climate Change 54 2.3.1 Soil Carbon Sequestration 54 2.3.2 Soil Management Practices for Increasing Carbon Storage in Soil 55 2.3.3 Ecorestoration of Agricultural Soil 57 2.3.4 Potential for Ecorestoration of Soil to Mitigate and Adapt Climate Change 58 2.4 Soil Water Management Under Climate Change/Variability 59 2.4.1 Experiences from Europe 59 2.4.1.1 Improvement of Irrigation to Save Water 59 2.4.1.2 Shifts in Land Use to Adapt to Climate Change 61 2.4.2 Experiences from Bangladesh 61 2.4.3 Experiences from Tunisia 66 2.5 Recommendations for Sustainable Soil Management and Environmental Sustainability 66 2.6 Policy Framework for Ecorestoration and Management of Agricultural Soil 67 2.7 Future Roadmap for Ecorestoration Toward Sustainable Soil Resource 68 2.8 Conclusion 69 Funding 70 References 70 3 Integrated River Health Assessment System (IRHAS): A Promising Tool for Ecorestoration of Tropical Indian Rivers 77 Parul Gurjar, Kuldeep Lakhera, Vipin Vyas and Rumeet Kour Raina 3.1 Introduction 78 3.1.1 River Ecology—An Introductory Remark 78 3.1.2 Status/Scenario of Tropical Rivers in India 78 3.1.3 Concept of Ecorestoration of Riverine Ecosystem in India 79 3.1.4 Role of Biodiversity in Riverine Conservation 80 3.2 Integrated River Health Assessment System (IRHAS)—A Promising Tool 80 3.2.1 Physical Analysis 81 3.2.1.1 Physical Habitat 81 3.2.1.2 Riparian Zone 83 3.2.1.3 Biological Analysis 89 3.2.1.4 Chemical Analysis 93 3.3 Legal and Policy Framework for Effective Implementation of Integrated River Health Assessment System 96 3.4 Future Roadmap of Integrated River Health Assessment System 97 3.5 Concluding Remarks for the Implementation of IRHAS in Indian River Systems to Achieve Environmental Sustainability 98 References 98 4 Wetland Restoration Policies and the Sustainability of Agricultural Productions, Lessons Learnt from Zrebar Lake, Iran 113 Shervin Jamshidi and Anahita Naderi 4.1 Introduction 114 4.1.1 What is Eutrophication? 114 4.1.2 Clarity Reduction 114 4.1.3 Clogging Filters 115 4.1.4 Increasing Health Risks 115 4.1.5 Increasing Ecological Risks 116 4.1.6 pH Variation 117 4.1.7 Human Ecosystem 117 4.2 What is the Cause? 118 4.3 Integrated Sustainable Management 120 4.3.1 Trends and Approaches 120 4.3.2 Best Management Practices (BMPs) 123 4.3.3 Accounting Sustainability by Water Footprint 125 4.4 Zrebar Lake 128 4.4.1 Basin Characteristics 128 4.4.2 Basin Ecology 132 4.4.3 Pollution Sources 141 4.4.4 Water Quality 144 4.4.5 Lessons Learnt 149 4.4.5.1 Zrebar Lake in Studies 149 4.4.5.2 BMPs Impact 151 4.4.5.3 Future Trends and Directives 155 4.4.5.4 Legal and Policy Framework 158 4.5 Conclusion 159 References 160 5 Strategies for Ecosystem Biomass Conservation: Review, Analysis, and Evaluation 167 Silvina M. Manrique 5.1 Introduction 168 5.1.1 Sustainable Development: Bases and Principles 168 5.1.2 Planetary Limits and Natural Capital 169 5.2 Loss of Biospheric Integrity 171 5.2.1 Ecosystems, Biodiversity, and Climate 171 5.2.2 The Global State of Natural Capital 172 5.2.3 Loss of Biomass Integrity of Ecosystems 175 5.3 Strategies for the Conservation/Restoration of Ecosystem Biomass 176 5.3.1 Ecorestoration 177 5.3.2 Payment for Environmental Services (PES) 178 5.3.3 Nature-Based Solutions 178 5.3.4 Ecosystem-Based Adaptation 178 5.3.5 Protected Areas (PAs) 178 5.4 Case Study: Native Forests, Biomass, and Ecosystem Services 180 5.4.1 Lower Yungas Forest (LYF) Context 180 5.4.2 Characterization and Analysis 181 5.4.3 Physiognomy, Floristic Composition, and Richness 184 5.4.4 Stock and Distribution of Carbon in Ecosystem Reservoirs 188 5.4.5 Protected Areas Value and Management Strategies 191 5.5 Effectiveness of Conservation Measures 193 5.5.1 Protected Areas: Are They Meeting Their Goal? 193 5.5.2 Effectiveness of Protected Areas 194 5.6 Conclusions 195 5.7 Policy and Legal Framework for Ecosystem Biomass Conservation 196 5.8 Forest Ecosystem Biomass Conservation Toward Environmental Sustainability 198 5.8.1 Forest Biomass: A Complex and Multidiverse Source of Benefits 198 5.9 Future Roadmap of Forest Biomass Conservation 199 5.10 Final Thoughts 201 References 202 6 Reclamation of Mined Soil in RCF Region—A Phytoremediation Approach 211 Debalina Kar and Debnath Palit 6.1 Introduction 212 6.2 Impact of Mining 212 6.3 Bioremediation and Phytoremediation 213 6.4 Material and Methods 214 6.4.1 Study Sites 214 6.4.2 Ecological Survey or Phytosociological Study for Identifying Pioneering Species of Trees 214 6.5 Results and Discussion 215 6.6 Conclusion 240 References 240 7 Ecological Restoration of Various Ecosystems: Implications for Biodiversity Conservation and Natural Resource Management 245 C.B. Ethis-Eriakha and S.E. Akemu 7.1 Introduction 246 7.2 Ecosystem as a Natural Support System for Biodiversity 247 7.3 Pollution of the Natural Ecosystem 248 7.4 Deforestation 249 7.5 Consequences of Pollution of the Natural Ecosystem 250 7.6 Ecorestoration for Conservation of Biodiversity and Natural Resources 253 7.7 Various Approaches to Ecological Restoration—Natural Regeneration and Active Ecorestoration 255 7.8 Tools for Ecological Restoration of Various Ecosystems 256 7.9 Ecorestoration of Biodiversity in Terrestrial, Aquatic Ecosystems, Wetlands, Tropical Forests, Grasslands 257 7.10 Research and Development Activities in Ecorestoration for Conservation of Biodiversity and Natural Resources 258 7.11 Policy and Legal Framework for Ecorestoration, Conservation of Biodiversity and Natural Resources 259 7.12 Future Roadmap 260 7.13 Conclusion 261 References 261 8 Managing Forests for Offsetting Carbon Footprints 267 Abhishek Raj, Manoj Kumar Jhariya, Arnab Banerjee, Bharat Lal, Taher Mechergui, Annpurna Devi and Ghanshyam 8.1 Introduction 268 8.2 Global Forests Scenario 269 8.3 Carbon Footprint: A Conceptual Framework 272 8.4 Carbon Footprint Calculator 276 8.5 Technology for Forest Cover and Carbon Assessment 277 8.6 Measuring Carbon Emissions from Deforestation 280 8.7 Carbon Sinks in Forests 282 8.8 Forest Management for Carbon Mitigation 283 8.9 Emerging Challenges and Constraint 284 8.10 Research and Development Toward Footprints 285 8.11 Policy and Legal Framework 285 References 286 9 Ecosystem Management of Polluted Forest and Its Implication on Biodiversity Conservation in the Niger Delta 295 Aroloye O. Numbere and Eberechukwu M. Maduike 9.1 Introduction 296 9.2 Profiles of Mangrove Biodiversity in the Niger Delta 298 9.2.1 Vegetation 298 9.2.2 Wildlife 299 9.2.3 Impact of Hydrocarbon Pollution on Mangrove Flora and Fauna 300 9.2.4 Impact of Pesticide (Herbicide) Application on Mangrove Vegetation 302 9.3 Environmental Management and Restoration Ecology as Solutions 303 9.4 The Human Factor and the Practice of a Win-Win Ecology in Biodiversity Conservation 304 9.5 Regional Versus Local Site Management 308 9.6 Policy and Legal Framework and Eco-Restoration of Polluted Sites and Biodiversity Conservation of Niger Delta 309 9.7 Future Research and Development of Conservation of Mangrove Ecosystem in the Niger Delta 310 9.8 Conclusion 311 References 312 10 Forest Biodiversity Conservation and Restoration: Policies, Plan, and Approaches 317 Abhishek Raj, Manoj Kumar Jhariya, Arnab Banerjee, Bhimappa Honnappa Kittur, Surendra Singh Bargali, Kiran Bargali and Sharad Nema 10.1 Introduction 318 10.1.1 Forest Resources and Biodiversity 320 10.1.2 Faunal Diversity in Tropical Forest 321 10.1.3 Forest Degradation and Fragmentation 325 10.2 Need for Forest Restoration Program 326 10.3 Value of Restoring Forests 329 10.4 Forest Landscape Restoration Vis-A-Vis Conservation Strategies 329 10.5 Forest Landscape Restoration for Ecological Integrity 330 10.6 Restoration of Degraded Tropical Forest 331 10.7 Ecosystem Approaches to Forest Restoration: Learning from the Past 332 10.8 Forest Restoration for Enhancing Biodiversity and Ecosystem Services 332 10.9 Forest Landscape Restoration: Indian Perspective 334 10.10 Forest Landscape Restoration for C Footprint and Climate Change Mitigation 336 10.11 Forest Landscape Restoration for Livelihood and Well-Being 338 10.12 Constraints and Challenges 338 10.13 Existing Policy and Its Reformation 339 10.14 Advances in Restoration: Plan and Execution 340 10.15 Recommendation and Future Research 340 10.16 Conclusion 341 References 341 11 Geospatial Techniques in Sustainable Forest Management for Ecorestoration and Different Environmental Protection Issues 351 Shiboram Banerjee and Debnath Palit 11.1 Introduction 352 11.2 The Assessment of Forest Resources and Its Sustainable Use 355 11.3 Aerial Mode of Remote Sensing 356 11.4 Satellite Mode of Remote Sensing 357 11.5 Assessment of Wildlife Habitat 359 11.6 Assessment of Biodiversity Networks 359 11.7 Productivity and Biomass Assessment in Terrestrial Regime 360 11.8 Land Cover and Land Use Analysis 360 11.9 Characterization of Wetland at Landscape Level 361 11.10 Assessment of Grassland Habitat 362 11.11 Evaluation of Carbon Sequestration 362 11.12 Detection of Air Pollution Intensities 363 11.13 Ecorestoration for Sustainable Development 364 11.14 Conclusions 366 Acknowledgments 366 References 367 12 Climate-Induced Conflicts Between Rural Farmers and Cattle Herders: Implications on Sustainable Agriculture and Food Security in Nigeria 373 Angela Oyilieze Akanwa, Arnab Banerjee , Manoj Kumar Jhariya, L.N. Muoghalu, A.U. Okonkwo, F.I. Ikegbunam, I.C. Ezeomedo, S.O. Okeke, P.U. Igwe, V.C. Arah, C.C. Anukwonke, M.C. Obidiegwu and E.I. Madukasi 12.1 Introduction 374 12.2 Agroecological Zones and Climate Change in Nigeria—Drought Crisis in Sahel 377 12.3 Ethnic Conflicts, Origin, and Intensification of Violence and Impacts 383 12.3.1 Pre-Colonial Era 383 12.3.2 Colonial and Post-Colonial Periods 385 12.3.3 Impacts of Conflict: Human Costs 392 12.3.4 Loss of Revenue 395 12.3.5 Growing Food Insecurity in Nigeria 395 12.4 Environmental Injustice and Herder/Farmer Conflict in Nigeria 398 12.5 Confronting the Challenges of Farmer/Herder Conflict in Nigeria 399 12.5.1 Intensified Agricultural Activities in Nigeria 399 12.5.2 Community Participation 402 12.5.3 Intervention of Science and Technology 403 12.5.4 Policy and Legal Perspective 405 12.6 Conclusion 406 References 407 13 Sustainable Management of Natural Resources for Environmental Sustainability 417 Asmida Ismail, Faezah Pardi, Khairul Adzfa Radzun, Siti Khairiyah Mohd Hatta, Mohd Nazip Suratman, Nurul Aida Kamal Ikhsan and Faeiza Buyong 13.1 Introduction 418 13.2 The Insight on Management and Sustainable Use of Natural Resources 419 13.3 Unequal Distribution of Natural Resources 420 13.4 Success Stories of Natural Resource Sustainable Management 421 13.4.1 Germany 421 13.4.2 China 422 13.4.3 Malaysia 423 13.5 Policy and Legal Framework for Sustainable Management of Natural Resources: A Review on United Nation (UN) 50 Years of Sustainable Development Policy 425 13.6 Future Outlook of Sustainable Management of Natural Resources 430 13.6.1 The Future of Sustainable Management 431 13.6.1.1 Political Commitment 431 13.6.1.2 Sustainable Development Policy 431 13.6.1.3 Mathematical Model 432 13.6.1.4 Advanced Technology 432 13.6.2 Comprehensive Approach 433 References 433 About the Editors 439 Index 441

Read more less

Book SynopsisRELIABILITY EVALUATION OF DYNAMIC SYSTEMS EXCITED IN TIME DOMAIN REDSET Multi-disciplinary approach to structural reliability analysis for dynamic loadings offering a practical alternative to the random vibration theory and simulation Reliability Evaluation of Dynamic Systems Excited in Time Domain REDSET is a multidisciplinary concept that enables readers to estimate the underlying risk that could not be solved in the past. The major hurdle was that the required limit state functions (LSFs) are implicit in nature and the lack of progress in the reliability evaluation methods for this class of problems. The most sophisticated deterministic analysis requires that the dynamic loadings must be applied in the time domain. To satisfy these requirements, REDSET is developed. Different types and forms of dynamic loadings including seismic, wind-induced wave, and thermomechanical loading in the form of heating and cooling of solder balls used in computer chips are Table of Contents1 REDSET and Its Necessity 1 1.1 Introductory Comments 1 1.2 Reliability Evaluation Procedures Existed Around 2000 2 1.3 Improvements or Alternative to Stochastic Finite Element Method (SFEM) 2 1.4 Other Alternatives Besides SFEM 4 1.4.1 Random Vibration 4 1.4.2 Alternative to Basic Monte Carlo Simulation 5 1.4.3 Alternatives to Random Vibration Approach for Large Problems 5 1.4.4 Physics-Based Deterministic FEM Formulation 5 1.4.5 Multidisciplinary Activities to Study the Presence of Uncertainty in Large Engineering Systems 6 1.4.6 Laboratory Testing 7 1.5 Justification of a Novel Risk Estimation Concept REDSET Replacing SFEM 7 1.6 Notes for Instructors 8 1.7 Notes to Students 9 Acknowledgments 9 2 Fundamentals of Reliability Assessment 11 2.1 Introductory Comments 11 2.2 Set Theory 12 2.3 Modeling of Uncertainty 14 2.3.1 Continuous Random Variables 15 2.3.2 Discrete Random Variables 16 2.3.3 Probability Distribution of a Random Variable 16 2.3.4 Modeling of Uncertainty for Multiple Random Variables 17 2.4 Commonly Used Probability Distributions 19 2.4.1 Commonly Used Continuous and Discrete Random Variables 19 2.4.2 Combination of Discrete and Continuous Random Variables 20 2.5 Extreme Value Distributions 20 2.6 Other Useful Distributions 21 2.7 Risk-Based Engineering Design Concept 21 2.8 Evolution of Reliability Estimation Methods 25 2.8.1 First-Order Second-Moment Method 25 2.8.2 Advanced First-Order Reliability Method (AFOSM) 26 2.8.3 Hasofer-Lind Method 26 2.9 AFOSM for Non-Normal Variables 31 2.9.1 Two-Parameter Equivalent Normal Transformation 31 2.9.2 Three-Parameter Equivalent Normal Transformation 33 2.10 Reliability Analysis with Correlated Random Variables 33 2.11 First-Order Reliability Method (FORM) 35 2.11.1 FORM Method 1 35 2.11.2 Correlated Non-Normal Variables 37 2.12 Probabilistic Sensitivity Indices 39 2.13 FORM Method 2 40 2.14 System Reliability Evaluation 40 2.15 Fundamentals of Monte Carlo Simulation Technique 41 2.15.1 Steps in Numerical Experimentations Using Simulation 42 2.15.2 Extracting Probabilistic Information from N Data Points 43 2.15.3 Accuracy and Efficiency of Simulation 43 2.16 Concluding Remarks 44 3 Implicit Performance or Limit State Functions 47 3.1 Introductory Comments 47 3.2 Implicit Limit State Functions – Alternatives 48 3.3 Response Surface Method 49 3.4 Limitations of Using the Original RSM Concept for the Structural Reliability Estimation 50 3.5 Generation of Improved Response Surfaces 51 3.5.1 Polynomial Representation of an Improved Response Surface 52 3.6 Experimental Region, Coded Variables, and Center Point 54 3.6.1 Experimental Region and Coded Variables 54 3.6.2 Experimental Design 55 3.6.3 Saturated Design 56 3.6.4 Central Composite Design 56 3.7 Analysis of Variance 56 3.8 Experimental Design for Second-Order Polynomial 58 3.8.1 Experimental Design – Model 1: SD with Second-Order Polynomial without Cross Terms 58 3.8.2 Experimental Design – Model 2: SD with Second-Order Polynomial with Cross Terms 59 3.8.3 Experimental Design – Model 3: CCD with Second-Order Polynomial with Cross Terms 61 3.9 Comparisons of the Three Basic Factorial Designs 61 3.10 Experimental Designs for Nonlinear Dynamic Problems Excited in the Time Domain 64 3.11 Selection of the Most Appropriate Experimental Design 64 3.12 Selection of Center Point 65 3.13 Generation of Limit State Functions for Routine Design 66 3.13.1 Serviceability Limit State 66 3.13.2 Strength Limit State Functions 67 3.13.3 Interaction Equations for the Strength Limit State Functions 67 3.13.4 Dynamic Effect in Interaction Equations 68 3.14 Concluding Remarks 69 4 Uncertainty Quantification of Dynamic Loadings Applied in the Time Domain 71 4.1 Introductory Comments 71 4.2 Uncertainty Quantification in Seismic Loadings Applied in the Time Domain 73 4.2.1 Background Information 74 4.3 Selection of a Suite of Acceleration Time Histories Using PEER Database – Alternative 1 75 4.3.1 Earthquake Time History Selection Methodology 78 4.4 Demonstration of the Selection of a Suite of Ground Motion Time Histories – Alternative 1 79 4.5 Simulated Ground Motions Using the Broadband Platform (BBP) – Alternative 2 84 4.5.1 Broadband Platform Developed by SCEC 84 4.6 Demonstration of Selection and Validation of a Suite of Ground Motion Time Histories Using BPP 86 4.7 Applications of BBP in Selecting Multiple Earthquake Acceleration Time Histories 88 4.8 Summary of Generating Multiple Earthquake Time Histories Using BPP 91 4.9 Uncertainty Quantification of Wind-Induced Wave Loadings Applied in the Time Domain 91 4.9.1 Introductory Comments 91 4.9.2 Fundamentals of Wave Loading 94 4.9.3 Morison Equation 95 4.10 Modeling of Wave Loading 96 4.10.1 Wave Modeling Using the New Wave Theory 97 4.10.2 Wheeler Stretching Effect 98 4.10.3 Three-Dimensional Directionality 98 4.10.4 Summary of Deterministic Modeling of Wave Loading 100 4.11 Uncertainty Quantifications in Wave Loading Applied in the Time Domain 100 4.11.1 Uncertainty Quantification in Wave Loading – Three-Dimensional Constrained New Wave (3D CNW) Concept 100 4.11.2 Three-Dimensional Constrained New Wave (3D CNW) Concept 102 4.11.3 Uncertainty in the Wave Height Estimation 104 4.11.4 Uncertainty Quantification of Wave Loading 105 4.11.5 Quantification of Uncertainty in Wave Loading 106 4.12 Wave and Seismic Loadings – Comparisons 107 4.13 Concluding Remarks 108 5 Reliability Assessment of Dynamic Systems Excited in Time Domain – REDSET 111 5.1 Introductory Comments 111 5.2 A Novel Reliability Estimation Concept – REDSET 113 5.2.1 Integration of Finite Element Method, Improved Response Surface Method, and FORM 113 5.2.2 Increase Efficiency in Generating an IRS 114 5.2.3 OptimumNumber of NDFEA Required for the Generation of an IRS 115 5.2.4 Reduction of Random Variables 115 5.3 Advanced Sampling Design Schemes 116 5.4 Advanced Factorial Design Schemes 116 5.5 Modified Advanced Factorial Design Schemes 119 5.5.1 Modified Advanced Factorial Design Scheme 2 (MS2) 119 5.5.2 Modified Advanced Factorial Design Scheme 3 121 5.6 Optimum Number of TNDFEA Required to Implement REDSET 122 5.7 Improve Accuracy of Scheme MS3 Further – Alternative to the Regression Analysis 122 5.7.1 Moving Least Squares Method 122 5.7.2 Concept of Moving Least Squares Method 123 5.7.3 Improve Efficiency Further to the Moving Least Squares Method 124 5.8 Generation of an IRS Using Kriging Method 126 5.8.1 Simple Kriging 127 5.8.2 Ordinary Kriging 128 5.8.3 Universal Kriging 128 5.8.4 Variogram Function 131 5.8.5 Scheme S3 with Universal Kriging Method 133 5.8.6 Scheme MS3 with Modified Universal Kriging Method 133 5.9 Comparisons of All Proposed Schemes 133 5.10 Development of Reliability Evaluation of Dynamical Engineering Systems Excited in Time Domain (REDSET) 135 5.10.1 Required Steps in the Implementation of REDSET 136 5.11 Concluding Remarks 138 6 Verification of REDET for Earthquake Loading Applied in the Time Domain 139 6.1 Introductory Comments 139 6.2 Verification – Example 1: 3-Story Steel Moment Frame with W24 Columns 140 6.2.1 Example 1: Accuracy Study of All 9 Schemes 140 6.2.2 Verification – Example 2: 3-Story Steel Moment Frame with W14 Columns 147 6.3 Case Study: 13-Story Steel Moment Frame 151 6.4 Example 4: Site-Specific Seismic Safety Assessment of CDNES 160 6.4.1 Location, Soil Condition, and Structures 161 6.4.2 Uncertainty Quantifications 162 6.4.3 Uncertainty Quantifications in Resistance-Related Design Variables 162 6.4.3.1 Uncertainty Quantifications in Gravity Load-related Design Variables 165 6.4.3.2 Selection of a Suite of Site-Specific Acceleration Time Histories 165 6.5 Risk Evaluation of Three Structures using REDSET 166 6.5.1 Selection of Limit State Functions 166 6.5.2 Estimations of the Underlying Risk for the Three Structures 166 6.6 Concluding Remarks 172 7 Reliability Assessment of Jacket-Type Offshore Platforms Using REDSET for Wave and Seismic Loadings 175 7.1 Introductory Comments 175 7.2 Reliability Estimation of a Typical Jacket-Type Offshore Platform 176 7.3 Uncertainty Quantifications of a Jacket-Type Offshore Platform 177 7.3.1 Uncertainty in Structures 178 7.3.2 Uncertainty in Wave Loadings in the Time Domain 179 7.4 Performance Functions 180 7.4.1 LSF of Total Drift at the Top of the Platform 180 7.4.2 Strength Performance Functions 180 7.5 Reliability Evaluation of JTPs 181 7.6 Risk Estimations of JTPs Excited by the Wave and Seismic Loadings – Comparison 183 7.7 Comparison of Results for the Wave and Earthquake Loadings 190 7.8 Concluding Remarks 193 8 Reliability Assessment of Engineering Systems Using REDSET for Seismic Excitations and Implementation of PBSD 195 8.1 Introductory Comments 195 8.2 Assumed Stress-Based Finite Element Method for Nonlinear Dynamic Problems 196 8.2.1 Nonlinear Deterministic Seismic Analysis of Structures 196 8.2.2 Seismic Analysis of Steel Structures 196 8.2.3 Dynamic Governing Equation and Solution Strategy 197 8.2.4 Flexibility of Beam-to-Column Connection Models by Satisfying Underlying Physics – Partially Restrained Connections for Steel Structures 200 8.2.5 Incorporation of Connection Rigidities in the FE Formulation Using Richard Four-Parameter Model 202 8.3 Pre- and Post-Northridge Steel Connections 204 8.4 Performance-Based Seismic Design 207 8.4.1 Background Information and Motivation 207 8.4.2 Professional Perception of PBSD 208 8.4.3 Building Codes, Recommendations, and Guidelines 210 8.4.4 Performance Levels 210 8.4.5 Target Reliability Requirements to Satisfy Different Performance Levels 211 8.4.6 Elements of PBSD and Their Sequences 212 8.4.7 Explore Suitability of REDSET in Implementing PBSD 212 8.5 Showcasing the Implementation of PBSD 213 8.5.1 Verification of REDSET – Reliability Estimation of a 2-Story Steel Frame 214 8.6 Implementation Potential of PBSD – 3-, 9-, and 20-Story Steel Buildings 219 8.6.1 Description of the Three Buildings 219 8.6.2 Post-Northridge PR Connections 219 8.6.3 Quantification of Uncertainties in Resistance-Related Variables 219 8.6.4 Uncertainties in Gravity Loads 219 8.6.5 Uncertainties in PR Beam-to-Column Connections 220 8.6.6 Uncertainties in Seismic Loading 225 8.6.7 Serviceability Performance Functions – Overall and Inter-Story Drifts 226 8.7 Structural Reliability Evaluations of the Three Buildings for the Performance Levels of CP, LS, and IO Using REDSET 227 8.7.1 Observations for the Three Performance Levels 228 8.8 Implementation of PBSD for Different Soil Conditions 237 8.9 Illustrative Example of Reliability Estimation for Different Soil Conditions 239 8.9.1 Quantifications of Uncertainties for Resistance-Related Variables and Gravity Loads 240 8.9.2 Generation of Multiple Design Earthquake Time Histories for Different Soil Conditions 240 8.9.3 Implementation of PBSD for Different Soil Conditions 240 8.10 Concluding Remarks 244 9 Reliability Assessment of Lead-Free Solders in Electronic Packaging Using REDSET for Thermomechanical Loadings 247 9.1 Introductory Comments 247 9.2 Background Information 249 9.3 Deterministic Modelling of a Solder Ball 251 9.3.1 Solder Ball Represented by Finite Elements 251 9.3.2 Material Modeling of SAC Alloy 251 9.3.2.1 HISS Plasticity Model 252 9.3.2.2 Disturbed State Concept 254 9.3.2.3 Creep Modeling 254 9.3.2.4 Rate-Dependent Elasto-Viscoplastic Model 255 9.3.3 Temperature-Dependent Modeling 255 9.3.4 Constitutive Modeling Calibration 255 9.3.5 Thermomechanical Loading Experienced by Solder Balls 256 9.4 Uncertainty Quantification 257 9.4.1 Uncertainty in all the Parameters in a Solder Ball 258 9.4.2 Uncertainty Associated with Thermomechanical Loading 260 9.5 The Limit State Function for the Reliability Estimation 260 9.6 Reliability Assessment of Lead-Free Solders in Electronic Packaging 261 9.7 Numerical Verification Using Monte Carlo Simulation 262 9.8 Verification Using Laboratory Test Results 263 9.9 Concluding Remarks 264 Concluding Remarks for the Book - REDSET 266 References 267 Index 281

Read more less

Book Synopsis

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe Smart Estate Bring your estate management methods into the future with this accessible guide Building information modeling, or BIM, is a catch-all term for a wide array of tools and processes for creating digital representations of buildings or building components. These tools have been widely embraced for use in the construction phase of projects, but their potential has only begun to be realized in facility management and maintenance, even though these account for 85% of costs in the life cycle of a building. Organizations controlling diverse estates with multiple buildings of varying ages stand to benefit enormously from a BIM-informed approach to estate management. The Smart Estate outlines such an approach and its potential to improve facility and estate management. Emphasizing practical applications, it moves beyond the project delivery stage to focus on the much longer and costlier period of building operation and maintenance. The result is a thorough and accessible guide to generating collaborative, BIM-informed methods. The Smart Estate readers will also find: Case studies and real-world scenarios illustrating best practicesDetailed discussion particularly suited to the needs of large-scale or public-sector organizationsDetailed step-by-step guide to developing a BIM-informed approach to a given asset portfolio The Smart Estate is ideal for professionals in construction management and facilities management, as well as for advanced students and professionals in all construction related disciplines.

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of ContentsPreface xvii Chapter 1 History and Concept of Boundaries 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Significance of Boundaries 3 1.3 Boundary References 4 1.4 Terminus: The God (or Goddess) of Boundaries 6 1.5 Disputes and Boundaries 7 1.6 Role of the Surveyor in Boundaries 9 1.7 What is Being Created? What is Being Located? 13 1.8 Original Written Title 15 1.9 Rights and Interests in Land are Composed of a Bundle of Rights 16 1.10 Role of the Court 20 1.11 Real and Personal Property 21 1.12 What Constitutes Real Property 22 1.13 Nature of Modern Estates 25 1.14 Taxes on Land and Tax Maps 25 1.15 Easements and Licenses 26 1.16 Servitudes, Restrictions, Covenants, and Conditions 30 1.17 Actions on Boundaries and Easements 31 1.18 One Unique Parcel or Boundary 32 1.19 The Original Boundaries are Sacred 32 1.20 Conclusions 33 Bibliography 34 Notes 34 Chapter 2 How Boundaries are Created 36 2.1 Introduction 36 2.2 Definitions 37 2.3 Classification of Boundaries 40 2.4 Methods of Boundary Creation 41 2.5 Who May Create Boundaries? 45 2.6 Sanctity of the Original Survey 48 2.7 Original Lines Remain Fixed 49 2.8 Distinctions Between the Original Boundary Survey, the Retracement Survey, and the First Survey 49 2.9 Original Technological Methods of Boundary Creation not Relatable to Modern Methods 51 2.10 Original Lines may be Redescribed as a Result of a Retracement 51 2.11 Conclusions 52 Notes 53 Chapter 3 Ownership, Transfer, and Description of Real Property and Accompanying Rights 54 3.1 Concepts of Boundaries, Land Ownership, and Land Descriptions 54 3.2 Overview of Boundaries 56 3.3 Public and Private Lands 59 3.4 Sources of Title 60 3.5 Voluntary Transfer of Real Property 61 3.6 Chain of Title 61 3.7 Torrens Title System 63 3.8 Unwritten Rights or Title to Land 63 3.9 Methods of Voluntary Transfer of Title 64 3.10 Deed or Description 65 3.11 Title or Lien 66 3.12 Deed of Trust 66 3.13 Mortgage 67 3.14 Escrow 67 3.15 Title assurance and Title Insurance 67 3.16 Abstractors 69 3.17 Attorney’s Opinion 69 3.18 General land Descriptions 69 3.19 What is in a Description? 70 3.20 Measurements 71 3.21 Magnetic Directions 75 3.22 Reference Datums 77 3.23 Elements of Land Descriptions 78 3.24 Types of Descriptions 79 3.25 Conclusions 81 Notes 81 Chapter 4 Boundaries, Law, and Related Presumptions 83 4.1 Introduction 83 4.2 Constitutional Law and the Surveyor 84 4.3 Jurisdiction 85 4.4 Federal Jurisdiction 85 4.5 Federal Government, Agency, or Officer as a Party 86 4.6 Sovereign Immunity 87 4.7 United States as a Defendant 87 4.8 Disposing of Federal Lands 87 4.9 Color of Title Act 88 4.10 Public Law 120 88 4.11 Small Tracts Act 88 4.12 Researching the Laws 89 4.13 Court Reports 90 4.14 Legal Research 90 4.15 Judicial Notice 92 4.16 Evidence 93 4.17 Presumptions 94 4.18 Common Presumptions 95 4.19 Survey Systems Present in the United States 97 4.20 Conclusions 100 Bibliography 100 Notes 100 Chapter 5 Creation and Interpretation of Metes and Bounds and other Nonsectionalized Descriptions 102 5.1 Introduction 102 5.2 Methods of Creating Metes and Bounds or Nonsectionalized Descriptions 106 5.3 Metes Descriptions 106 5.4 Bounds Descriptions 109 5.5 Combination Metes and Bounds Descriptions 110 5.6 Strip Descriptions and Stationing 111 5.7 Descriptions by Reference 112 5.8 Aliquot Descriptions 112 5.9 Other Means of Creating Boundaries in Descriptions 114 5.10 Nomenclature in Metes and Bounds Descriptions 116 5.11 Adjoiners 124 5.12 Deed Terms for Curves 124 5.13 Lines and Their Elements 126 5.14 Tax Descriptions and Abbreviated Descriptions 133 5.15 Subdivision Descriptions 135 5.16 Parcels Created by Protraction 137 5.17 Features of Platting Acts 137 5.18 Writing Land Descriptions 138 5.19 Early Surveys 139 5.20 Priority of Calls in Metes and Bounds Surveys 141 5.21 Applying Priority Calls 142 5.22 Conclusions 144 Notes 145 Chapter 6 Creation and Retracement of General Land Office (GLO) Boundaries 146 6.1 Introduction 146 6.2 Original Surveys and Corrective Surveys 149 6.3 Law, Manuals, and Special Instructions 149 6.4 Effect of Manuals on Resurveys 150 6.5 History of The Public Land Survey System 151 6.6 Testing Ground: The Seven Ranges 153 6.7 Act of May 18, 1796—Clarification of 1785 157 6.8 Acts of 1800 159 6.9 1803—The System Explodes 162 6.10 Act of March 26, 1804 163 6.11 Act of February 11, 1805 163 6.12 Land Surveys After 1805 166 6.13 Survey Instructions 167 6.14 State Instructions and Statutes 172 6.15 Instruments Used 180 6.16 Field Notes 181 6.17 Nomenclature for Sections 181 6.18 Meandering 182 6.19 Resurveys and Retracements 183 6.20 Defective Boundaries Encountered in Resurveys 183 6.21 Sectionalized Surveys and Innovations 184 6.22 Irregular Original Government Subdivisions 184 6.23 Townships Other than Regular 185 6.24 Locating GLO Records in State Archives 185 6.25 Summary of the GLO System 187 Notes 190 Chapter 7 Federal and State Nonsectionalized Land Surveys 191 7.1 Introduction 191 7.2 Early New England and Other Colonial-ERA Surveys 195 7.3 Ohio Company of Associates 195 7.4 Donation Tract 196 7.5 Symmes Purchase 197 7.6 Virginia Military District 197 7.7 US Military Tract 198 7.8 Connecticut Western Reserve and Firelands 199 7.9 Moravian Tracts 199 7.10 Florida Keys Survey 199 7.11 Donation Land Claims 200 7.12 Exchange Surveys and Their Status 200 7.13 Prior Land Grants from Foreign Governments 201 7.14 French Grants in the Louisiana Purchase 201 7.15 Mississippi Townships 205 7.16 Soldier’s Additional Homestead 206 7.17 Indian Allotment Surveys 206 7.18 National Forest Homestead Entry 206 7.19 Tennessee Townships 207 7.20 Florida: Forbes Company Purchase Surveys 208 7.21 Georgia Lot System 209 7.22 Land Tenure Systems of Texas 213 7.23 General Comments 214 7.24 Hawaiian Land Laws 214 7.25 Puerto Rican Land Surveys 217 7.26 Federal Mineral Surveys: General Comments 220 7.27 Water and Mineral Right Laws 220 7.28 Land Open to Appropriation of Minerals 221 7.29 Veins, Lodes, or Ledges 221 7.30 Extralateral and Intralimital Rights 222 7.31 Mill Sites 224 7.32 Tunnel Locations 224 7.33 Size of Claims 224 7.34 Discovery 225 7.35 Locations 225 7.36 Possession 226 7.37 Annual Expenditures 226 7.38 Requirements for Patent 227 7.39 United States Mineral Surveyors 227 7.40 Survey of the Claim 227 7.41 Conclusions 228 Recommended Reading 229 Notes 229 Chapter 8 Locating Easements and Reversions 230 8.1 Introduction 230 8.2 Rights Granted 233 8.3 Fee Title or Easement Right 236 8.4 Three Easement Descriptions and Three Boundaries 237 8.5 Ownership of the Bed of Easements 237 8.6 Surveyor’s Responsibility as to Easements 238 8.7 Requirements for Locating Easements 238 8.8 Centerline Presumption 239 8.9 Conveyances with Private Way Boundaries 240 8.10 Use of Easements 241 8.11 Revival of Public Easements 241 8.12 Creation of Easement Boundaries 241 8.13 Dividing Private Street Ownership 244 8.14 Words Used in Centerline Conveyances 245 8.15 Apportioning Reversion Rights 246 8.16 General Principle of Reversion 246 8.17 Reversion Rights of a Lot on a Curved Street 247 8.18 Lots Adjoining Two Subdivision Boundaries 249 8.19 Lots at an Angle Point in a Road 249 8.20 Indeterminate Situations 250 8.21 Exceptions to the Rules of Apportionment 251 8.22 Describing Vacated Streets and Easements 252 8.23 Litigating Easements 254 8.24 Conclusions 254 Notes 254 Chapter 9 Riparian and Littoral Boundaries 256 9.1 Introduction 256 9.2 Ownership of the Seas 2 260 9.3 Ownership of the US Territorial Sea 261 9.4 Ownership of Interior Tidal Waters of the United States 263 9.5 Landward Boundary of Tidal Waters 263 9.6 Ownership of Nontidal Navigable Waters 267 9.7 Landward Boundaries of Nontidal Waters 268 9.8 Significance of Public Land Survey Meander Lines 27 269 9.9 Ownership of Non–Publicly Owned Submerged Lands 270 9.10 Swamp and Overflowed Lands 272 9.11 Navigational Servitude 273 9.12 Public Regulation of Riparian and Littoral Lands 273 9.13 Shoreline Changes and Water Boundaries 274 9.14 Apportionment of Riparian and Littoral Rights 276 9.15 Emergent or Omitted Islands 282 9.16 Water Boundaries Other Than Sea 282 9.17 Major Recognized Areas 283 9.18 Conclusions and Recommendations 283 Notes 283 Chapter 10 Retracing and “resurveying” Sectionalized Lands 286 10.1 Introduction 286 10.2 Areas of Authority 292 10.3 Resurvey or Retracement 293 10.4 Types of Surveys and Resurveys 294 10.5 Court of Proper Jurisdiction 295 10.6 Federal Patents 296 10.7 Intent of the Government 296 10.8 Senior Rights 297 10.9 Following the Footsteps 297 10.10 Lines Marked and Surveyed 298 10.11 Original Corners 298 10.12 Original Field Notes and Plats 299 10.13 Closing Corners 300 10.14 Identification of Corners and Lines 301 10.15 Monuments and Their Identification 302 10.16 Evidence of Corners 303 10.17 Use of Testimony in Boundaries 304 10.18 Common Usage 305 10.19 Using Recorded Information to Locate Original Lines 306 10.20 Proportioning: The Last Resort 306 10.21 Relocating Lost Corners 307 10.22 Proportionate Measure or Proration 309 10.23 Single Proportionate Measurement 309 10.24 Double Proportionate Measurement 310 10.25 Restoration of Lost Standard Corners on Standard Parallels, Correction Lines, and Baselines 312 10.26 Restoration of Lost Township Corners on Principal Meridians and Guide Meridians 312 10.27 Restoration of Lost Township and Section Corners Originally Established with Cross-Ties in Four Directions 313 10.28 Restoration of Lost Corners Along Township Lines 313 10.29 Restoration of Lost Township and Section Corners Where the Line was not Established in One Direction 314 10.30 Restoration of Lost Corners Where the Intersecting Lines have been Established in Only Two Directions 315 10.31 Restoration of Quarter-Section Corners in Regular Sections 316 10.32 Restoration of Quarter-Section Corners Where only Part of A Section was Surveyed Originally 316 10.33 Restoration of a Closing Section Corner on a Standard Parallel 316 10.34 Restoration of a Lost North Quarter Corner in a Closing Section 318 10.35 Restoration of Lost Nonriparian Meander Corners 319 10.36 Restoration of Riparian Meander Lines 319 10.37 Restoration of Nonriparian Meander Lines 320 10.38 Restoration of Irregular Exteriors 321 10.39 Lost Corner Restoration Methods 321 10.40 Resurvey Instructions Issued in 1879 and 1883 321 10.41 Half-Mile Posts in Florida and Alabama 322 Subdivision of Sections 323 10.42 General Comments 323 10.43 Subdivision by Protraction 323 10.44 Establishing the North Quarter Corner of Closing Sections on a Standard Parallel and other Quarter Corners not Originally Set 324 10.45 Establishment of Centerlines and Center Quarter Corners 325 10.46 Establishment of Quarter–Quarter Section Lines and Corners 327 10.47 Fractional Sections Centerline 327 10.48 Senior Right of Lines 328 10.49 Gross Errors and Erroneously Omitted Areas 328 10.50 Relocating Corners from other Townships or From Interior Corners 330 10.51 Procedures for Conducting Retracements 331 10.52 Interpretation of Aliquot Descriptions 332 10.53 According to the Government Measure 334 Differences Between State and Federal Interpretations 334 10.54 Applying State Laws 334 10.55 Topography 335 10.56 Boundaries by Area 336 10.57 Establishing Corners 337 10.58 Sections Created Under State Jurisdiction 337 10.59 Presumptions and Realities for GLO Surveys 338 10.60 Conclusions 341 Notes 341 Chapter 11 Locating Sequential Conveyances 343 11.1 Introduction 343 11.2 Definition of Sequential Conveyances 347 11.3 Simultaneous Conveyances 347 11.4 Possession 348 11.5 Sequential Patents 348 11.6 Importance of Knowledge 348 11.7 Junior and Senior Rights Between Private Parties 349 11.8 Junior and Senior Rights Between Private Parties; Exception 350 11.9 Deeds Must be in Writing and Deemed to be Whole 350 11.10 Direction of the Survey 351 11.11 Terms of the Deed 352 11.12 Call for a Plat 352 11.13 Informative and Controlling Terms 353 Order of Importance of Conflicting Title Elements 354 11.14 General Comments 354 11.15 Senior Rights 355 11.16 Call for an Adjoiner 356 11.17 Written Intentions of the Parties to the Deed 357 11.18 Aids to Interpret the Intent of a Deed 358 11.19 Control of Unwritten Title Lines 359 11.20 Lines Marked and Surveyed 359 11.21 Corner Definitions 361 11.22 Control of Monuments 362 11.23 Control Between Conflicting Monuments 364 11.24 Explanation of the Principles 365 11.25 Importance of the Word “TO” 369 11.26 Dignity of Record Monuments 369 11.27 Control Point of a Monument 369 11.28 Uncalled-For Monuments 370 11.29 Error or Mistake in a Description 371 11.30 Control of Bearing and Distance 371 11.31 Control of Either Bearing or Distance 372 11.32 Distribution of Errors in Several Boundary Lines 375 11.33 Cardinal Directions 376 11.34 Unrestricted General Terms 377 11.35 Direction of Survey 377 11.36 Area or Surface 378 11.37 Point of Beginning 379 11.38 Construed Most Strongly Against Grantor 379 11.39 Errors and Ambiguous Terms 379 11.40 Coordinates 380 11.41 Direct Line Measurement 381 11.42 Treatment of Curves 382 11.43 First Stated Conditions 382 11.44 Written and Character Numbers 383 11.45 Unit Implied 383 11.46 Feet and Inches 383 11.47 General and Particular Provisions 383 Basis of Bearings 384 11.48 Deflection Method Versus Compass Bearings 384 11.49 Sequential Conveyances in Texas 388 11.50 Summary, Interpretation of the Principles, and Conclusion 389 Bibliography 390 Notes 390 Chapter 12 Locating Simultaneously Created Boundaries 393 12.1 Introduction 393 12.2 Defining Subdivisions 397 Subdivision Boundaries and corners 398 12.3 Aliquot Part Subdivision 398 12.4 Controlling Boundaries 398 12.5 Subdivision Macro Boundary Wrongly Monumented 400 12.6 Subdivision Boundaries Incorrectly Described 401 Conflicting Elements in Descriptions 401 12.7 General Comments 401 12.8 Original Method of Creating Lots 401 12.9 Intention of the Parties 402 12.10 Finality of Original Lines 402 12.11 Control of Original Monuments within Subdivision Boundaries 404 12.12 Title Monuments 405 12.13 Control of Monuments Over Plats 405 12.14 Certainty of Monument Identification 406 12.15 Record Description of Monuments 406 12.16 Principles for Presumed Control Between Conflicting Monuments Within Subdivisions 407 12.17 Explaining Principles 407 12.18 Introduction to Proportioning 411 Establishment of Streets 412 12.19 General Comments 412 12.20 Establishment of Streets by Natural Monuments 412 12.21 Establishment of Streets and Alleys By Artificial Monuments and Lines Actually Run at The Time of Making The Plat 413 12.22 Establishment of Streets by Improvements 415 12.23 Establishment of Streets by the Line of a Nearby Street 416 12.24 Establishment of Streets by Plat 417 12.25 Establishment of Streets Where Width is not Given 418 12.26 Establishment of Streets by City Engineers’ Monuments 418 Establishment of Lots within Subdivisions 420 12.27 Effect of Mathematical Error 420 12.28 Excess or Deficiency 421 12.29 Proration: A Rule of Last Resort 421 12.30 Excess OR Deficiency Confined to a Block 422 12.31 Excess OR Deficiency Distribution Within Blocks 422 12.32 Single Proportionate Measure 423 12.33 Single Proportionate Measure on Curves 424 12.34 Distribution of Excess and Deficiency Beyond a Monument 426 12.35 Establishment of Lots Where the End Lot Measurement is not Given 427 12.36 Remnant Principle 427 12.37 Establishment of Lots Where no Lot Measurement is Given 432 12.38 Establishment of Lots with Area only Given 432 12.39 New York Rule for Establishment of Lots 433 12.40 Summary of Proration Rules 436 12.41 Establishment of Lots Adjoining Subdivision Boundaries 437 12.42 Establishment of Lots Adjoining a Subdivision Correctly Established 437 12.43 Establishment of Lots Overlapping the True Subdivision Boundaries 437 12.44 Establishment of Lots not Touching the True Boundary of the Subdivision 438 12.45 Proration of Excess and Deficiency in Blocks Closing on Subdivision Boundaries 439 12.46 Locating Lots from Boundary Lines 440 12.47 Obliterated and Lost Subdivisions 440 Proceedings in Partition 441 12.48 General Comments 441 12.49 Establishment of Lines Determined by Proceedings in Partition 441 12.50 Establishment of Boundaries of Allottees of Wills 442 12.51 Deed Divisions 442 12.52 Comments 442 Notes 443 Chapter 13 Locating Combination Descriptions and Conveyances 445 13.1 Introduction 445 “OF” Descriptions 447 13.2 “OF,” “IN,” and “AT” Descriptions within Subdivisions and Adjoining Streets 447 13.3 “OF” Descriptions within Metes and Bounds Descriptions and Adjoining Streets 449 13.4 Direction of Measurement 452 13.5 Proportional “OF” Conveyance 452 13.6 Exception by One-Half by Area 454 13.7 Indeterminate Proportional Conveyances 455 13.8 Angular Direction of the Dividing Line in “OF” Descriptions 455 13.9 Acreage “OF” Descriptions 458 13.10 Ambiguity 460 Overlaps and Gaps 463 13.11 Calls From Two Directions 463 Establishment of Property Described by Both Metes and Bounds and Subdivision Descriptions 464 13.12 Double Descriptions 464 13.13 New York Double Descriptions 465 13.14 Natural Phenomena and Boundaries 465 13.15 Recognition of Past Events 469 Notes 471 Chapter 14 Role of the Surveyor 472 14.1 Introduction 472 14.2 Function of the Surveyor 474 14.3 Opinions of Fact and Applications of Law 474 14.4 Establishment of Boundaries 476 14.5 Establishment in Louisiana 477 Private Surveys 477 14.6 Responsibility and Authority of the Surveyor 477 14.7 Basis of a Boundary Survey 479 14.8 How Much Research? 479 14.9 Ownership 481 14.10 Encroachments 481 14.11 Searching for Monuments 481 14.12 Possession Marking Original Survey Lines 482 14.13 Evidence 483 14.14 Setting Monuments 483 14.15 Plats 484 14.16 Liability 485 14.17 Conclusion 486 Notes 488 Chapter 15 The Ethics and Moral Responsibilities of Boundary Creation and Retracements 489 15.1 Introduction 489 15.2 The Philosophy of Boundaries 490 15.3 Applying the Principles to Creating and Retracing Boundaries 492 15.4 Final Comments 497 Notes 498 Glossary of Terms 499 Index 525

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis new edition of the classic quantity surveying textbook retains its basic structure but has been thoroughly updated to reflect recent changes in the industry, especially in procurement.Table of ContentsAbout the Authors vii Contributors to the Ninth Edition viii Preface to the First Edition ix Preface to the Ninth Edition x Acknowledgements xi Nomenclature and Acronyms xii About the Companion Website xiv Introduction 1. An Overview of Cost Planning 3 2. Building Information Modelling 13 3. A Three-Stage Cost Planning Strategy 23 Phase I: Cost Planning at the Briefing Stage 4. Developers’ Motivations and Needs 31 5. Client Identification and the Briefing Process: Aligning the Client Need with the Brief and the Budget 39 6. The Economics of Cost Planning: The Time Value of Money and Cash Flow 59 7. Whole Life Planning: The Methodology of Whole Life Cycle Costing and Design for Sustainability 75 8. Construction Procurement and the Relationship with Project Costs 91 Phase II: Cost Planning at the Design Stage 9. The Design Process and the Project Life Cycle 109 10. Standard Methods of Cost Modelling in Design 128 11. Cost and Performance Data: Sourcing and Application to the Cost Plan 160 12. Construction Cost Indices 182 13. Cost Planning the Brief 195 14. Cost Planning at the Scheme Design Stage 209 Phase III: Cost Planning and Control at Production and Operational Stages 15. Planning and Managing Project Resources and Costs 231 16. Resource-Based Cost Models 257 17. Cost Control (1): Final Design and Production Drawing Stage 270 18. Cost Control (2): Real Time 280 19. Cost Planning and Control of Refurbishment, Life Cycle Renewal and Repair Work 300 Appendix: Discounting and interest formulae and tables 307 Index 317

Read more less

Book SynopsisSeismic Retrofit of Existing Reinforced Concrete Buildings Understand the complexities and challenges of retrofitting building infrastructure Across the world, buildings are gradually becoming structurally unsound. Many were constructed before seismic load capacity was a mandatory component of building standards, and were often built with low-quality materials or using unsafe construction practices. Many more are simply aging, with materials degrading, and steel corroding. As a result, efforts are ongoing to retrofit existing structures, and to develop new techniques for assessing and enhancing seismic load capacity in order to create a safer building infrastructure worldwide. Seismic Retrofit of Existing Reinforced Concrete Buildings provides a thorough book-length discussion of these techniques and their applications. Balancing theory and practice, the book provides engineers with a broad base of knowledge from which to approach real-world seismic assessments and retrofitting projeTable of ContentsForeword by Rui Pinho xvii Acknowledgments xvix 1 Introduction 1 1.1 General 1 1.2 Why Do Old RC Buildings Need Strengthening? 3 1.3 Main Differences Between Assessment and Design Methodologies 4 1.4 Whom Is this Book For? 7 1.5 Main Standards for the Seismic Evaluation of Existing Structures 8 References 12 2 Know Your Building: The Importance of Accurate Knowledge of the Structural Configuration 15 2.1 Introduction 15 2.2 What Old RC Buildings Are Like 16 2.2.1 Lack of Stirrups 17 2.2.2 Unconventional Reinforcement in the Members 18 2.2.3 Large, Lightly Reinforced Shear Walls or Lack of Shear Walls 19 2.2.4 Lap Splices 22 2.2.5 Corrosion 22 2.2.6 Geometry: Location of Structural Members 25 2.2.7 Geometry: Bad Alignment of the Columns 25 2.2.8 Geometry: Arbitrary Alterations During Construction or During the Building’s Lifetime 26 2.2.9 Bad Practices with Respect to the Mechanical and Electrical Installations 26 2.2.10 Soft Ground Stories 28 2.2.11 Short Columns 28 2.2.12 Different Construction Methods 30 2.2.13 Foundation Conditions 30 2.2.14 Discussion 32 2.2.15 One Final Example 34 2.3 How Come Our Predecessors Were So Irresponsible? 34 2.4 What the Codes Say – Knowledge Level and the Knowledge Factor 36 2.5 Final Remarks 39 References 39 3 Measurement of Existing Buildings, Destructive and Nondestructive Testing 41 3.1 Introduction 41 3.2 Information Needed for the Measured Drawings 41 3.3 Geometry 44 3.4 Details – Reinforcement 46 3.5 Material Strengths 52 3.6 Concrete Tests – Destructive Methods 54 3.7 Concrete Tests – Nondestructive Methods, NDT 55 3.7.1 Rebound Hammer Test 56 3.7.2 Penetration Resistance Test 56 3.7.3 Pull-Off Test 57 3.7.4 Ultrasonic Pulse Velocity Test, UPV 57 3.8 Steel Tests 58 3.9 Infill Panel Tests 58 3.10 What Is the Typical Procedure for Monitoring an Existing Building? 59 3.11 Final Remarks 61 References 62 4 Methods for Strengthening Reinforced Concrete Buildings 63 4.1 Introduction 63 4.2 Literature Review 64 4.3 Reinforced Concrete Jackets 67 4.3.1 Application 67 4.3.2 Advantages and Disadvantages 74 4.3.3 Design Issues: Modeling, Analysis, and Checks 76 4.4 Shotcrete 77 4.4.1 Introduction 77 4.4.2 Dry Mix vs. Wet Mix Shotcrete 79 4.4.3 Advantages and Disadvantages of Shotcrete 80 4.4.4 What Is It Actually Called – Shotcrete or Gunite? 81 4.4.5 Materials, Proportioning, and Properties 81 4.4.5.1 Cement 81 4.4.5.2 Pozzolans 82 4.4.5.3 Silica Fume 82 4.4.5.4 Aggregates 82 4.4.5.5 Water 83 4.4.5.6 Fiber Reinforcement 83 4.4.5.7 Chemical Admixtures and Accelerators 85 4.4.5.8 Reinforcing Steel 85 4.4.6 Mix Proportions for the Dry-Mix Process 85 4.4.7 Equipment and Crew 86 4.4.7.1 Dry-Mix Process 86 4.4.7.2 Wet-Mix Process 87 4.4.8 Curing and Protection 87 4.4.9 Testing and Evaluation 88 4.5 New Reinforced Concrete Shear Walls 89 4.5.1 Application 89 4.5.2 Foundation Systems of New Shear Walls 97 4.5.3 Advantages and Disadvantages 98 4.5.4 Design Issues: Modeling and Analysis 98 4.6 RC Infilling 99 4.6.1 Application 99 4.6.2 Advantages and Disadvantages 100 4.7 Steel Bracing 101 4.7.1 Application 101 4.7.2 Advantages and Disadvantages 105 4.7.3 Design Issues: Modeling, Analysis, and Checks 106 4.8 Fiber-Reinforced Polymers (FRPs) 106 4.8.1 FRP Composite Materials 106 4.8.2 FRP Composites in Civil Engineering and Retrofit 107 4.8.3 FRP Composite Materials 109 4.8.4 FRP Wrapping 110 4.8.5 FRP Laminates 115 4.8.6 Near Surface Mounted FRP Reinforcement 119 4.8.7 FRP Strings 120 4.8.8 Sprayed FRP 122 4.8.9 Anchoring Issues 123 4.8.10 Advantages and Disadvantages of FRP Systems 123 4.8.11 Design Issues 125 4.9 Steel Plates and Steel Jackets 127 4.9.1 Advantages and Disadvantages 130 4.9.2 Design Issues 131 4.10 Damping Devices 131 4.11 Seismic Isolation 133 4.11.1 Type of Base Isolation Systems 136 4.11.2 Advantages and Disadvantages 138 4.11.3 Design Issues 138 4.12 Selective Strengthening and Weakening Through Infills 139 4.13 Strengthening of Infills 141 4.13.1 Glass or Carbon FRPs 142 4.13.2 Textile Reinforced Mortars TRM 143 4.13.3 Shotcrete 145 4.14 Connecting New and Existing Members 145 4.14.1 Design Issues 147 4.15 Strengthening of Individual Members 148 4.15.1 Strengthening of RC Columns or Walls 148 4.15.2 Strengthening of RC Beams 149 4.15.3 Strengthening of RC Slabs 153 4.15.4 Strengthening of RC Ground Slabs 154 4.16 Crack Repair – Epoxy Injections 157 4.17 Protection Against Corrosion, Repair Mortars, and Cathodic Protection 158 4.18 Foundation Strengthening 160 4.19 Concluding Remarks Regarding Strengthening Techniques 163 4.20 Evaluation of Different Seismic Retrofitting Solutions: A Case Study 164 4.20.1 Building Configuration 164 4.20.2 Effects of the Infills on the Structural Behavior 170 4.20.3 Strengthening with Jacketing 175 4.20.4 Strengthening with New RC Walls (Entire Building Height) 177 4.20.5 Strengthening with New RC Walls (Ground Level Only) 182 4.20.6 Strengthening with Braces 189 4.20.7 Strengthening with FRP Wrapping 192 4.20.8 Strengthening with Seismic Isolation 195 4.20.9 Comparison of the Methods 198 References 200 5 Criteria for Selecting Strengthening Methods – Case Studies 221 5.1 Things Are Rarely Simple 221 5.2 Criteria for Selecting Strengthening Method 222 5.3 Basic Principles of Conceptual Design 224 5.4 Some Rules of Thumb 226 5.5 Case Studies 231 5.5.1 Case Study 1: Seismic Upgrade of a Five-Story Hotel 232 5.5.2 Case Study 2: Seismic Upgrade of a Four-Story Hotel 236 5.5.3 Case Study 3: Seismic Upgrade of a Four-Story Hotel 237 5.5.4 Case Study 4: Seismic Upgrade of a Three-Story Residential Building 241 5.5.5 Case Study 5: Seismic Upgrade of a Three-Story Residential Building for the Addition of Two New Floors 241 5.5.6 Case Study 6: Seismic Strengthening of an 11-Story Building 244 5.5.7 Case Study 7: Seismic Strengthening of a Five-Story Building 247 5.5.8 Case Study 8: Seismic Strengthening of a Three-Story Building 247 5.5.9 Case Study 9: Strengthening a Building Damaged by a Severe Earthquake 248 5.5.10 Case Study 10: Strengthening of an 11-Story Building 251 5.5.11 Case Study 11: Strengthening of a Two-Story Building with Basement 253 5.5.12 Case Study 12: Strengthening of a Weak Ground Story with FRP Wraps 255 5.5.13 Case Study 13 (Several Examples): Strengthening of RC Slabs 257 5.5.14 Case Study 14: Strengthening of a Ground Slab 260 5.5.15 Case Study 15: Strengthening of Beam That Has Failed in Shear 260 5.5.16 Case Study 16: Demolition and Reconstruction of a RC Beam 260 5.5.17 Bonus Case Study 1: Strengthening of an Industrial Building 261 5.5.18 Bonus Case Study 2: Strengthening of an Industrial Building 262 5.5.19 Bonus Case Study 3: Strengthening of a Residential Building 263 References 268 6 Performance Levels and Performance Objectives 269 6.1 Introduction 269 6.1.1 Selection of Performance Objectives in the Design of New Buildings 269 6.1.2 Selection of Performance Objectives in the Assessment of Existing Buildings 270 6.2 Seismic Assessment and Retrofit Procedures 270 6.2.1 Seismic Assessment Procedures 270 6.2.2 Seismic Retrofit Procedures 271 6.3 Understanding Performance Objectives 272 6.3.1 Target-Building Performance Levels 272 6.3.1.1 Structural Performance Levels 273 6.3.1.2 Nonstructural Performance Levels 276 6.3.1.3 Target Building Performance Levels 279 6.3.2 Seismic Hazard Levels 280 6.3.3 Performance Objectives 282 6.3.4 Eurocode 8, Part 3, and Other Standards 284 6.3.5 The Rationale for Accepting a Lower Performance Level for Existing Buildings 286 6.4 Choosing the Correct Performance Objective 287 References 289 7 Linear and Nonlinear Methods of Analysis 291 7.1 Introduction 291 7.2 General Requirements 294 7.2.1 Loading Combinations 294 7.2.2 Multidirectional Seismic Effects 295 7.2.3 Accidental Torsional Effects 295 7.3 Linear Static Procedure 296 7.4 Linear Dynamic Procedure 296 7.5 Nonlinear Structural Analysis 298 7.5.1 Nonlinear Structural Analysis in Engineering Practice 298 7.5.2 Challenges Associated with Nonlinear Analysis 300 7.5.3 Some Theoretical Background 301 7.5.3.1 Introduction 301 7.5.3.2 Sources of Nonlinearity 301 7.5.3.3 Solving Nonlinear Problems in Structural Analysis 302 7.5.3.4 Convergence Criteria 305 7.5.3.5 Numerical Instability, Divergence, and Iteration Prediction 306 7.5.4 Implications from the Basic Assumptions of Nonlinear Analysis 307 7.5.5 How Reliable Are Numerical Predictions from Nonlinear Analysis Methods? 309 7.5.6 Final Remarks on Nonlinear Analysis 310 7.6 Nonlinear Static Procedure 311 7.6.1 Pushover Analysis 311 7.6.2 Information Obtained with Pushover Analysis 312 7.6.3 Theoretical Background on Pushover Analysis 313 7.6.4 Target Displacement 314 7.6.5 Applying Forces vs. Applying Displacements 316 7.6.6 Controlling the Forces or the Displacements 317 7.6.6.1 Load Control 317 7.6.6.2 Response Control 318 7.6.7 Control Node 318 7.6.8 Lateral Load Patterns 319 7.6.9 Pushover Analysis Limitations 319 7.7 Nonlinear Dynamic Procedure 320 7.7.1 Information Obtained with Nonlinear Dynamic Analysis 322 7.7.2 Selecting and Scaling Accelerograms 322 7.7.2.1 Natural Scaled and Matched Accelerograms 324 7.7.2.2 Artificial and Synthetic Accelerograms 326 7.7.3 Advantages and Disadvantages of Nonlinear Dynamic Analysis 327 7.8 Comparative Assessment of Analytical Methods 328 7.8.1 Advantages and Disadvantages of the Analytical Methods 328 7.8.2 Selection of the Best Analysis Procedure for Structural Assessment 329 References 330 8 Structural Modeling in Linear and Nonlinear Analysis 333 8.1 Introduction 333 8.2 Mathematical Modeling 333 8.3 Modeling of Beams and Columns 334 8.3.1 Material Inelasticity 334 8.3.2 Geometric Nonlinearities 336 8.3.3 Modeling of Structural Frame Elements 337 8.3.3.1 Concentrated Plasticity Elements 338 8.3.3.2 Advantages and Disadvantages of Concentrated Plasticity Models 339 8.3.3.3 Distributed Plasticity Elements – Fiber Modeling 339 8.3.3.4 Types of Distributed Plasticity Elements 340 8.3.3.5 Advantages and Disadvantages of Distributed Plasticity Models 341 8.3.3.6 Considerations Regarding the Best Frame Model for Structural Members 342 8.4 Modeling of Shear Walls 344 8.5 Modeling of Slabs 345 8.6 Modeling of Stairs 347 8.7 Modeling of Infills 348 8.7.1 A Simple Example: Infilled Frame vs. Bare Frame 349 8.7.2 Another Example: Partially Infilled Frame (Soft Story) vs. Bare Frame 351 8.7.3 Problems in the Modeling of Infills 354 8.8 Modeling of Beam-Column Joints 356 8.9 Modeling of Bar Slippage 358 8.10 Shear Deformations 359 8.11 Foundation Modeling 359 8.12 How Significant Are Our Modeling Decisions? 359 References 360 9 Checks and Acceptance Criteria 363 9.1 Introduction 363 9.2 Primary and Secondary Members 364 9.3 Deformation-Controlled & Force-Controlled Actions 365 9.4 Expected Vs. Lower-Bound Material Strengths 366 9.5 Knowledge Level and Knowledge Factor 368 9.6 Capacity Checks 369 9.6.1 Capacity Checks for Linear Methods – ASCE 41 369 9.6.1.1 Component Demands 369 9.6.1.2 Component Capacities 370 9.6.2 Capacity Checks for Nonlinear Methods – ASCE 41 372 9.6.2.1 Component Demands 372 9.6.2.2 Component Capacities 372 9.6.3 Capacity Checks for Linear Methods – Eurocode 8, Part 3 372 9.6.3.1 Component Demands 372 9.6.3.2 Component Capacities 372 9.6.4 Capacity Checks for Nonlinear Methods – Eurocode 8, Part 3 374 9.6.4.1 Component Demands 374 9.6.4.2 Component Capacities 374 9.7 Main Checks to Be Carried Out in an Assessment Procedure 374 9.7.1 Bending Checks 375 9.7.1.1 Eurocode Framework (EC8: Part 1 and EC8: Part 3) – Nonlinear Methods 375 9.7.1.2 US Framework (ASCE 41 and ACI 318) – Nonlinear Methods 376 9.7.2 Shear Checks 376 9.7.2.1 Eurocodes Framework (EC8, Part 1, and EC8, Part 3) 376 9.7.2.2 US Framework (ASCE 41 and ACI 318) 378 9.7.3 Beam-Column Joints 378 References 378 10 Practical Example: Assessment and Strengthening of a Six-Story RC Building 381 10.1 Introduction 381 10.2 Building Description 381 10.3 Knowledge of the Building and Confidence Factor 383 10.3.1 Geometry 383 10.3.2 Reinforcement 383 10.3.3 Material Strengths 384 10.4 Seismic Action and Load Combinations 386 10.5 Structural Modeling 387 10.6 Eigenvalue Analysis 391 10.7 Nonlinear Static Procedure 393 10.7.1 Lateral Load Patterns 393 10.7.2 Selection of the Control Node 394 10.7.3 Capacity Curve and Target Displacement Calculation 394 10.7.4 Safety Verifications 398 10.7.5 Chord Rotation Checks 398 10.7.6 Example of the Calculation of Chord Rotation Capacity 399 10.7.7 Shear Checks 400 10.7.8 Example of the Calculation of Shear Capacity 401 10.7.9 Beam-Column Joint Checks 403 10.7.10 Example of the Checks for Beam-Column Joints 403 10.8 Strengthening of the Building 406 10.8.1 Strengthening with Jackets 406 10.8.2 Designing the Interventions 407 10.8.3 Deliverables 415 10.8.4 Strengthening with Shear Walls 415 References 421 Appendix A Standards and Guidelines 423 A.1 Eurocodes 423 A.1.1 Performance Requirements 423 A.1.1.1 Limit State of Near Collapse (NC) 423 A.1.1.2 Limit State of Significant Damage (SD) 423 A.1.1.3 Limit State of Damage Limitation (DL) 423 A.1.2 Information for Structural Assessment 424 A.1.2.1 KL1: Limited Knowledge 424 A.1.2.2 KL2: Normal Knowledge 424 A.1.2.3 KL3: Full Knowledge 425 A.1.2.4 Confidence Factors 425 A.1.3 Safety Factors 425 A.1.4 Capacity Models for Assessment and Checks 425 A.1.4.1 Deformation Capacity 425 A.1.4.2 Shear Capacity 428 A.1.4.3 FRP Wrapping 429 A.1.5 Target Displacement Calculation in Pushover Analysis 429 A.1.5.1 Transformation to an Equivalent Single Degree of Freedom (SDOF) System 430 A.1.5.2 Determination of the Idealized Elasto-Perfectly Plastic Force-Displacement Relationship 430 A.1.5.3 Determination of the Period of the Idealized Equivalent SDOF System 431 A.1.5.4 Determination of the Target Displacement for the Equivalent SDOF System 431 A.1.5.5 Determination of the Target Displacement for the MDOF System 432 A.2. ASCE 41-17 432 A.2.1 Performance Requirements 432 A.2.1.1 Performance Level of Operational Level (1-A) 433 A.2.1.2 Performance Level of Immediate Occupancy (1-B) 433 A.2.1.3 Performance Level of Life Safety (3-C) 433 A.2.1.4 Performance Level of Collapse Prevention (5-D) 433 A.2.2 Information for Structural Assessment 433 A.2.2.1 Minimum Knowledge 434 A.2.2.2 Usual Knowledge 434 A.2.2.3 Comprehensive Knowledge 434 A.2.3 Safety Factors 434 A.2.4 Capacity Models for Assessment and Checks 434 A.2.4.1 Deformation Capacity 435 A.2.4.2 Shear Capacity 435 A.2.4.3 FRP Wrapping 441 A.2.5 Target Displacement Calculation in the Nonlinear Static Procedure 441 A.2.5.1 Determination of the Idealized Elasto-Perfectly Plastic Force-Displacement Relationship 443 A.2.5.2 Determination of the Fundamental Period 444 References 444 Appendix B Poor Construction and Design Practices in Older Buildings 445 B.1 Stirrup Spacing 445 B.2 Lap Splices 445 B.3 Member Alignment 445 B.4 Pipes inside RC Members 445 B.5 Bad Casting of Concrete 449 B.6 Footings 449 Appendix C Methods of Strengthening 455 C.1 Reinforced Concrete Jackets 455 C.2 New Shear Walls 465 C.3 Fiber-Reinforced Polymers 468 C.3.1 FRP Wrapping of Columns 468 C.3.2 FRP Fabrics in Slabs 473 C.3.3 FRP Wraps for Shear Strengthening 473 C.3.4 FRP Laminates 476 C.3.5 FRP Strings 482 C.4 Steel Braces 485 C.5 Steel Jackets 487 C.6 Steel Plates 488 C.7 Infills 491 C.8 Foundations 493 C.9 Dowels and Anchorages 500 C.10 Demolition with Concrete Cutting 502 C.11 Reinforcement Couplers 506 C.12 Epoxy Injections 507 Index 509

Read more less